JP7669738B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as slot machines.

One type of gaming machine is a reel-type gaming machine, such as a slot machine. A slot machine has multiple reels with multiple symbols on them, and when a player inserts a medal and operates a start lever, each reel starts to spin. After each reel starts to spin, the reels stop sequentially when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed. In addition, in a slot machine, a lottery is held on the condition that a specified number of medals are inserted and the start lever is operated, and if a predetermined benefit (a predetermined number of medals is awarded or a special game state advantageous to the player) is won based on the lottery, the predetermined benefit is awarded on the condition that the symbol associated with the predetermined benefit stops on a preset pay line (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-126337 A

In addition, there is always a demand for innovative presentation of gaming machines.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the presentation.

The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A variable display means including a plurality of reel bodies to which a plurality of types of identification information are attached and a drive means for driving the reel bodies;
A start operation means operable by a player;
A start operation detection means for detecting an operation of the start operation means;
A plurality of stop operation means are provided corresponding to the plurality of reels, each of which is operable by a player;
A stop operation detection means for detecting an operation of the stop operation means;
A control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit to a player based on the establishment of a start condition accompanied by detection by the start operation detection means;
A drive control means for starting the drive of the reel body based on the establishment of the start condition, and for stopping the drive of the corresponding reel body based on the establishment of a stop condition accompanied by detection by the stop operation detection means,
In a gaming machine configured to be able to stop the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery at a specific position visible to a player based on the establishment of the stop condition,
A specific performance means capable of executing a specific performance including a specific operation of the reel body;
A presentation display means capable of executing a presentation display that indicates or suggests the result of the lottery;
a special effect display means for displaying a special effect when the specific effect is executed ;
The gaming machine includes an opening and closing member,
The opening and closing member is configured to be able to know that it has been opened,
The state of the reel body that is pseudo-stopped and displayed in a specific operation of the reel body is different depending on the value to be given,
When the first value is assigned,
When the specific performance is performed without knowing that the opening and closing member has been opened after it is determined that the specific performance is to be performed, the specific performance is performed in a first mode,
When the specific performance is performed in a state where it is determined that the opening and closing member is opened after the determination to perform the specific performance, the specific performance is performed in a second mode different from the first mode,
In the case where a second value different from the first value is assigned,
When the specific performance is performed without knowing that the opening and closing member has been opened after it is determined that the specific performance is to be performed, the specific performance is performed in a third mode,
When the specific performance is performed while it is understood that the opening and closing member is opened after it is determined that the specific performance is to be performed, the specific performance is performed in a fourth mode different from the third mode,
The second aspect is characterized in that a display is executed using characters that are not displayed in the first aspect but are displayed in the second aspect .

The present invention can improve the presentation.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine according to one embodiment (first embodiment). 1 is an oblique view of the slot machine with the front door closed. 1 is an oblique view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. FIG. This is a diagram showing the symbols on each reel. FIG. 2 is a block circuit diagram of the slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process during a power outage. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal process. 13 is a flowchart showing a lottery process. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a medal payout process. 13 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a bonus symbol determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing RT state processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a guide game setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a freeze game process. 13 is a flowchart showing processing during freeze play. 13 is a flowchart showing a guidance game performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a freeze effect setting process. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display mode of a reel unit and an effect display device. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display mode of a reel unit and an effect display device. 13 is a flowchart showing an AT start freeze process in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a process during a start freeze. 13 is a flowchart showing a process during a start freeze. 13 is a flowchart showing a process during a start freeze. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific AT freeze process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of a modified example.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention applied to a reel type gaming machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a front view of a slot machine 10, Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with a front door 12 closed, Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, Fig. 4 is a rear view of the front door 12, and Fig. 5 is a front view of a housing 11.

As shown in Figures 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is made of a top plate 11a, a bottom plate 11b, a back plate 11c, a left plate 11d, and a right plate 11e that are formed as wooden plates, and the adjacent plates 11a to 11e are fixed by a fixing means such as adhesive, so that the overall shape is a box with an open front. Note that the plates 11a to 11e may be made of synthetic resin panels or metal panels other than wooden panels, or may be made by forming a single box shape from synthetic resin material or metal material. The housing 11 constructed as described above is attached to the so-called island equipment by nailing it when it is installed in the game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 as an opening/closing member so that it can be opened and closed. That is, a pair of upper and lower support shafts 25a, 25b are provided on the left side plate 11d of the housing 11. The support shafts 25a, 25b have a tapered shaft portion that protrudes upward. Meanwhile, the front door 12 is provided with support brackets 26a, 26b that correspond to the support shafts 25a, 25b and have insertion holes into which the shaft portions of the support shafts 25a, 25b are inserted. Then, by placing the support brackets 26a, 26b above the support shafts 25a, 25b and then lowering the front door 12, the shaft portions of the support shafts 25a, 25b are inserted into the insertion holes of the support brackets 26a, 26b. As a result, the front door 12 is supported on the housing 11 so that it can rotate about an opening/closing axis that extends in the vertical direction and connects the two support shafts 25a and 25b, and is configured so that the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by this rotation.

The front door 12 is locked and cannot be opened by a locking device provided on the back side of the door. A key cylinder 20 is provided at the top right end of the front door 12 as an unlocking operation unit. The key cylinder 20 is integrated with the locking device, and is configured so that the locked state can be released by a specified key operation on the key cylinder 20. Here, we will provide an overview of the locking mechanism including the locking device.

A locking device is provided on the back side of the right end of the front door 12, that is, on the opposite side of the opening axis of the front door 12. The locking device includes a base frame that extends in the vertical direction and is fixed to the front door 12, a key cylinder 20 that is provided so as to extend from the upper part of the base frame to the front of the front door 12, and a long interlocking rod 21 that is attached to the base frame so as to be movable in the vertical direction. Of the locking device, only the key cylinder 20 is provided in a state where it protrudes forward of the front door 12. The position where the key cylinder 20 is provided is the upper position of the front door 12 where the wall thickness is thin, and as a result, a versatile key cylinder 20 with a short overall length can be used. The interlocking rod 21 is moved downward by operating the key inserted in the key cylinder 20 clockwise. The interlocking rod 21 is provided with a pair of upper and lower hook fittings 22 that are hook-shaped. When the front door 12 is closed relative to the housing 11, the hook fittings 22 are engaged with the support fittings 23 on the housing 11 side to lock the door. The hook fittings 22 are provided with a biasing member such as a coil spring that biases the hook fittings 22 in the direction to maintain the locked state. When the key is operated clockwise relative to the key cylinder 20, the interlocking rod 21 moves downward, and the hook fittings 22 are moved against the biasing force of the biasing member, releasing the engagement between the hook fittings 22 and the support fittings 23, and the front door 12 is unlocked relative to the housing 11.

A game panel 30 is provided near the top center of the front door 12 to instruct or suggest the game status to the player. The game panel 30 has three vertically long display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R arranged side by side. The display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R are made of a transparent or semi-transparent material (e.g., synthetic resin, reinforced glass, etc.), and the interior of the slot machine 10 can be seen through each of the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R. The display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into two parts, an upper part and a lower part, by a partition plate 40, and a reel unit 41 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 40. The reel unit 41 is provided with a left reel 42L, a center reel 42M, and a right reel 42R as rotating bodies (rotating bodies) each formed in a cylindrical (annular) shape. Each reel 42L, 42M, and 42R is supported so that it can rotate so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of each reel 42L, 42M, and 42R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and each reel 42L, 42M, and 42R corresponds one-to-one to each display window 31L, 31M, and 31R. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 42L, 42M, and 42R is visible through the corresponding display window 31L, 31M, and 31R. In addition, when the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are projected through the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R as if they are moving from top to bottom. LEDs (not shown) are built into the upper and lower edges of the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R, and the LEDs that correspond to the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R that should stop are illuminated as appropriate.

Each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is connected to a stepping motor 61L, 61M, and 61R as a driving means, and each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R can be rotated individually, i.e., independently, by driving each of the stepping motors 61L, 61M, and 61R. Since each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R has the same configuration, the left reel 42L will be taken as an example and described with reference to FIG. 6. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the left reel 42L. In addition, in this embodiment, a hybrid (HB) type two-phase stepping motor that employs a 1-2 phase excitation method is used as the stepping motor 61. Note that the stepping motor is not limited to a hybrid type or two-phase, and various other stepping motors such as a four-phase or five-phase stepping motor can be used.

The left reel 42L comprises a cylindrical skeleton member 50 forming a cylindrical basket and a strip-shaped sheet wound endlessly around its outer periphery. These constitute the rotating body in this embodiment. The sheet is attached to the cylindrical skeleton member 50 via a pair of seals formed along both long sides of the sheet so as to maintain the wound state. A large number of patterns serving as identification information are printed at equal intervals on the outer periphery of the sheet. A boss portion 51 constituting a support shaft is formed in the center of the cylindrical skeleton member 50, and is attached to the drive shaft of the left reel stepping motor 61L via a disk-shaped boss reinforcing plate 52. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the left reel stepping motor 61L rotates, the cylindrical skeleton member 50 rotates around the drive shaft, and the left reel 42L revolves along the annular reel surface.

The left reel stepping motor 61L is fixed with screws 54 to the side of the motor plate 53, which is arranged in an upright position within the reel unit 41 (Figure 3). A reel index sensor (rotational position detection sensor) 55 is installed as a detection means at a predetermined detection position on the motor plate 53. In this embodiment, a transmission type photosensor is used as the reel index sensor 55, in which a light emitting element 55a as a light emitting portion and a light receiving element 55b as a light receiving portion are held at a predetermined distance.

On the other hand, the first sensor cut strip 56 and the second sensor cut strip 57 extending in the radial direction are attached to the boss reinforcing plate 52 integrated with the left reel 42L. The first sensor cut strip 56 and the second sensor cut strip 57 have their base ends 56b, 57b fixed by screws 58. The tip of the first sensor cut strip 56 is bent at an approximately right angle, and a first protrusion 56a is formed as a first detection part that protrudes along the rotation axis direction of the left reel 42L. Similarly, a second protrusion 57a is formed as a second detection part at the tip of the second sensor cut strip 57. The first sensor cut strip 56 and the second sensor cut strip 57 are aligned so that the first protrusion 56a and the second protrusion 57a can pass between the two elements 55a, 55b of the reel index sensor 55, respectively. The reel index sensor 55 detects the passage of the first protrusion 56a and the second protrusion 57a every time the left reel 42L makes approximately half a revolution, and outputs a detection signal to the main control device 131 (described below) each time it detects. The reel index sensor 55 is configured to perform the detection periodically (every 1.49 msec in this embodiment). Therefore, the main control device 131 can check and correct the rotational position (rotational angle position) of the left reel 42L approximately every half a revolution based on this detection signal.

The stepping motor 61L is set to rotate once by giving it a drive signal of, for example, 504 pulses (also called an excitation signal or excitation pulse; the same applies below). In other words, it is configured to rotate the left reel 42L by an amount of rotation corresponding to the number of drive signals, such that a drive signal of 7 pulses changes the angle of the left reel 42L by 5°. Furthermore, the rotational position of the stepping motor 61L, i.e., the rotational position of the left reel 42L, is controlled by this drive signal.

On each sheet of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R, multiple symbols (specifically 21 symbols) are drawn along the long side (rotation direction). Therefore, it takes 24 pulses (= 504 pulses ÷ 21 symbols) to switch from one symbol to the next at a given position. Then, depending on the number of pulses from the point when the rotation position of the left reel 42L is detected (for example, the point when the starting end 56s of the first sensor cut band 56 (first protrusion 56a) is detected), it is possible to recognize which symbol is visible from the display window 31L, or to control the state of making any symbol visible from the display window 31L.

Of the symbols on each reel 42L, 42M, 42R, the number of symbols that can be seen in their entirety through the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R is limited to a predetermined number determined primarily by the vertical length of the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R. In this embodiment, there are three symbols on each reel. Therefore, when all of the reels 42L, 42M, 42R are stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible to the player. Of the three patterns displayed on the top, middle, and bottom of each display window 31L, 31M, and 31R, the pattern displayed on the top is also referred to as the "upper row pattern of the left reel 42L, the upper row pattern of the middle reel 42M, and the upper row pattern of the right reel 42R," the patterns displayed in the middle are also referred to as the "middle row pattern of the left reel 42L, the middle row pattern of the middle reel 42M, and the middle row pattern of the right reel 42R," and the patterns displayed on the bottom are also referred to as the "lower row pattern of the left reel 42L, the lower row pattern of the middle reel 42M, and the lower row pattern of the right reel 42R."

Here, we will explain the symbols on each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R. Figure 7 shows the arrangement of symbols drawn on the sheets wound around the left reel 42L, center reel 42M, and right reel 42R. As shown in the figure, each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R has 21 symbols arranged in a row. Numbers 1 to 21 are assigned to each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, but these are assigned for the sake of convenience and are not actually assigned to the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

The symbols include a "red 7" symbol (e.g., the 15th symbol on the left reel) for transitioning to a big bonus game, a "BAR" symbol (e.g., the 9th symbol on the left reel) for transitioning to a regular bonus game, and a "white 7" symbol (e.g., the 5th symbol on the left reel) used to transition to a replay time state, which will be described in detail later. There is also a "replay" symbol (e.g., the 1st symbol on the left reel) for transitioning to a replay game (replay). In addition, there are a "watermelon" symbol (e.g., the 3rd symbol on the left reel), a "bell" symbol (e.g., the 2nd symbol on the left reel), and a "cherry" symbol (e.g., the 10th symbol on the left reel) for the payout of a small prize. The number and arrangement order of the various symbols are different on the sheets wound around each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R. Additionally, the left reel 42L has blank symbols (relatively small square symbols; the fourth and fourteenth symbols on the left reel) that are not used in winning combinations. Each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R of the reel unit 41 is an example of a variable display means that variably displays (variably displays) identification information, and constitutes the main display section.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game panel 30 has a total of five combination lines, three parallel horizontal lines and two diagonally crossing lines, connecting each of the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R. Of course, the maximum number of combination lines may be six or more, or less than five, and the maximum number of combination lines may be changed according to a predetermined condition. Corresponding to each of these combination lines, active line display units 32, 33, and 34 are provided on the left side of the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R when viewed from the front. The first active line display unit 32 is displayed by lighting or the like when the central horizontal line (center line) of the combination lines is activated. The second active line display unit 33 is displayed by lighting or the like when the upper and lower horizontal lines (upper line and lower line) of the combination lines are activated. The third active line display unit 34 is displayed by lighting or the like when a pair of diagonal lines (a downward line to the right and a upward line to the right) of the combination lines are activated. When the symbols stop in a specific combination on an activated combination line, i.e., an active line, a win is won and a predetermined process such as a medal payout process or a transition process to a specific game is executed.

Here, we will explain the number of medals awarded (paid) when each symbol wins. When the "watermelon" symbol as a minor role aligns on the left, center, and right of a specified effective line (hereinafter also referred to as "the watermelon combination is displayed as a stop, and a prize is won"), 15 medals are awarded. When the "bell" symbol as a minor role aligns on the left, center, and right of a specified effective line (hereinafter also referred to as "the bell combination is displayed as a stop, and a prize is won"), 8 medals are awarded. When the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 42L stops on an effective line as a minor role (hereinafter also referred to as "the cherry is displayed as a stop, and a prize is won"), 2 medals are awarded. In other words, the "cherry" symbols on the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42R are unrelated to the awarding of medals. Furthermore, for the "cherry" symbol only, medals are awarded regardless of combinations with other symbols, so when the "cherry" symbol stops in a position where multiple active lines overlap on the left reel 42L (specifically the top or bottom), medals are awarded multiplied by the number of overlapping active lines, resulting in four medals being awarded in this embodiment. Note that in this embodiment, the active lines that can form a watermelon combination are only the top line, the line that slopes downward to the right, and the line that slopes upward to the right, but it may also be configured so that the middle and bottom lines can also be formed.

When the "Red 7" symbols as a bonus role (special minor role) line up on the left, center, and right of a designated effective line (hereinafter also referred to as "the BB symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state and a prize is won"), 0 medals are awarded (no medals are awarded) and the game moves to the big bonus game. When the "BAR" symbols as a bonus role line up on the left, center, and right of a designated effective line (hereinafter also referred to as "the RB symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state and a prize is won"), 0 medals are awarded (no medals are awarded) and the game moves to the regular bonus game.

When "replay" symbols align on the left, center, and right of an active line as a replay role (hereinafter also referred to as "the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and a prize is won"), no medals are awarded, but the next game (the next change in the identification information display) is treated as a replay game (replay). In this embodiment, even when "white 7" symbols align on the left, center, and right of a specified active line (hereinafter also referred to as "special replay A is stopped and displayed, and a prize is won"), no medals are awarded, the next game is treated as a replay game, and the game moves to the second replay time (hereinafter also referred to as "RT2"), where the probability of winning a replay is relatively high. Furthermore, if the combination of "white 7, red 7, and watermelon" stops on a specified active line in such a way that three of the same symbols do not line up (for example, there are cases where the combination is a ready-made pattern, such as "white 7, white 7, watermelon" or "watermelon, red 7, watermelon," and cases where the combination is not a ready-made pattern, such as "white 7, watermelon, red 7") (hereinafter also referred to as "special replay B is displayed and a win has been made"), no medals are awarded, the next game becomes a replay game, and the game moves to the second replay time (RT2).

In this embodiment, if special replay A is won, special replay B is also won (they are won simultaneously), and if special replay A is not stopped and displayed, special replay B is stopped and displayed. Also, if special replay A is won, an instruction to aim for and stop displaying special replay A, which is the corresponding role, is generated in the performance display device 15, which will be described later. Furthermore, special replay A is controlled to align with the center line of the effective lines. Special replay B, which includes "white 7" (white 7 tenpai is not negated), is controlled to align with the center line of the effective lines, and other combinations are controlled to align with a line other than the center line.

In addition, when controlling the stops of reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, the symbols that have the most combinations in the winning combination are given priority (the winning combination is drawn onto the active line as much as possible). For example, in the special replay B, there are six combinations in which the "white 7", "red 7", and "watermelon" are stopped on the left reel (the number of combinations in which these symbols are stopped on the center and right reels is the same). Here, when special replay A, which is a win at the same time as special replay B, is stopped and displayed, there is one more combination in which the "white 7" is stopped than the combinations in which the "red 7" and "watermelon" are stopped on each reel corresponding to the winning combination (special replay A and special replay B), so the "white 7" is controlled to be stopped on the center line with priority over the "red 7" and "watermelon".

In this embodiment, even if special replay B is won, there may be cases where special replay A is not won. In addition, although this embodiment will be described in detail later, in a winning game of special replay B that does not overlap with special replay A (simultaneous win), no effect is performed to suggest or instruct that special replay B has been won, but this may be configured to be performed. Furthermore, the constituent symbols and number of patterns of special replays A and B are not particularly limited, and can be set appropriately for each machine.

In addition, if the "Replay-Bell-Replay" combination is lined up on an active line (hereinafter also referred to as "Fake Replay is stopped and displayed, winning"), no medals are awarded and the next game becomes a replay game. Fake Replay is controlled so that if the third stop is on the right reel 42R, fake replays are lined up on the upper line, if the third stop is on the middle reel 42M, fake replays are lined up on the downward right line, and if the third stop is on the left reel 42L, fake replays are lined up on the lower line. That is, first, a stop operation is performed when the vicinity of the white 7 is displayed on the left reel, causing a replay to be displayed on the upper left reel and the white 7 to be displayed on the middle left reel, then, a stop operation is performed when the vicinity of the white 7 is displayed on the middle reel, causing a bell to be displayed on the upper middle reel and the white 7 to be displayed on the middle middle reel, and finally, a stop operation is performed when the vicinity of the white 7 is displayed on the right reel, causing a replay to be displayed on the upper right reel and the white 7 to be displayed on the top or bottom of the right reel frame. Also, for example, first, a stop operation is performed when the vicinity of the white 7 is displayed on the left reel, causing a replay to be displayed on the upper left reel and the white 7 to be displayed on the middle left reel, then, a stop operation is performed when the vicinity of the white 7 is displayed on the right reel, causing a replay to be displayed on the bottom right reel and the white 7 to be displayed on the middle right reel, and finally, a stop operation is performed when the vicinity of the white 7 is displayed on the middle reel, causing a bell to be displayed on the middle middle reel and the white 7 to be displayed on the top or bottom middle reel. Furthermore, for example, first, when the right reel is stopped near the white 7, a replay appears on the bottom of the right reel and the white 7 appears in the middle of the right reel. Next, when the middle reel is stopped near the white 7, a bell appears on the bottom of the middle reel and the white 7 appears in the middle of the middle reel. Finally, when the left reel is stopped near the white 7, a replay appears on the bottom of the left reel and the white 7 appears on the top or bottom of the left reel frame. In other words, if you aim for the "white 7" on the pay line, you can make it on the center line, but you cannot make the "white 7s line up" (behind that, the fake replays are lined up). It is also possible to arrange the symbols in such a way that at the time of the second stop or the first stop, there is a push order in which it is clear that the white 7s are not lined up and that the special replay A has not been won.

Even if a fake replay (fake role) wins, the replay time will not change. The "first stop" is when the first of the three reels that are spinning is stopped, the "second stop" is when the second of the reels that were spinning is stopped (when one of the three reels is stopped and the reel that is spinning is stopped while the other two are spinning), and the "third stop (final stop)" is when the third of the reels that were spinning is stopped (when two of the three reels are stopped and the last reel that is spinning is stopped while the other two are spinning).

If any other symbol combination occurs, i.e. if the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 42L does not stop on an active line and the above symbol combinations do not line up on an active line, it is a "miss" and no medals or replays are awarded.

In this embodiment, after the big bonus and the regular bonus, the game moves to the first replay time (hereinafter also referred to as "RT1") in which the probability of winning the special replay A (special replay B) is increased. In this embodiment, 20 games after the big bonus are set as RT1, and 1 game after the regular bonus are set as RT1. In RT1, the probability of winning the special replay A is about 3/32. In addition, in a time other than RT1, the game is set so that the special replay A, the special replay B, and the fake replay are not won (it may be set so that they are won with a fairly low probability). In addition, for example, in RT2, in the role lottery (win/lose lottery) for winning the small role, the replay role, and the bonus role, a small role determination table (a table showing the correspondence between random number values and small roles, and multiple tables are provided corresponding to the game state) that is determined to correspond to "replay" is referenced, which corresponds to what was determined to correspond to "miss" in RT0 and RT1.

If you win a big bonus or a regular bonus in RT1 or RT2, you will move to normal replay time (hereinafter also referred to as "RT0"). Then, if you win something other than a replay role (such as a miss), you will be able to stop the big bonus and regular bonus (win).

By winning the big bonus or regular bonus, the player transitions to the bonus state (hereinafter referred to as "RT3" when explaining the replay probability). In the bonus state, a small win determination table with no (or few) allocations corresponding to "miss" and "replay" is referenced. As a result, during the bonus, small wins are basically displayed as stopped wins every game. The allocation probability for "watermelon" and "cherry" differs between the small win determination table for the big bonus and the small win determination table for the regular bonus (for example, in the regular bonus, overlapping roles of "watermelon" or "cherry" and "bell" are set).

As shown in FIG. 2 etc., a start lever 71 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 30, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 42L, 42M, 42R (basically they all start spinning at the same time, but it is not necessary that they start spinning at the same time) (to start the variable display of the identification information). The start lever 71 constitutes a start operation means or a start operation means that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 42L, 42M, 42R, i.e., to start the variable display. The start lever 71 is a lever that the player presses with his hand when starting a game, and automatically returns to its original position after the player releases his hand. When a medal is inserted (and reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are displayed as stopped), the start lever 71 is operated (specific conditions are met), and a lottery (win/lose lottery) is held to see whether the player has won the above-mentioned small win, replay win, or bonus win (benefit that is advantageous to the player), and each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R basically starts spinning simultaneously.

On the right side of the start lever 71, there are provided a left stop switch 72, a center stop switch 73, and a right stop switch 74 in the form of buttons that are operated to individually stop each of the rotating reels 42L, 42M, and 42R. Each stop switch 72, 73, and 74 is located directly below the display window 31L, 31M, and 31R corresponding to the reel 42L, 42M, and 42R to be stopped. The stop switches 72, 73, and 74 constitute a stop operation means that is operated to stop the variable display based on the rotation of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R. Each stop switch 72, 73, and 74 becomes capable of being stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed since the left reel 42L started to rotate, and during this state, a lamp (not shown) is lit to notify that the stop operation is possible, and is turned off when the rotation stops.

In this embodiment, when stopping the spinning reels 42L, 42M, 42R, even if the stop switches 72, 73, 74 are operated at a timing when the symbol corresponding to the winning combination is shifted forward of the pay line, as long as the shift is within four symbols, an assist function is provided that moves (pulls in) the symbol corresponding to the winning combination to the pay line. Also, if a small combination is won in a game in which a bonus has been won (a flag indicating a bonus win is on but a prize has not yet been awarded), the small combination is preferentially stopped on the pay line (if it can be pulled in). However, in a state in which both a bonus and a small combination have been won, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the bonus is preferentially stopped on the pay line.

In this embodiment, one game is played from when all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the reel unit 41 have rotated until all reels 42L, 42M, 42R are displayed as stopped, and the display of the patterns on reels 42L, 42M, 42R that change with the rotation of reels 42L, 42M, 42R (hereinafter also simply referred to as "display of patterns") corresponds to the display of the identification information (of the variable display means). In addition, stopping the first of the rotating reels 42L, 42M, 42R is also referred to as the "first stop", stopping the second is also referred to as the "second stop", and stopping the third is also referred to as the "third stop".

The upper part of the front door 12 (above the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R) is provided with an upper lamp 13 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, a pair of left and right speakers 14 that play various sound effects as the game progresses and notify (instruct or suggest) the player of the game status, and a performance display device 15 consisting of a liquid crystal display device that serves as a performance display means for instructing or suggesting various information to the player. The performance display device 15 can display a performance display that is performed in conjunction with the changing display of the symbols on the reel unit 41 and that tells or suggests the result of the winning or losing lottery (for example, a performance with a story that begins with the rotation of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, develops with the first and second of the rotating reels stopping, and ends with the third reel stopping, or a performance with a story that does not end with the third reel stopping and is carried over to the next game and ends in the next game or later). Note that the positions and numbers of the illumination means such as the upper lamp 13 and the speaker 14 are not limited to those specifically described. In addition, the performance display device 15 may use other displays such as an EL display device or a dot matrix display device.

A medal insertion slot 75 for inserting medals as investment value (game value) is provided below and to the right of the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R. The medal insertion slot 75 constitutes an input means for inputting the investment value. Also, considering that the medal insertion slot 75 involves the action of the player directly inserting medals, it can also be said to constitute a direct input means for directly inputting the investment value.

Medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 75 are guided to either the storage passage 81 or the discharge passage 82 by a selector 84, which serves as a passage switching means provided on the back of the front door 12. That is, the selector 84 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 83, which is set to the discharge passage 82 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 83 is not energized, and is switched to the storage passage 81 side when energized. Medals guided to the storage passage 81 are guided to a hopper device 91 stored inside the housing 11. Meanwhile, medals guided to the discharge passage 82 are guided from a medal discharge section 17 provided on the lower front surface of the front door 12 to a medal tray 18 and are returned to the player.

As shown in FIG. 3 and other figures, the hopper device 91, which serves as a payout means for granting medals to a player, is composed of a storage tank 92 for storing medals and a payout device 93 for paying out medals to a player. The payout device 93 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge medals to an opening 94 provided in the center right part of the discharge passage 82, and pays out the medals to the medal tray 18 through the discharge passage 82. In addition, a reserve tank 95 (see FIG. 5) is provided on the right side of the hopper device 91 to prevent medals from being stored in the storage tank 92 by more than a predetermined amount. Inside the storage tank 92 of the hopper device 91, an induction plate 96 (see FIG. 3 and FIG. 5) is provided to discharge medals from the storage tank 92 to the reserve tank 95. Therefore, if medals are stored above the height at which the induction plate 96 is provided, the medals will be stored in the reserve tank 95.

As shown in FIG. 2 etc., a button-shaped return switch 76 is provided below the medal insertion slot 75. The return switch 76 is a switch that is pressed when a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 75 becomes stuck in the selector 84. When this switch is pressed, the selector 84 is operated in a mechanically linked manner, and the medal stuck in the selector 84 is returned through the medal ejection slot 17.

The slot machine 10 has a credit function in which, when more medals than the number that can be used (bet) for playing a game are inserted into the medal insertion port 75, the medals inserted in excess of the number that can be used are stored and stored (also referred to as being "credited") as virtual medals up to a specified number (for example, up to 50 medals). In addition, when the upper limit of the storage (credit) of virtual medals has not been reached, medals acquired when a small winning combination is won are also credited as virtual medals. Furthermore, when medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 75 when the credit limit has been reached, or when the credit limit is exceeded by acquiring medals through the winning of a small winning combination, the real medals that exceed the upper limit are paid out (returned) to the player. Note that even if medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 75 while the reel unit 41 is fluctuating, they are not credited and are returned to the player. In addition, when medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 75 in a replay winning state, they may be configured to be credited or returned to the player.

On the lower left side of the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R, there is provided a button-shaped first credit insertion switch 77 (max bet button) for inserting the maximum number of virtual medals credited as investment value that can be used to play the game (three in normal play mode, two or one during a bonus game if the number of active lines is reduced in a bonus game (special play mode)). In other words, by operating the first credit insertion switch 77 when virtual medals are stored in normal play mode, three stored virtual medals are consumed, making it possible to play the game.

To the left of the first credit insertion switch 77 are provided a second credit insertion switch 78 and a third credit insertion switch 79, which are button-like switches smaller than the first credit insertion switch 77. The second credit insertion switch 78 is for inserting two credited virtual medals at a time, and the third credit insertion switch 79 is for inserting one virtual medal. The credit insertion switches 77-79, together with the medal insertion slot 75, constitute an input means for inputting an investment value. Also, considering that the medal insertion slot 75 involves the player directly inserting medals, while the credit insertion switches 77-79 only involve the insertion of virtual medals based on stored memory, they can also be said to constitute indirect input means for indirectly inputting an investment value. In addition, when a predetermined number of medals have been bet by operating any of the first credit input switch 77, the second credit input switch 78, and the third credit input switch 79, if a different first credit input switch 77, the second credit input switch 78, and the third credit input switch 79 are operated, the input is overwritten and the number of medals corresponding to the first credit input switch 77, the second credit input switch 78, and the third credit input switch 79 that was last operated is bet.

The first credit insertion switch 77 has a built-in lamp (not shown) as a light-emitting member to notify the player that the maximum number of medals (three medals) that can be inserted per game has not been reached. The lamp is turned on when the switch operation of the first credit insertion switch 77 is valid, to prompt the player to operate the switch 77, but is turned off when there are no credited virtual medals or when three medals have already been inserted. Here, instead of turning on the lamp, the lamp may be made to flash to make it easier for the player to understand the prompt to insert medals.

A button-shaped credit return switch 80 is provided to the left of the start lever 71. When the credit return switch 80 is operated while virtual medals have been credited, real medals equivalent to the credited virtual medals are paid out (returned) to the player (the medals that have been bet are also returned). Note that a configuration that allows the credit function to be switched on and off may be adopted, in which case the credit return switch 80 may serve as a switch for switching.

Below the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R of the game panel 30 are a remaining number display section 35 that displays the number of medals credited (stored and stored), a game number display section 36 that displays, for example, the number of games remaining during special game states such as big bonuses and regular bonuses, and an acquired number display section 37 that displays the number of medals acquired. These displays 35 to 37 are configured with seven-segment displays, but can of course be replaced with liquid crystal displays or the like. The acquired number display section 37 basically displays the number of medals acquired in each game, but for example, during a bonus, it may be configured so that after the number of medals acquired in each game is displayed, the total number of medals acquired during that bonus is displayed.

The procedure for betting medals will now be explained. When the first medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 75 at the start of a game, the first active line display unit 32 lights up, and the corresponding center line becomes an active line. When the second medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 75, the second active line display unit 33 lights up, and a total of three combination lines including the corresponding upper and lower lines become active lines. When the third medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 75, the third active line display unit 34 lights up, and a total of five combination lines including the corresponding pair of diagonal lines become active lines.

When four or more medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 75, if the credited virtual medals have reached the upper limit, the remaining medals (more than three) are switched to the discharge passage 82 by the selector 84 and returned from the medal discharge port 17 to the medal tray 18. On the other hand, if the credit limit has not been reached, the remaining medals are stored inside the slot machine 10 (storage tank 92, reserve tank 95), and the number of medals stored is displayed on the remaining number display unit 35.

When the number of reserved medals is displayed in the remaining number display section 35, pressing any of the first to third credit insertion switches 77 to 79 also inserts a virtual medal and places a bet. When the third credit insertion switch 79 is pressed, one virtual medal is inserted, the number displayed in the remaining number display section 35 is decremented by one, the first effective line display section 32 lights up, and the center line becomes the effective line. When the second credit insertion switch 78 is pressed, two virtual medals are inserted, the number displayed in the remaining number display section 35 is decremented by two, the first effective line display section 32 and the second effective line display section 33 light up, and a total of three combination lines become effective lines. When the first credit insertion switch 77 is pressed, three virtual medals are inserted, the number displayed in the remaining number display section 35 is decremented by three, and all effective line display sections 32 to 34 light up, and a total of five combination lines become effective lines.

If there are no virtual medals stored to be inserted when any of the first to third credit insertion switches 77-79 is pressed, for example when the first credit insertion switch 77 is pressed while the remaining number display unit 35 shows 2, all the values in the remaining number display unit 35 are decremented to 0, and only the amount of virtual medals that can be inserted is bet. In addition, when three medals are required for each game in the normal game mode (in the case of a machine that only allows three medals to be bet), only the first credit insertion switch 77 may be provided among the first to third credit insertion switches 77-79, or the second credit insertion switch 78 may be omitted even if the configuration allows one medal to be bet.

Between the first credit insertion switch 77 and the medal insertion slot 75, there are provided an effect button 101 and a cross button 102 as effect operation means. The effect button 101 is a cylindrical transparent operation body with a closed top that can be displaced up and down, and is always biased upward (in the direction protruding from the mounting surface) by a spring. It has a built-in light-emitting means (e.g., LED) and has letters and figures (e.g., PUSH, etc.) on the top surface of the operation body. By pressing the effect button 101 according to the situation, a corresponding effect can be derived on the effect display device 15, etc., or the effect content can be changed. The cross button 102 has five input sections: up, down, right, left, and center, and the center input section is mainly operated when deciding settings made by input to the other input sections.

In addition, the slot machine 10 of this embodiment is capable of adjusting the volume and light intensity, and the volume can be adjusted by operating the left and right input parts of the cross button 102, and the light intensity can be adjusted by operating the top and bottom input parts of the cross button 102. When adjusting the volume and light intensity, a setting screen for the volume and light intensity (a display showing the adjustable range and the current setting, as well as providing guidance for adjustment) is derived in the performance display device 15. Furthermore, when the pattern variation display is not being performed, a menu screen is displayed in the performance display device 15 by operating either the central input part of the cross button 102 or the performance button 101. In the menu screen, there are an item for opening a setting screen for the volume and light intensity (in this example, the setting screen for the volume and light intensity can also be opened by directly operating the up, down, right, and left input parts of the cross button 102 without opening the menu screen), an item for opening a performance customization screen for setting customization for a specific performance, an item for opening a screen introducing the composition of the role, and an item for closing the menu screen. In this example, there is a character selection function that allows the player to display a character selected in a specific game state at a specific position (selected character display section) of the effect display device 15, and the character to be displayed in the selected character display section can be set on the effect customization screen (it is also possible to set it to not be displayed). Also, during the game (from the time when the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R start to move based on the operation of the start lever 71 until all reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are displayed stopped, or until the corresponding medal payout is completed), the menu screen cannot be displayed (if the game is started with the menu screen displayed, the menu screen is closed) (it may be possible to adjust the volume and light intensity without opening the menu screen).

It is also possible to provide separate buttons for setting the volume and the light intensity. Furthermore, the size and color of the characters displayed on the performance display device 15 may be changed based on the player's operation. The LED built into the performance button 101 may be configured to have different light emission modes (e.g., light emission color) in a button disabled state in which the visual appearance of the slot machine 10 does not change even when the performance button 101 is operated, a button enabled state in which the visual appearance of the slot machine 10 changes when the performance button 101 is operated, and an operation state in which the performance button 101 is operated in the button enabled state (during operation or after operation). A display device capable of displaying characters, etc. may be provided inside the performance button 101 instead of the light-emitting means, or an object (which may be a display object by a display device) that is visually recognized as being integrated with the characters or figures of the operating body when the performance button 101 is operated or not operated (respectively) may be provided in addition to the light-emitting means.

The sub-control device 111 as a sub-control means and the display control device 112 are detachably attached to the back of the performance display device 15 in a stacked state. The upper lamp 13 and the speaker 14 are controlled by the sub-control device 111. The performance display device 15 is for executing various display performances as the game progresses, and the auxiliary display content is determined by the sub-control device 111 based on commands from the main control device 131 so as to correspond to the results displayed on the reel unit 41, and the display is performed by the display control device 112 based on this determination. In the normal game state, the performance display device 15 is configured to be able to derive a performance display that is performed in conjunction with the changing display of the patterns on the reel unit 41 (starting at the start and ending in response to the stop display) and that teaches or suggests the result of the role selection.

Above the medal tray 18, there is a lower plate 16 on which the name of the machine and characters related to the game are displayed. Also, to the left of the medal tray 18, there is a reversible ashtray 19 on the lower front side.

Inside the housing 11, to the left of the hopper device 91, a power supply box 121 is provided. The power supply box 121 includes a power supply switch 122, a reset switch 123, and a setting key insertion hole 124. The power supply switch 122 is an activation switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 131.

The reset switch 123 is a switch for resetting various states of the slot machine 10. This slot machine 10 has a backup function for various data, so that in the unlikely event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is retained, and when the power is restored (power is restored), the state at the time of the power outage can be restored. Therefore, when the power is cut off in the normal manner, for example when an amusement hall closes its business, the state before the power outage is stored and retained, but when the power switch 122 is turned on while pressing the reset switch 123, the backup data is reset. Also, if the reset switch 123 is pressed while the power switch 122 is on, the error state is reset.

The setting key insertion hole 124 allows the hall manager or the like to adjust the medal award rate (payout rate). That is, the hall manager or the like can insert a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 124 and operate it to change the setting state (winning probability setting process) of the slot machine 10 from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6." "Setting 6" has the highest medal award rate, and the medal award rate decreases as the setting value decreases. In other words, the higher the setting value, the more advantageous the game can be for the player (for example, the higher the bonus probability or RT2 transition probability). Note that the setting value is not limited to six levels and can be set as appropriate.

Above the reel unit 41, the main control device 131 is attached to the back plate 11c of the housing 11. The main control device 131 is equipped with a main board including a CPU that performs main control, a ROM that stores a game program, a RAM that temporarily stores necessary data according to the progress of the game, a port for communicating with various devices, and a clock circuit used for time counting and synchronization, and is configured so that the main board is housed in a board box that serves as an encapsulation means made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box has a box base that is approximately rectangular and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit that serves as a sealing means, thereby sealing the board box. The box base and the box cover may also be connected to each other in an unopenable manner using a key member.

Although not shown in the figures, the slot machine 10 is provided with an opening detection switch for detecting the opening of the front door 12. Furthermore, although not shown in the figures, the slot machine 10 is provided with an external terminal board for relaying the transmission of various information to the hall computer of the gaming hall. For example, there are provided terminals for outputting information regarding the current gaming state (start of variable display, start/end of bonus state, start/end of RT2 state, etc.), terminals for outputting information regarding the opening of the front door 12 detected by the opening detection switch, terminals for outputting information regarding various error states, and terminals for outputting information regarding the awarding of medals.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram in FIG. 8.

The main control device 131, which serves as a control means, is equipped with a microcomputer centered around the CPU 151, which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 161 provided inside the power supply box 121, the CPU 151 is connected to a clock circuit 154 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 155, and the like via an internal bus. The main control device 131 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10. The main control device 131 constitutes the drive control means, rotational position detection means, passing time measurement means, drive signal counting means, calculation means, signal monitoring means, passing time storage means, and comparison means in this embodiment.

The input side of the main control device 131 is connected to various sensors, such as a start detection sensor 71a that detects the operation of the start lever 71, stop detection sensors 72a, 73a, 74a that individually detect the operation of each stop switch 72, 73, 74, an inserted medal detection sensor 75a that detects medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 75, credit insertion detection sensors 77a, 78a, 79a that individually detect the operation of each credit insertion switch 77, 78, 79, a credit return detection sensor 80a that detects the operation of the credit return switch 80, a reel index sensor 55 that individually detects the rotation position of each reel 42, a payout detection sensor 91a that detects medals paid out from the hopper device 91, a reset detection sensor 123a that detects the operation of the reset switch 123, and a setting key detection sensor 124a that detects the insertion of a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 124. The signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 151 via the input/output port 155.

The inserted medal detection sensor 75a is actually composed of multiple sensors. That is, the storage passage 81 from the medal insertion port 75 to the hopper device 91 is configured so that medals can pass in a single file. The storage passage 81 is provided with a first sensor, and a second sensor and a third sensor are provided downstream of the first sensor, at least the width of a medal, in close proximity (close enough to detect the same medal at the same time at least for a certain period of time), and the inserted medal detection sensor 75a is composed of these first to third sensors. The main control device 131 monitors the time it takes for the first sensor to reach the second sensor, and if the elapsed time exceeds a predetermined time, it is deemed that a medal has been jammed or that there has been fraud, and an error is generated. When an error occurs, an error is notified and the player's operations until the error is cleared are invalidated. The main control device 131 also monitors the order in which the second and third sensors are turned on and off, and determines that the medals have been taken in normally only if the order is as follows: both second and third sensors are off, only the second sensor is on, both second and third sensors are on, only the third sensor is on, and both second and third sensors are off, and the time taken for each on/off switch to occur is within a specified time, otherwise it is determined to be an error. This is done to prevent medal clogging in the storage passage 81, as well as fraudulent behavior in which medals are moved back and forth near the inserted medal detection sensor 75a, which may lead to the mistaken belief that a medal has been inserted.

The input side of the main control device 131 is connected to a power failure monitoring circuit 161b provided in the power supply device 161 via the input/output port 155. The power supply device 161 is equipped with a power supply unit 161a that supplies driving power to the main control device 131 and each electronic device of the slot machine 10, the power failure monitoring circuit 161b described above, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 161b monitors the power supply cut-off state and generates a power failure signal not only during a power failure but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 122. For this reason, the power failure monitoring circuit 161b is output from the power supply unit 161a. In this example, it is configured to monitor a stabilized drive voltage of 12 volts DC, and when this drive voltage drops to less than 10 volts, for example, it determines that the voltage has been cut off and outputs a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to both the CPU 151 and the input/output port 155, and the CPU 151 recognizes this power failure signal and executes the power failure processing described below.

The power supply unit 161a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts to be used as a drive voltage for control systems such as the main control unit 131, even if the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for the main control unit 131 to execute power outage processing.

The output side of the main control device 131 is connected via an input/output port 155 to the active line display units 32, 33, 34, remaining number display unit 35, number of games displayed unit 36, number of coins won display unit 37, stepping motors 61 (61L, 61M, 61R) for rotating reels 42L, 42M, 42R, medal passage switching solenoid 83 provided on selector 84, hopper device 91, sub-control device 111, and external centralized terminal board 171 that can transmit information to a hall management device (not shown), etc.

The CPU 151 of the main control device 131 includes a ROM 152 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 151, a RAM 153 that secures a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 152, and various counters, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, and other processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, as is well known (not shown), and a credit counter that counts the number of credits. The ROM 152 and the RAM 153 form a main memory as a storage means, and the programs for executing the processes shown in the various flowcharts shown in FIG. 9 and subsequent figures are stored in the above-mentioned ROM 152 as part of the control program. The ROM 152 forms the passing time storage means in this embodiment.

RAM 153 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from power supply device 161 provided in power supply box 121 even after power to slot machine 10 is cut off, and RAM 153 is provided with a backup area in addition to memories and areas for temporarily storing various types of data, etc.

The backup area is an area for storing values of the stack pointer, each register, I/O, etc. at the time of power cut (including power cut by operating the power switch 122, the same below) when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage is resolved (including power on by operating the power switch 122, the same below), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. Writing to the backup area is performed when the power is cut off by the power outage processing (see FIG. 11), and the restoration of each value written to the backup area is performed in the main processing (see FIG. 12) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 151 is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 161b when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and NMI interrupt processing as a power outage flag generation processing associated with the occurrence of a power outage or the like is immediately executed.

The sub-controller 111 is a controller for driving the upper lamps 13, the speaker 14, and the display controller 112 (and thus the performance display device 15), and is equipped with a board on which the CPU, ROM, RAM, etc. for driving these are integrated. After receiving a signal from the main controller 131, the sub-controller 111 independently drives and controls the upper lamps 13, the speaker 14, and the display controller 112 (performance display device 15). Therefore, the sub-controller 111 is a sub-board that performs auxiliary control in relation to the main controller 131, which is the main board that manages the overall game. In other words, by providing a sub-board for sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games, the burden on the main board is reduced. The sub-controller 111 may also be configured to control the various display units 32 to 37.

The sub-control device 111 includes a CPU, which is a calculation device, a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU, a RAM, which is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU executes various programs among the control programs stored in the ROM, a display control device 112, an upper lamp 13, a speaker 14, an effect button 101, and other input/output ports connected thereto, as well as various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. The CPU of the sub-control device 111 causes the display control device 112 to execute display control based on a command signal transmitted from the main control device 131, for example, and causes the effect display device 15 to display the display. As described above, in this embodiment, the winning role is awarded by stopping and displaying the symbols corresponding to the role that has been won in the role lottery on the reel unit 41 controlled by the main control device 131, and the effect display device 15 controlled by the sub-control device 111 displays the effects in accordance with the changing display of the symbols on the reel unit 41.

The display control device 112 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern on the performance display device 15 according to the instruction from the sub-control device 111. This display control device 112 is equipped with a CPU, a program ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU, a work RAM that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU executes various programs, a video RAM that stores display data displayed on the performance display device 15, a character ROM that stores character data such as patterns displayed on the performance display device 15, a video display processor (VDP) which is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) built into the performance display device 15, an input port connected to the input/output port of the sub-control device 111, and an output port connected to the performance display device 15. The CPU of the display control device 112 receives and analyzes the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 111 or performs a predetermined calculation process based on the received command to control the VDP (generates internal commands for the VDP).

Next, the control processes executed by the CPU 151 in the main control device 131 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 9 to 18. The processes of the CPU 151 are broadly divided into main processing which is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing which is started periodically (every 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing which is started by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For ease of explanation, the NMI interrupt processing and timer interrupt processing will be described first, followed by the main processing.

Figure 9 is a flowchart showing an example of NMI interrupt processing. When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage monitoring circuit 161b of the power supply device 161 generates a power outage signal and outputs it to the main control device 131. The main control device 131, which receives the power outage signal via the NMI terminal, executes NMI interrupt processing.

In the NMI interrupt process, first in step S101, data in the use registers provided in CPU 151 is saved to a backup area provided in RAM 153. Next, in step S102, a power outage flag is set in a power outage flag storage area provided in RAM 153. After that, in step S103, the data saved in the backup area of RAM 153 is restored to the use registers of CPU 151. This restoration process ends the NMI interrupt process. Note that if the power outage flag can be set without destroying the data in the use registers of CPU 151, the processes of saving to the backup area and restoring can be omitted.

Figure 10 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process that is periodically executed by the main control unit 131, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 151 of the main control unit 131, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S201, the values of all registers in the CPU 151 that are used in normal processing, which will be described later, are saved to the backup area of the RAM 153. In step S202, it is confirmed whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S203, where power outage processing is executed.

Now, the power outage processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 11. This power outage processing is performed immediately after the timer interrupt processing, particularly the register save processing, so it can be executed without interrupting other interrupt processing. Therefore, this power outage processing is not executed by interrupting each processing, such as during the processing of sending various commands or during the processing of reading the switch state (on/off), and there is no need to create a power outage processing program that takes into account the timing at which it will be executed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing program for power outage processing and reduce the program size. The same applies to the processing program for power recovery processing, which will be described later.

In step S301, it is determined whether command transmission has been completed. If transmission has not been completed, this process is terminated and a return is made to timer interrupt processing, and command transmission is terminated. In this way, by determining whether command transmission has been completed at the early stage of power outage processing, prioritizing transmission processing when transmission is incomplete, and configuring power outage processing to be executed after unit command transmission processing is completed, it is no longer necessary to construct a power outage processing program that takes into account the fact that power outage processing will be executed in the middle of command transmission. This has the practical benefit of simplifying the power outage processing program and reducing the capacity of ROM 152.

If step S301 is YES, that is, if the command transmission is completed, proceed to step S302, and the value of the stack point of the CPU 151 is saved in the backup area in the RAM 153. Then, in step S303, as a stop process, the RAM judgment value described later is cleared, and the output state of the output port in the input/output port 155 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. In step S304, the RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in the backup area. Specifically, the RAM judgment value is the two's complement of the checksum in the working area address of the RAM 153. By saving the RAM judgment value in the backup area, the checksum of the RAM 153 becomes 0. By setting the checksum of the RAM 153 to 0, subsequent RAM access is prohibited in step S305. After that, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the power being completely cut off and processing being unable to be executed. In addition, in consideration of the case where the power outage flag is erroneously set due to noise, etc., whether or not the power outage signal is output is confirmed until the infinite loop is entered. If the power outage signal is not being output, this means that the power outage has been restored, and writing to RAM 153 is permitted, the power outage flag is reset, and the timer interrupt process is resumed. If the power outage signal continues to be output, the process goes into an infinite loop.

The power supply unit 161a of the power supply device 161 is configured to maintain the output of a stabilized voltage (5 volts) used as a drive voltage for the control system for a period of time sufficient to execute the above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing and power failure processing. In this embodiment, the drive voltage is continuously output for 30 msec.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S202, various processes from step S204 onwards are performed.

That is, in step S204, a watchdog timer clear process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction. In step S205, an interrupt end declaration process is performed to issue an interrupt permission to the CPU 151 itself. In step S206, a stepping motor control process is performed to drive the stepping motors 61L to 61R, which are rotation drive motors, to rotate each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R. In step S207, a sensor monitoring process is performed to monitor the status of various sensors (see FIG. 8) connected to the input/output port 155. In step S208, a timer calculation process is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S209, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the external centralized terminal board 171.

In step S210, a command output process is performed to send commands to the sub-control device 111. In step S211, a segment data setting process is performed to set the segment data to be displayed in the remaining number display unit 35, the number of games displayed unit 36, and the number of coins acquired display unit 37. In step S212, a segment data display process is performed to supply the segment data set in the segment data setting process to each display unit 35 to 37 and display the corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. In step S213, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 155. In step S214, the values of each register that were saved to the backup area in the previous step S201 are restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 151. Thereafter, in step S215, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Figure 12 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the main control device 131 that is executed after power is turned on. The main processing is executed when power is turned on by recovering from a power outage or by turning on the power switch 122.

First, in step S401, as an initialization process, the value of the stack pointer is set in the CPU 151, and an interrupt mode that permits interrupt processing is set, and then various settings are made for the registers in the CPU 151, I/O devices, etc.

When these initialization processes are completed, in step S402, it is determined whether the reset switch 123 is turned on. If the reset switch 123 is turned on, the process proceeds to step S403, where a RAM clear process is performed to clear all data stored in the RAM 153.

After confirming in step S402 that the reset switch has not been operated, or after performing the RAM clear process in step S403, it is determined in step S404 whether or not the setting key has been inserted into the setting key insertion hole 124. If the setting key has been inserted, the process proceeds to step S405 and a setting change process is performed. As part of the setting change process, first, all data stored in the RAM 153 is cleared. Then, it is determined which of the six preset setting states ("Setting 1" to "Setting 6") has been selected, and internal processing is performed according to the selected setting state.

In step S406, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set. If the power outage flag is not set, that is, if the data in RAM 153 has been cleared in step S403 or step S405, the process proceeds to normal processing in step S407, which will be described later, and ends this process.

When the power failure flag is set in step S406, the process proceeds to the restoration process shown in step S408 onwards. The power failure flag being set means that subroutine processes such as the RAM clear process in step S403 and the setting change process in step S405 have not been executed at all. Therefore, the data in RAM 153 has not been rewritten at all, and the power restoration process requires a process to check whether the data in RAM 153 is normal.

To do this, first, in step S408, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value is normal or not. Specifically, the checksum value of RAM 153 is checked to see whether it is normal, that is, whether the checksum value taking into account the RAM judgment value is 0 or not. If the checksum value taking into account the RAM judgment value is 0, it is determined that the data in RAM 153 is normal.

If the RAM judgment value is abnormal in step S408, that is, if the checksum value is not 0, it is highly likely that the data in RAM 153 has been corrupted. Therefore, in such a case, error display processing is performed in step S409. As part of the error display processing, interrupt processing is first prohibited and all output ports in the input/output port 155 are cleared, thereby controlling all actuators connected to the input/output port 155 to the off state. After that, an error message is displayed to notify the hall manager or the like that an error has occurred, and this state is maintained until the reset switch 123 is turned ON.

If it is determined in step S408 that the RAM judgment value is normal, the process proceeds to step S410, where the value of the stack pointer stored in the backup area is written to the stack pointer of the CPU 151, and the state of the stack is restored to the state before the power was cut off. Next, in step S411, a power recovery command is sent to the sub-control device 111 to notify the execution of the power recovery process. After that, in step S412, the game is stopped as the gaming state and the automatic settlement setting save process is performed, and in step S413, various sensors such as the start detection sensor 71a are initialized. After the above process is completed, in step S414, the power outage flag is reset and the address before the power was cut off is returned to. Specifically, the process returns to the timer interrupt process described above, and the watchdog timer clear process (step S204) is executed.

Next, the normal processing that performs the main control related to the game will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 13.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether medals have been bet. If medals have been bet, it is then determined in step S502 whether the start lever 71 has been operated. If both steps S501 and S502 are YES, the lottery process in step S503, the reel control process in step S504, the medal payout process in step S505, the bonus state process in step S506, and the RT state process in step S507 are executed in that order, and the process returns to step S501. On the other hand, if medals have not been bet in step S501 or the start lever 71 has not been operated in step S502, the process returns to step S501.

Next, the lottery process in step S503 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG. 14.

In step S601, a random number table for determining whether or not a win is selected based on the current setting state of the slot machine 10, the number of medals bet, the high or low probability of a small win, the RT state, etc., to be used in the lottery for determining whether or not a win is won. Here, the setting state of the slot machine 10 is one of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" set using a setting key (not shown), and in "Setting 1", a random number table with the lowest probability of winning a small win is selected, and in "Setting 6", a random number table with the highest probability of winning a small win is selected. In addition, the number of medals bet is one of 1 to 3, and a random number table with a higher probability of winning a small win is selected as the number of medals bet increases. For example, the probability of winning a small win when three medals are bet is more than three times higher than the probability of winning a small win when one medal is bet. Furthermore, there are two types of small win probability, high and low, and when the current payout rate is below a specified expected value, a random number table with a high probability of winning a small win is selected, and when it exceeds the specified expected value, a random number table with a low probability of winning a small win is selected.

In step S602, the random number table selected in this way is checked against the random number latched by the random number counter when the start lever 71 is operated to draw a winning combination (winning combination drawing). In step S603, it is determined whether any winning combination has been won, and if no winning combination has been won, the process ends. If any winning combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S604, where a winning flag corresponding to that winning combination is set and the winning line on which the symbols should be aligned is determined. In step S605, a slip table for reel stop control is determined and stored in the slip table storage area of RAM 153. The slip table here is a table that determines how far the reels are to slide so that the symbols to be stopped stop on a given winning line when the symbols on a given winning line at the time when the stop switches 72 to 74 are pressed are different from the symbols to be stopped on that winning line.

After step S605, in step S606, a variation pattern setting process is performed, and then this process is terminated. In the variation pattern setting process, settings related to the operation of the reels are performed. For example, depending on the winning status of the role lottery and the game status, the reels may start to rotate sequentially from left → center → right, rather than all at once, or a freeze state may be set at the start of rotation.

Next, the reel control process in step S504 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG. 15.

In the reel control process, first, freeze game processing is performed in step S701. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, when the game moves to the second replay time (RT2) where the probability of winning a replay is relatively high, the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R in the reel unit 41 behave differently from the normal moving pattern display (patterns moving from top to bottom), and during that time, the player cannot stop the stop switches 72, 73, and 74 (although they can be used for performance), resulting in a freeze game as a pseudo game. Details of the freeze game processing will be described later.

After step S701, a wait process is performed in step S702. This wait process waits for a predetermined wait time (e.g., 4.1 seconds) to elapse from the time the reels started spinning in the previous game before starting the reels spinning in the current game. For this reason, even if a player bets medals and operates the start lever 71, each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R may not spin immediately.

Following the wait process of step S702, a reel rotation process of step S703 is performed to rotate each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R. The reel rotation process is performed by setting a predetermined acceleration counter value based on an acceleration counter table to the acceleration counter of each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, and then allowing a timer interrupt, thereby starting rotation based on the timer interrupt process. In addition, when the reel rotation process is performed, a process is performed to determine whether each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R has entered a constant speed rotation state, and if so, a rotation position detection process is performed for each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R.

The freeze game is an effect that uses reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, and is not a main game (a display of changing symbols that determines whether or not a winning combination will be achieved depending on the stopping state), but a pseudo game (an effect that only indicates or suggests already-determined, unchanging content). As such, since the freeze game is not included in the main game, the freeze game will start even if there is a wait for the current game. Furthermore, the freeze game requires at least 3 seconds, so even if the previous game was played in the minimum time required, if the freeze period ends with the current game, the wait period will be canceled. Furthermore, if the freeze game is executed in step S701, the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R have already started spinning at the end of the freeze game (the state in which step S703 has been performed).

After step S703, the process proceeds to step S704, where a fluctuation start command is set to inform the sub-control device 111 that the reels have started to rotate (the display of the varying patterns). In this embodiment, the fluctuation start command also includes information on the winning combination. In the following step S705, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 72 to 74 have been pressed to generate a reel stop command, more specifically, whether an ON signal has been received from the stop detection sensors 72a to 74a. That is, in this embodiment, the period from when each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R starts to rotate until the rotation position of each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is detected is set as an invalid period, and even if the stop switches 72 to 74 are pressed during this invalid period, the ON signal from the stop detection sensors 72a to 74a is invalidated.

If the result of step S705 is negative, i.e., if a stop command has not been issued, the process proceeds to step S706, where it is determined whether or not the predetermined maximum spin time (e.g., 40 seconds) of each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R has elapsed. If the result of step S706 is negative, i.e., if the maximum spin time has not elapsed, the process returns to step S705. On the other hand, if the result of step S706 is positive, i.e., if the maximum spin time has elapsed, a forced stop process is performed in step S707, which forcibly stops all of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R that are spinning. After step S707, the process proceeds to step S714.

Also, if the result of step S705 is positive, that is, if any of the stop switches 72-74 is pressed and a stop command is issued, the process proceeds to step S708, where reel stop processing is performed. In this reel stop processing, the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R corresponding to the pressed stop switch 72-74 are stopped, but if a winning combination is obtained in the combination lottery and the winning flag is set, the slip table stored in the slip table storage area of RAM 153 is referenced, and the winning combination is controlled to be aligned on the specified pay line as much as possible.

That is, the number of the symbol present at the base position (for example, the middle row) is confirmed at the timing when the stop switches 72 to 74 are operated. Specifically, the number of the symbol present at the base position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. Next, the number of reel slips to stop the symbol to be stopped is calculated. Depending on the calculation result, the symbol present at the base position may be stopped as it is, or may be shifted by one symbol (in the positive direction of the reel rotation), or may be shifted by two symbols, or may be shifted by three symbols, or may be shifted by four symbols. Then, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the symbol present at the base position, and the number of the symbol to be stopped (to be stopped) at the base position is determined (specified). After that, the reel is stopped when the symbol number of the symbol to be stopped and the symbol number of the symbol present at the base position match.

For example, if a "watermelon" is won and the watermelon symbol is stopped on the top of the left reel 42L and the middle of the middle reel 42M, and the right reel 42R is spinning, if the right stop switch 74 is pressed at the same time that the watermelon stops on the top of the right reel 42R, the reel is slid two symbols so that the watermelon stops on the bottom. However, since the range that can be slid is predetermined (for example, a maximum of four symbols), the "watermelon" symbol may not stop on the winning line depending on the timing of pressing the stop switches 72-74. Note that in the forced stop process of step S707, if the winning flag is set, the same process is performed. Note that if multiple winning combinations are won (simultaneously), the winning combinations are controlled to be stopped and displayed on the specified winning line as much as possible.

Next, in step S709, it is determined whether the current stop command is the first stop command, i.e., whether the stop switches 72-74 were pressed when all three reels 42L, 42M, 42R were spinning. If the determination in step S709 is positive, i.e., if it is the first stop command, the process proceeds to step S710, where a first stop command is set to inform the sub-control device 111 that the first of the spinning reels has stopped (first stop). In this embodiment, the first stop command also includes information on whether the bonus symbol and the special replay A symbol have stopped, information on the activated line on which the symbol has stopped, etc.

After step S710, in step S711, a slip table setting process is performed. In the slip table setting process, stop information is set based on the winning flag that has been set and the symbols (stop results) of the stopped reels. For example, when a winning combination is to be stopped on a specified effective line, the position at which the winning combination is to be stopped is determined in relation to the symbols that have already been stopped (when a red 7 is to be stopped and displayed, if the red 7 is stopped on the top row of the left reel, reel control (slip control) can be performed to stop the red 7 on the top row or middle row of the center reel, and if the red 7 is stopped on the middle row of the left reel, reel control can be performed to stop the red 7 only on the middle row of the center reel). At this time, when a winning combination is to be stopped on a specified effective line, it is determined whether or not a combination with another combination occurs, and if a combination of combinations cannot occur, the process proceeds to the next step as is, and if a combination of combinations can occur, the effective line on which the symbols that make up the winning combination are aligned is limited so that the combination can be avoided.

Here, a combination of roles refers to a case where multiple roles occur simultaneously, such as when a "watermelon" has been won and a "cherry" symbol appears on the active line on the left reel 42L when a watermelon symbol is attempted to stop on the left reel. After step S711, the process proceeds to step S714. Note that in this process, for example, in a configuration in which a push order role is provided that can be stopped (awarded) on an active line by operating the stop switches 72-74 in a predetermined order, when a push order role is won, if the operation is performed according to the push order, the push order role will be awarded, and if an operation is not performed according to the push order, the role that is simultaneously won with the push order role will be awarded.

If the result of step S709 is negative, that is, if the current stop command is not the first stop command, the process proceeds to step S712, where it is determined whether the stop command is the second stop command, that is, whether the stop switch is pressed when one of the three reels is stopped and two reels are spinning. If the result of step S712 is positive, that is, if the stop command is the second stop command, the process proceeds to step S713, where a second stop command is set to inform the sub-control device 111 that two of the spinning reels have stopped (second stop). In this embodiment, the second stop command also includes information on whether the bonus symbol and the special replay A symbol have stopped side by side on a predetermined pay line (a tenpai has been achieved), information on the pay line on which the symbols have stopped, and the like. After step S713, the slip table setting process of step S711 described above is performed, and the process proceeds to step S714.

When a bonus symbol is completed or a special replay A symbol is completed, the sub-control device 111 that receives the second stop command generates sound effects and the like from the speaker 14. In addition, in situations where three bonus symbols are completed (when the bonus winning flag is set) or when a special replay A symbol may be completed, a performance may be performed using the performance display device 15 in addition to sound effects.

After the forced stop process in step S707, after the slip table setting process in step S711, and if a negative judgment is made in step S712, i.e., if the current stop command is neither the first stop command nor the second stop command, then in step S714 it is judged whether or not all of the left, center, and right reels 42L, 42M, and 42R have stopped spinning. If a negative judgment is made in step S714, the process returns to step S705.

On the other hand, if the result of step S714 is positive, a payout determination process is performed in step S715. In the payout determination process, it is determined whether or not the combination is lined up on a winning line, and if the combination is not lined up on a winning line, 0 is set in the planned payout number storage area of RAM 153. If the combination is lined up on a winning line, it is determined whether or not the combination matches the winning combination, and if they do not match, an error is displayed by the upper lamp 13 or the like, and 0 is set in the planned payout number storage area. If they match, the payout number corresponding to the combination is set in the planned payout number storage area.

After step S715, in step S716, a third stop command is set to inform the sub-control device 111 that all three of the spinning reels have stopped (third stop). In this embodiment, the third stop command also includes information about the winning combination, the pay line for the winning combination, etc.

In the next step S717, it is determined whether the RT state is "RT1" or "RT2". In other words, it is determined whether the value of the RT counter that stores the RT state is either "1" or "2". The RT states in this embodiment include "RT0", which is the normal replay probability, "RT1", which occurs after the bonus ends and there is a possibility of winning special replays A, B, and fake replays, "RT2", which has a higher replay probability than "RT0" and "RT1", and "RT3", which is a state during the bonus where a replay is not won.

If the result of step S717 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S717 is positive, the process ends after subtracting 1 from the RT counter, which indicates the remaining period (remaining number of games) of the current replay state, in step S718.

Next, the medal payout process in step S505 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG. 16.

In the medal payout process, first in step S801, it is determined whether the payout number counted by the payout number counter matches the planned payout number stored in the planned payout number storage area. If the payout number and the planned payout number do not match, it is determined in step S802 whether the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit (the number of medals stored is 50). If the upper limit has not been reached, in step S803, the count value of the credit counter and the payout number are each incremented by 1. This causes the numbers in the remaining number display unit 35 and the acquired number display unit 37 to each be incremented by 1.

On the other hand, if the result of step S802 is positive, that is, if the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit, the medal payout rotating plate is driven in step S804 to pay out medals from the hopper device 91 to the medal receiving tray 18 via the medal discharge port 17. Furthermore, in step S805, the payout number is incremented by one in response to a medal detection signal from the payout detection sensor 91a attached to the hopper device 91. This increments the number in the acquired number display unit 37 by one. Then, after incrementing the payout number by one in step S803 or step S805, the process returns to step S801. If the payout number and the planned payout number match in step S801, the medal payout rotating plate of the hopper device 91 is stopped in step S806, and this process ends. The payout number and acquired number display unit 37 are reset the next time the start lever 71 is operated.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S506 will be described based on the flowchart in FIG. 17. First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the RB in progress flag, which indicates that the game is in RB, is set to on (set to "1"). If the determination in step S901 is negative, it is determined in step S902 whether or not the BB in progress flag, which indicates that the game is in BB, is set to on (set to "1"). If the determination in step S902 is negative, that is, if the game is not in a bonus game, the process proceeds to step S903, where a bonus symbol determination process is performed. After the bonus symbol determination process, this process ends.

The bonus symbol determination process will now be described with reference to FIG. 18. First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the RB win flag is set. If the result of step S1001 is positive, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the RB symbol (e.g., the "BAR" symbol) is aligned on the pay line. If the result of step S1002 is negative, this process is terminated.

When a small role or replay is won in the role lottery and the corresponding small role winning flag or replay winning flag is set to ON, the small role winning flag and replay winning flag set to ON in the game are set to OFF, whether or not the corresponding symbol is stopped and a small role is won in the game, and the small role flag and replay flag set to ON are not carried over to the next game. In contrast, when a bonus role is won in the role lottery and the corresponding bonus winning flag (RB winning flag, BB winning flag) is set to ON, if the corresponding symbol is not won in the game, the setting state of the bonus winning flag set to ON is carried over to the next game and thereafter until the corresponding bonus is won. In addition, in the lottery process in the next game in which the BB or RB winning flag is carried over, a lottery is held regarding whether or not a small role or replay will be won, but a lottery regarding BB or RB is not held. In addition, if a small win or replay is won while the BB or RB win flag is carried over, the slip table is stored so that the small win or replay is given priority.

On the other hand, if the result of step S1002 is positive, that is, if the RB symbols are aligned on the pay line (the RB symbols are displayed stationary and an RB wins), then in step S1003, RB start processing is performed, and then this processing ends. In the RB start processing, the RB win flag is reset (off) and the RB win flag is set (on) to make the RB game a type of bonus game, and an RB start command indicating the start of RB is output to the sub-control device 111 to perform an opening performance or the like. Furthermore, in step S1003, RB game initial setting processing is executed.

In this embodiment, the RB is made up of 12 JAC games and ends when 12 JAC games have been played or when 8 small wins have been won. For this reason, in the RB game initial setting process, the remaining JAC game counter, which indicates the number of remaining games in the RB, is set to "12", and the remaining win counter, which indicates the remaining number of small wins, is set to "8".

In the JAC game, only one bet is allowed, and the probability of hitting a small win is very high (the probability of hitting a bell is increased). When a small win (in this example, all small wins are JAC symbols) is hit in the JAC game, the maximum number of medals (15 in this example) is paid out. In the RB, when a small win is hit 8 times, the RB game ends even before the JAC game reaches 12 times.
Also, if the result of step S1001 is negative, that is, if the RB hit flag is not set, then in step S1004, it is determined whether or not the BB hit flag is set. If the result of step S1004 is negative, then this process ends. On the other hand, if the BB hit flag is set and the result of step S1004 is positive, then in step S1005, it is determined whether or not the BB symbol (for example, the symbol "red 7") is aligned on the pay line. If the result of step S1005 is negative, then this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step S1005 is positive, that is, if the BB symbols are aligned on the active line (the BB symbols are stopped and displayed, resulting in a BB win), then BB start processing is performed in step S1006, and then this processing ends. In the BB start processing, the BB winning flag is reset (OFF), and the BB winning flag is set (ON), making the game a BB game, which is a type of bonus game, and a BB start command indicating the start of the BB is output to the sub-control device 111 to perform an opening performance or the like. Furthermore, in step S1006, BB game initial setting processing is executed.

In this embodiment, the BB ends when more than 345 medals are paid out. For this reason, in the BB game initial setting process, the bonus payout counter is set to "345" to know when the number of medals paid out during the bonus game exceeds a specified number. In this embodiment, no special symbol is set to transition to the JAC game, and the game automatically transitions to the JAC game when bonus symbols (BB symbols) are lined up. Furthermore, in the BB game, there is no specified number of games as a termination condition, and transition to the JAC game is possible even if no small winning combination is achieved, and the game ends when more medals are awarded (paid out) than the specified number.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 17, if the answer is YES in step S901, i.e., if the game state is during the RB bonus game, the value of the remaining JAC game counter is decremented by "1" in step S904. In the following step S905, it is determined whether or not a small winning combination has been won. If the answer is YES in step S905, the value of the remaining winning counter is decremented by "1" in step S906.

After step S906, or if a negative judgment is made in step S905, in step S907, it is judged whether or not the value of the remaining JAC game counter or the value of the remaining winning counter is "0". If a negative judgment is made in step S907, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S907, RB end processing is performed in step S908, and then this process ends. In the RB end processing, the RB winning flag is turned off, various counters are appropriately reset, and an RB end command indicating the end of RB is output to the sub-control device 111 to perform an ending performance.

If the result of step S902 is positive, then in step S909 it is determined whether or not a small win has been won. If the result of step S909 is negative, then this process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S909 is positive, then in step S910 the value of the bonus payout counter is decremented by the number of coins paid out in response to the small win (in this example, "15"). Note that the bonus payout counter may have a minimum value of "0" or may be configured to count "0 or less."

After step S910, in step S911, it is determined whether the value of the bonus payout counter exceeds "0" (effectively, is it 1 or more). If the determination is positive in step S911, that is, if medals exceeding the upper limit (345 medals in this example) have not yet been awarded (paid out) in BB, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step S911 is negative, i.e., if the upper payout limit for BB has been reached, then in step S912, BB end processing is performed, and then this processing ends. In the BB end processing, the BB winning flag is turned off, various counters are appropriately reset, and a BB end command indicating the end of BB is output to the sub-control device 111 to perform an ending performance.

In this embodiment, the game automatically transitions to a JAC game where there is a high probability of winning small prizes (in this example, all small prizes are JAC symbols) (auto jack-in), but the game may also be configured to provide a JAC symbol, and provide a small prize game in which the JAC symbol can be won in the BB, and a set number of JAC games to transition to when the JAC symbol is stopped and displayed (manual jack-in).

Next, the RT state processing in step S507 of normal processing (FIG. 13) will be explained with reference to FIG. 19.

First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not a bonus has been won (whether or not the BB win flag or the RB win flag is set to ON). If a positive determination is made in step S2101, in step S2102, the state is transitioned to "RT3", which is a bonus state in which a replay has not been won (the RT counter is set to "3"). After that, this process ends. Note that the configuration may be such that there is a possibility of winning a replay or winning a miss during the bonus.

If the result of step S2101 is negative, then in step S2103 it is determined whether or not a bonus has been won. If the result of step S2103 is positive, then in step S2104 the RT state is transitioned to "RT0", which has a normal replay probability and in which a win occurs even if the player loses (the RT counter is set to "0"). After that, this process ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2103, in step S2105, it is judged whether or not BB has ended. If a positive judgment is made in step S2105, in step S2106, the RT state is transitioned to "RT1" where there is a possibility of winning special replay A, special replay B, and fake replay (the RT counter is set to "1"). Next, in step S2107, "20" is set in the RT number counter as the deadline for RT1. After that, in step S2108, an RT1 transition command is set to the sub-control device 111 to inform it that it will transition to RT1 after BB, and then this process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the sub-control device 111 that has received the RT1 transition command performs an RT1 performance on the performance display device 15 or the like to determine whether or not special replay A can be stopped, in response to a maximum of 20 RT1 states after BB. For example, the performance display device 15 derives a display of "White 7 high probability state," a display of "Enter XX mode (RT2) if white 7s are aligned," and a display indicating the remaining period of RT1. Note that in this embodiment, since the RT1 state always transitions to a maximum period of 20 games after the end of BB, the RT1 transition command may be omitted, and the sub-control device 111 may receive a BB end command from the main control device 131 to understand that the transition will occur to the 20-game RT1 state. In addition, the reels may be frozen during the opening and ending periods of the bonus, the opening period of RT1, etc., to ensure that the effects during such periods are visible (prescribed explanations are not skipped by stopping the stop switches 72, 73, and 74).

If a negative judgment is made in step S2105, in step S2109, it is judged whether or not RB has ended. If a positive judgment is made in step S2109, in step S2110, the RT state is transitioned to "RT1" (the RT counter is set to "1"). Next, in step S2111, the RT count counter is set to "1" as the deadline for RT1. After that, in step S2112, a transition command to RT1 after RB is set to inform the sub-control device 111 that a transition to RT1 will occur after RB, and then this process is terminated.

In this embodiment, since the RT1 state is always transitioned to after the RB ends, the period of which is one game, the RT1 transition command after the RB may be omitted, and the sub-control device 111 may understand that the transition to the RT1 state will occur once by receiving the RB end command from the main control device 131. In this embodiment, even if the transition to the RT1 state after the RB occurs, the RT1 performance is not performed on the performance display device 15 (the display mode is the same as that of RT0). However, if the special replay A or fake replay is won in the first game after the RB, a guide game is executed to guide the player to aim for the special replay A and stop the display. In the guide game, for example, the performance display device 15 displays three symbols of the special replay A in a row, and a guide display is performed to derive letters indicating that the player should aim, or a sound effect is induced. In addition, in a configuration in which the stopping order of reels 42L, 42M, and 42R must be correct in order for special replay A to be stopped, the stopping order may be instructed by a guide display, or the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R to be stopped may be instructed by LEDs built into the upper and lower edges of each display window 31L, 31M, and 31R, or by backlights installed on the inside of reels 42L, 42M, and 42R.

If the result of step S2109 is negative, then in step S2113, it is determined whether the value of the RT counter is either "1" or "2". If the result of step S2113 is negative, then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of step S2113 is positive, then in step S2117, it is determined whether or not the special replay A has been won. If the result of step S2117 is positive, then in step S2118, the RT state is shifted to "RT2" (the RT counter is set to "2"). In the following step S2119, a lottery is performed to determine the number of RTs. In this embodiment, when shifting to RT2, the period of RT2 is set to one of 50 games, 100 games, and 150 games. For example, it is allocated to 50 games at about 8/10, 100 games at about 1/10, and 150 games at about 1/10. Furthermore, in step S2120, the RT2 period determined by the RT count lottery is set in the RT count counter. Note that in the role lottery, rather than simply determining that special replay A has been won, it may be determined whether or not special replay A that transitions to RT2 of 50 games, special replay A that transitions to RT2 of 100 games, or special replay A that transitions to RT2 of 150 games has been won. Furthermore, in this embodiment, special replay A is configured to align with the center line, but it may also be configured to transition to RT2 of 50 games by aligning with the top or bottom row, 100 games by aligning diagonally, and 150 games by aligning with the center (special replay A with white 7s aligned with the top line, special replay A with white 7s aligned with the bottom line, special replay A with white 7s aligned with the diagonal line downward to the right, special replay A with white 7s aligned with the diagonal line upward to the right, and special replay A with white 7s aligned with the center line). A special replay A in which white 7s line up on the center line may be provided), and for example, a first white 7 symbol and a second white 7 symbol with a slightly different design (almost the same) from the first white 7 symbol may be provided adjacent to each other (the order of display may be arranged in a row) on the left and right reels (the center reel may only have the first white 7 symbol), and different combinations of the first white 7 symbol and the second white 7 symbol may result in different white 7s, and the number of RT2 games awarded for each white 7 line may be different.

After that, in step S2121, the first freeze game flag is set to ON. In this embodiment, a freeze game is performed when transitioning to RT2, and in the freeze game, the period (number of games) of RT2 is instructed to the player. That is, in the RT2 state, the remaining period display is derived in the performance display device 15 as a taught amount display means indicating the remaining period of RT2, and the newly granted (added) number of games is added to the value of the remaining period display after being taught as an added display in the performance display device 15. However, the remaining period display only displays the number of games (taught amount) that has already been taught to be granted, and there are cases where the remaining period display not only teaches the entire remaining period of RT2, but also where there is an untaught number of games not shown in the remaining period display. Note that the remaining period display does not require the player to memorize the remaining number of RT2 games that has been taught.

In the following step S2122, an RT2 transition command is set to the sub-control device 111 to inform it that a transition to RT2 will occur following the winning of special replay A. The RT2 transition command includes information regarding the RT2 period set in the RT count counter. After step S2122, this process ends.

If the result of step S2117 is negative, then in step S2123 it is determined whether or not special replay B has been awarded. If the result of step S2123 is positive, then in step S2124 the RT state is transitioned to "RT2" (the RT counter is set to "2"). In the following step S2125, a lottery is performed for the number of RTs, and in step S2126 the RT2 period determined in the lottery is set in the RT count counter. Note that in the role lottery, rather than simply determining that special replay B has been awarded, it may be determined whether or not special replay B that transitions to RT2 of 50 games, special replay B that transitions to RT2 of 100 games, or special replay B that transitions to RT2 of 150 games has been awarded.

Then, in step S2127, the second freeze game flag is set to ON. In this embodiment, the contents of RT2 (such as the allocation of the number of RT number lotteries) are the same when transitioning to RT2 due to the winning of special replay A and when transitioning to RT2 due to the winning of special replay B, but the contents of the freeze game at the start of RT2, which will be described in detail later, are different.

In the next step S2128, a special replay B after RT2 transition command is set to the sub-control device 111 to inform the sub-control device 111 that a transition to RT2 will occur following the winning of special replay B. The special replay B after RT2 transition command includes information regarding the RT2 period set in the RT count counter. After step S2128, this process ends.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S2123, in step S2129, it is judged whether or not the value of the RT number counter has become "0". If a negative judgment is made in step S2129, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S2129, that is, if the RT1 or RT2 period has ended, in step S2130, the RT state is transitioned to "RT0" (the RT counter is set to "0"). In the following step S2131, an RT0 transition command is set to inform the sub-control device 111 of the transition to RT0, and then this process is terminated.

In addition, RT2 is a state in which the probability of winning a miss in the role lottery decreases, but the replay probability increases, and the player can proceed with the game without losing the medals he has (for example, it may be set to a calculation that slightly increases them). In other words, the slot machine 10 of this embodiment has a gameplay in which the player wins the BB and then transitions to RT2, and during the RT2 period, the player aims for the BB again, thereby aiming for an efficient increase in the medals he has. In addition, in this embodiment, the game transitions to RT1 after the bonus, but it may be configured to transition to RT1 at a different timing, or it may be configured not to transition to RT1 after the bonus, or may not transition at all. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the function of determining whether or not the special replay A has won (stopped display) and whether or not the special replay B has won (stopped display) constitutes the determination means. In addition, the first freeze game flag and the second freeze game flag correspond to the storage means.

Next, the guidance game setting process performed in the variation pattern setting process of step S606 of the lottery process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to FIG. 20. Here, the "guidance game" is a presentation that instructs the player to stop displaying the reels in an attempt to aim for special replay A (a line of white 7s) that may be won, which transitions to RT2. The guidance game setting process is a process for outputting a command to instruct the sub-control device 111 and the display control device 112 to execute the guidance game.

In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the guidance game, when "white 7s line up" on the performance display device 15, it is instructed that the game will move to RT2, but it is not instructed that the game may move to RT2 even if the white 7s are not lined up. In this embodiment, RT2 corresponds to a "specific bonus", and special replay A (white 7s lined up) which is instructed to be associated with the move to RT2 in the guidance game corresponds to a specific mode and specific identification information. Furthermore, the state that is set as RT2 (the state in which the game is being played in RT2) corresponds to the bonus state. Also, a game in which special replay A can be stopped and displayed corresponds to a variable display of identification information that can derive a specific mode, and a game in which fake replay can be stopped and displayed is not a variable display of identification information that can derive a specific mode.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not it is RT1 (RT counter = 1). If the determination in step S2201 is negative, this process ends. In this example, in a state other than RT1, there is no possibility of winning special replay A, special replay B, or fake replay. Note that the configuration may be such that special replay A, special replay B, and fake replay can be won even in RT states other than the RT1 state.

If the result of step S2201 is positive, then in step S2202, it is determined whether or not special replay A has been won. If the result of step S2202 is positive, then in step S2203, a guide game command is set to the sub-control device 111 to execute a guide game, and then this process ends.

If the result of step S2202 is negative, then in step S2204, it is determined whether or not the fake replay has been won. If the result of step S2204 is negative, then this process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S2204 is positive, then in step S2203, a guide play command is set, and then this process ends.

The fake replay is composed of a combination of replay, bell, and replay that are stopped and displayed on the left, center, and right of a predetermined effective line of the reel unit 41, and in the guide game when the fake replay is won, up to two "white 7" symbols of special replay A are aligned on the predetermined effective line (up to a tenpai), but three are not aligned. Also, as described above, when special replay A is won, special replay B is also won, while when special replay B is won, there are also cases where special replay A is not won. In this example, when special replay A is not won but special replay B is won, the guide game command is not set (the guide game is not executed). However, since special replay B is always won (without missing), the game transitions to RT2, and in this embodiment, a freeze game is also executed at the start of RT2. In addition, if a bonus is won in RT1, the RT state process that is performed immediately after the variation pattern setting process of the lottery process switches to RT0, and the RT1 period ends with the bonus winning game.

Next, the freeze game process of step S701 of the reel control process (FIG. 15) will be described with reference to FIG. 21. In this embodiment, the game in which the freeze game is performed corresponds to the specific variable display.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the first freeze game flag (which is set to ON when special replay A is won) is set to ON. If a positive determination is made in step S2301, the first freeze game flag is turned OFF in step S2302, and a freeze in progress flag indicating that a freeze game is in progress is set to ON in step S2303.

In the next step S2304, it is determined whether there is information on the occurrence of a power outage or information on the opening of the front door 12. If the result of the negative determination in step S2304 is negative, the process proceeds to step S2305. The information on the occurrence of a power outage and information on the opening of the front door 12 are stored until the setting of the first game after the power is restored or the front door 12 is closed (setting based on the lever on if the reel unit 41 is stopped, or resetting during the rotation if the reel unit 41 is rotating). If the result of the positive determination in step S2304 is negative, that is, if a power outage has occurred or the front door 12 has been opened between the current game and the previous game, the process proceeds to step S2318, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the presence of information on the occurrence of a power outage or information on the opening of the front door 12 corresponds to a non-derivation condition.

In step S2305, it is determined whether the value of the RT counter is "150". If the determination in step S2305 is affirmative, in step S2306, the freeze counter indicating the remaining number of times freeze operation 2 (reverse rotation effect) is to be set to "2". Furthermore, in step S2307, the maximum rotation flag is set to ON, indicating that the maximum number of times freeze operation 2 (reverse rotation effect) is to be executed is set, and then the process proceeds to step S2311.

If the result of step S2305 is negative, then in step S2308 it is determined whether the value of the RT counter is "100". If the result of step S2308 is positive, then in step S2309 the freeze counter is set to "1" and the process proceeds to step S2311. If the result of step S2308 is negative, then in step S2310 the freeze counter is set to "0" and the process proceeds to step S2311.

In step S2311, freeze operation 1 (shaking effect) is set, and in step S2312, a value corresponding to the period of freeze operation 1 (about 3 seconds in this example) is set in the freeze timer. In this embodiment, freeze operation 1 involves each reel moving back and forth relatively slowly within a range of about 10 degrees of rotation angle (about 4 times). The freeze timer is also decremented periodically (for example, by the timer decrement process of the timer interrupt process (Figure 10)).

After step S2312, in step S2313, freeze game processing is performed. This freeze game processing will be described later.

If the result of step S2301 is negative, then in step S2315 it is determined whether or not the second freeze game flag is set to ON. If the result of step S2315 is negative, then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of step S2315 is positive, then in step S2316 the second freeze game flag is turned OFF, and in step S2317 the frozen flag is set to ON.

After step S2317, or if a positive judgment is made in step S2304, in step S2318, it is judged whether the value of the RT number counter is "150". If a positive judgment is made in step S2318, in step S2319, the freeze counter is set to "2". Furthermore, in step S2320, a shortened flag is set to ON, indicating that the freeze game will be shortened. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2311, where freeze operation 1 (swinging effect) is set, and in step S2312, the freeze timer is set (equivalent to approximately 3 seconds), and then the process proceeds to step S2313.

If the answer is negative in step S2318, then in step S2321 it is determined whether the value of the RT counter is "100". If the answer is positive in step S2321, then in step S2322 the freeze counter is set to "1". After that, in step S2320 the shortening flag is set to ON, in step S2311 freeze operation 1 (swinging effect) is set, in step S2312 the freeze timer is set (equivalent to approximately 3 seconds), and then the process proceeds to step S2313.

If the result of step S2321 is negative, the freeze counter is set to "0" in step S2323, freeze operation 1 (swinging effect) is set in step S2311, and the freeze timer is set (equivalent to about 3 seconds) in step S2312, and then the process proceeds to step S2313. In this embodiment, the confirmation means, particularly the grasping means, is constituted by the process of determining whether or not the first freeze game flag and the second freeze game flag are set to ON by determining whether or not the special replay A and the special replay B are won in the RT state process (FIG. 19), and the process of confirming whether or not the first freeze game flag and the second freeze game flag are set to ON in the freeze game process (FIG. 21). Also, the fact that the second freeze game flag is set to ON corresponds to the non-derivation condition.

Here, the freeze game processing in step S2313 will be described with reference to FIG. 22. First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the freeze game flag is set to ON. If the result in step S2401 is negative, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is YES in step S2401, then in step S2402, it is determined whether the value of the freeze timer is "0". If the answer is YES in step S2402, then in step S2303, it is determined whether the value of the freeze counter is "0".

If the result of step S2303 is negative, that is, if it is not yet time to end the freeze game, in step S2404, it is determined whether or not the reverse rotation flag is set to ON. If the result of step S2404 is negative, in step S2405, it is determined whether or not the pseudo stop flag is set to ON. If the result of step S2405 is negative, in step S2406, freeze operation 2 (reverse rotation effect) is set. In the following step S2407, a value corresponding to the time of freeze operation 2 (reverse rotation effect) (in this example, about 3 seconds) is set for the freeze timer. In this embodiment, as freeze operation 2, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates in the reverse direction so that the symbols move from bottom to top in the reel unit 41 (display windows 31L, 31M, 31R).

Then, in step S2408, the reverse rotation flag is set to ON, and in step S2409, a reverse rotation command is set to the sub-control device 111 indicating that a reverse rotation effect is to be performed, and then this process ends.

If step S2404 returns a positive result, i.e., if the reverse rotation flag is set to ON (if the timing for the reverse rotation effect to end has arrived), then in step S2410, the reverse rotation flag is turned OFF. In the following step S2411, it is determined whether or not the maximum rotation flag (which is set to ON when special replay A is won and RT2 is set to 150 games) is set to ON.

If the result of step S2411 is YES, then in step S2412, it is determined whether the value of the freeze counter is "1". If the result of step S2412 is NO, i.e., if the value of the freeze counter is "2", then in step S2413, freeze operation 3 (pseudo stop effect) is set. Here, a pseudo-stop display of the "white 7" repeat number combination (special replay A) is displayed. In the following step S2414, a value corresponding to the time of freeze operation 3 (pseudo stop effect) (about 2 seconds in this example) is set for the freeze timer. In this embodiment, as freeze operation 3 (pseudo stop effect), each reel moves back and forth within a range of about 1 degree of rotation angle, and a state (pseudo stop display) is derived in which the reels appear to be stopped.

In this embodiment, in the reverse spinning effect of the reels, the number of rotations (amount of rotation) and the rotation speed of each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are completely the same, and the pseudo stop display is displayed exactly when the reels have rotated a specified number of times. That is, for example, when "white 7" is displayed as stopped in the middle of the reels (see FIG. 25(a)), freeze operation 1 (see FIG. 25(b)) is performed followed by freeze operation 2 (see FIG. 25(d)), and then freeze operation 3 (see FIG. 25(e)) is derived, "white 7" is displayed as a pseudo stop display in the middle of the reels. For this reason, in this embodiment, in the reverse spinning effect of the freeze game, the reels are simply rotated exactly the specified number of times, and no processing is performed to detect the reel position (outcome) at the time of the pseudo stop display, or to make a specific reel perform a different operation from other reels during the reel rotation (changing the amount of rotation of a specific reel from the amount of rotation of the other reels to change the pseudo stop outcome from the outcome before the reverse spinning).

Then, in step S2415, the pseudo stop flag is set to ON, and in step S2416, a pseudo stop command is set to the sub-control device 111 indicating that a pseudo stop effect will be performed, and then this process is terminated.

Furthermore, if the result of step S2412 is positive, i.e., if special replay A is won and the reverse rotation effect is the second time, freeze operation 3 (pseudo stop effect) is set in step S2417. Here, the repeated number combination of "white 7" (special replay A) is pseudo-stopped and displayed. In the following step S2418, the freeze timer is set to a value corresponding to the time (approximately 5 seconds in this example) when freeze operation 3 (pseudo stop effect) is set and indicates that the maximum period of RT2 has been set.

Then, in step S2419, the maximum rotation flag is turned off, in step S2420, the value of the freeze counter is set to "0", and in step S2421, a maximum bonus effect command is set to the sub-control device 111, which indicates that the maximum number of games (initial number of games) to be awarded at the start of RT2 is to be instructed, and then this process is terminated.

If the result of step S2411 is negative, then in step S2422, it is determined whether or not the shortened flag is set to on (this flag is set to on when special replay B wins and the RT count counter is set to 150 or 100). If the result of step S2422 is negative, that is, when special replay A wins and the RT count counter is set to 100, then the process proceeds to step S2413 described above.

On the other hand, if the result of step S2422 is affirmative, then in step S2423, freeze operation 3 (pseudo stop effect) is set. Here, special replay B is pseudo-stopped. In the following step S2424, the freeze timer is set to a value corresponding to the time (approximately 5 seconds in this example) required for a predetermined instruction to be given when transitioning to RT2 occurs even though special replay A has not stopped (won) in freeze operation 3 (pseudo stop effect) (special replay B has won).

Then, in step S2425, the shortened flag is turned off, in step S2426, the value of the freeze counter is set to "0", and in step S2427, a shortened instruction command is set to the sub-control device 111 to instruct the number of games in RT2 in a shortened manner, and then this process is terminated.

With this configuration, when the special replay B is won, the reel reverse spin effect is at most once (none in the case of 50 games), and in the case of 150 games, the remaining number of games to be taught (plus 100 games) is taught all at once in the effect display device 15, and in the case of 100 games, the rocking effect (freeze action 1) after the reverse spin effect (freeze action 3) is not performed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the "white 7" is not displayed as stopped, the number of rotations (amount of rotation) and rotation speed of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R in the reel reverse spin effect are exactly the same as when the "white 7" is displayed as stopped, and a pseudo stop is displayed just when the specified number of rotations have been performed. That is, for example, when special replay B is displayed as stopped in the middle of the reel, that is, when, for example, you aim for white 7 but miss the timing of your operation (so-called eye-pressing) on the third stop, and the white 7 is aligned on the center line (see FIG. 26(g)), if freeze action 2 (see FIG. 25(d)) is performed via freeze action 1 (see FIG. 26(h)), and then freeze action 3 (see FIG. 26(i)) is derived, special replay B will be displayed as a pseudo-stop in the middle of the reel.

Also, if the result of step S2405 is positive, i.e., if the pseudo stop flag is set to ON (when special replay A is won, the number of RT2 games awarded is 100 or 150, and the reverse spin effect has been performed once), then in step S2428 the pseudo stop flag is turned OFF. Next, in step S2429, freeze operation 1 (swing effect) is set, and in step S2430, an operation guidance flag is set to ON, indicating that the situation is such that an operation guidance effect is performed (a swing effect is performed for the reels) that encourages the player to operate the effect button 101 during freeze play.

After step S2430, in step S2431, the freeze timer is set to a value corresponding to the longest duration of the operation guidance presentation (for example, approximately 10 seconds). In the following step S2432, the freeze counter value is decremented by "1". Furthermore, in step S2433, an operation guidance command is set to the sub-control device 111 indicating that an operation guidance presentation will be performed, and then this process is terminated.

Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step S2402 (if the value of the freeze timer is not "0"), then in step S2434 it is judged whether or not the operation guidance flag is set to on. If a negative judgment is made in step S2434, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S2434, then in step S2435 it is judged whether or not the start lever 71 has been operated. If a negative judgment is made in step S2435, this process is terminated. Note that the operating means that the player is prompted to operate in the operation guidance presentation is not limited to the start lever 71, and the presentation button 101, stop switch, etc. may also be used.

If the result of step S2435 is YES, then in step S2436, it is determined whether the value of the freeze counter is "0". If the result of step S2436 is NO, i.e., if the value of the freeze counter is "1", then the process proceeds to step S2406, where the reel reverse spin effect is set.

On the other hand, if the result of step S2436 is affirmative, the freeze timer is set to "0" in step S2437, and the process ends.

Also, if the result of step S2403 is positive, i.e., if the value of the freeze counter is "0", the freeze in progress flag is turned off in step S2438. Furthermore, in step S2439, a normal reel operation setting is performed to cause the reels to perform normal operation (reel operation in which the symbols move from top to bottom). After that, in step S2440, a freeze end command is set to the sub-control device 111 to indicate that the freeze game is to be ended, and then this process is terminated.

In addition, as will be described in detail later, when special replay A is displayed as stopped (awarded) and the number of games of RT2 awarded is 150, the reel reverse spin effect and pseudo stop effect up to step S2416 are performed, followed by another reel reverse spin effect and pseudo stop effect up to step S2421. In addition, when special replay A is displayed as stopped (awarded) and the number of games of RT2 awarded is 100, the reel shaking effect (freeze operation 1) is performed after the reel reverse spin effect and pseudo stop effect up to step S2416, but the reverse spin effect is not performed.

Returning to the explanation of the freeze game process in FIG. 21, after step S2313, in step S2314, it is determined whether the reels are performing normal operation (forward rotation such that the symbols move from top to bottom). If at least the freeze flag is set to ON, a negative determination is made in step S2314, and further, if the reel rotation speed immediately after the freeze game ends is slow, a negative determination is also made in step S2314. If a positive determination is made in step S2314, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2314, the process returns to the freeze game process in step S2313. Note that in this embodiment, the freeze game is performed even if a bonus is won in a game in which a freeze game is performed (a freeze game was scheduled at the beginning of the game), but it may be configured so that the freeze game is not performed if a bonus is won in a game in which a freeze game is performed.

Next, the guidance game presentation setting process by the sub-control device 111 for executing a guidance game presentation performed in response to a guidance game on the presentation display device 15 will be described with reference to FIG. 23 etc. Note that the guidance game presentation setting process is performed in the normal processing that is periodically performed by the sub-control device 111. Also, in this embodiment, the main control device 131 for executing the guidance game and the function of the sub-control device 111 correspond to the guidance means.

First, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not a guidance game flag, which is set to ON when a guidance game performance is being performed, is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S3101, it is determined in step S3102 whether or not a guidance game command has been received from the main control device 131. If a positive determination is made in step S3102, the guidance game flag is set to ON in step S3103. Furthermore, in step S3104, a guidance game performance start setting process is performed, and then this process is terminated.

In the guidance game effect start setting process, as shown in FIG. 26(j), a process is performed to derive a guidance game effect in the effect display device 15. That is, a display is induced in the center of the display unit of the effect display device 15 requesting that the reels be stopped to aim for the "white 7" that constitutes special replay A, and a display is induced in the upper part of the display unit to inform the player that a transition (entry) to RT2 (named XX mode for each model) will occur when the "white 7" is lined up, and sound effects, etc. are generated.

Also, if a positive judgment is made in step S3101, i.e., if the guide play flag is set to on, then in step S3105, it is judged whether or not a third stop command has been received from the main control device 131. If a negative judgment is made in step S3105, then in step S3106, it is judged whether or not a second stop command has been received from the main control device 131. If a negative judgment is made in step S3106, then in step S3107, it is judged whether or not a first stop command has been received from the main control device 131. If a negative judgment is made in step S3107, then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S3107, then in step S3108, it is judged whether or not a "white 7" has stopped on a specified pay line. If a positive judgment is made in step S3108, then in step S3109, a first successful performance corresponding to the first "white 7" being successfully stopped on a pay line is set, and this process ends. In the first successful performance of this embodiment, a display is made on the performance display device 15 indicating that a "white 7" has been stopped in correspondence with the stopped reel, and a sound effect is generated when the relevant reel stops.

On the other hand, if the result of step S3108 is negative, then in step S3110, a failure effect is set in which the "white 7" could not be displayed (i.e., the "white 7" could not be displayed, i.e., special replay A could not be won), and this process ends. In the failure effect of this embodiment, the display indicating that the "white 7" is being aimed for is erased, and only the background image is displayed, and the brightness is made relatively dark (see FIG. 26(k). While this figure shows a state in which the three reels are displayed in a stopped state, the state of the effect display device 15 is the same even if the reels are spinning after the occurrence of a failure effect).

If the result of step S3106 is positive, i.e., if a second stop command has been received, then in step S3111, it is determined whether or not two "white 7s" have stopped on a specified active line (whether or not "white 7s" have been completed). If the result of step S3111 is negative, then a failure effect is set in step S3110, and this process ends. Note that if the state is already a failure effect, then that state is maintained.

On the other hand, if the result of step S3111 is positive, then in step S3112, a second successful effect is set, which corresponds to the fact that the second "white 7" has been stopped on the specified active line (the "white 7" has been made into a ready hand), and this process ends. In the second successful effect of this embodiment, the effect display device 15 displays a message indicating that the "white 7" has been stopped and displayed next to the specified active line in response to the two stopped reels (the white 7 has been made into a ready hand), and a sound effect is generated when the corresponding reel stops.

Also, if the result of step S3105 is affirmative, that is, if the third stop command is received, the guide game flag is turned off in step S3113. Furthermore, in step S3114, it is determined whether or not an RT2 transition command has been received from the main control device 131. If the result of step S3114 is affirmative, that is, if the "white 7" is stopped and the special replay A is won, in step S3115, a goal achievement effect is performed corresponding to the fact that the third "white 7" has been stopped on a predetermined effective line (the special replay A has been won). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25(a), the "white 7" is displayed large in the center on the effect display device 15, and a display indicating that the RT state will transition to RT2 is derived to the left of the "white 7" and a display indicating the number of games that will be the RT2 period (a display of the minimum number of games) is derived to the right. Furthermore, a relatively flashy sound effect is also derived.

After step S3115, in step S3116, a first freeze effect flag is set to ON, indicating that a freeze effect corresponding to a freeze game based on the winning of special replay A is to be derived. In the following step S3117, based on information indicating the RT2 period (game count information) included in the RT2 transition command, the number of games in RT2 (in this example, either 50, 100, or 150) is set for the RT count grasping counter, which is used by the sub-control device 111 to grasp the remaining period (remaining number of games) of RT2. After step S3117, this process ends.

If the result of step S3114 is negative, then in step S3118 it is determined whether or not a command to transition to RT2 after the special B has been received. If the result of step S3118 is negative, i.e., if a fake replay has stopped and been displayed (a win has been achieved), then in step S3119 a failure effect (see FIG. 26(k)) is set, and this process ends. Note that if the failure effect is already in effect, then this effect is maintained.

On the other hand, if the result of step S3118 is positive, that is, if special replay B (which was won simultaneously with special replay A) wins, in step S3120, the reel unit 41 does not display the "white 7" stopped (three "white 7"s are not stopped on a predetermined effective line), but sets a reversal achievement effect that teaches a transition to RT2. In this embodiment, the reversal achievement effect derives a relatively dark display of only the background, as in the failure effect, for about two seconds from the stop of the three reels in the effect display device 15 (or the timing when the operation state of the stop switch corresponding to the third stop is released, whichever is earlier), and then, as shown in FIG. 26(g), the effect display device 15 displays a large "V" character as an auxiliary specific mode in the center (displayed in the same position as the above-mentioned "white 7" display, with the same size and decoration), and a display indicating that the RT state will transition to RT2 is derived to the right of that, and a display indicating the number of games that will be the period of RT2 (display of the minimum number of games) is derived to the left. In addition, some relatively flashy sound effects are also derived.

If the start lever 71 to start the next game is operated within 2 seconds of the third stop, the reversal achievement effect is skipped. Here, the reversal achievement effect may be configured not to be skipped as a freeze game. Alternatively, if a special replay B or fake replay is stopped and displayed, an effect that may cause a reversal achievement effect to occur may be started immediately after the third stop, thereby preventing the reversal achievement effect from being skipped. Of course, it is also possible to set the occurrence timing of the reversal achievement effect to another timing (less than 2 seconds, 0 seconds after the third stop, etc.).

After step S3120, in step S3121, a second freeze effect flag is set to ON, indicating that a freeze effect corresponding to a freeze game based on the winning of special replay B is to be derived. In the following step S3122, the number of games in RT2 (in this example, 50, 100, or 150) is set in the RT count counter based on information indicating the period of RT2 (game count information) included in the post-special B RT2 transition command. After step S3122, this process ends.

Also, if the result of step S3102 is negative, that is, if the guidance game performance is not in progress and the guidance game command has not been received, in step S3123, it is determined whether or not a special B after RT2 command has been received from the main control device 131. If the result of step S3123 is negative, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the result of step S3123 is positive, in step S3124, a sudden freeze performance flag is set to ON to derive a sudden freeze performance that notifies the player that a freeze game has occurred in the game following the game in which the guidance game has not been derived. In the following step S3125, the number of games in RT2 (in this example, 50, 100, or 150) is set for the RT count grasp counter based on the information indicating the period of RT2 (game count information) included in the special B after RT2 transition command. After step S3125, this process ends. In this embodiment, even if special replay B, which is not won at the same time as special replay A, is won, no guide game effect is performed (see FIG. 20). Therefore, in a game in which special replay B is won (changing display of symbols), as shown in FIG. 26(l), no guide game effect is performed, but special replay B is displayed frozen (a prize is won).

Next, the freeze effect setting process by the sub-control device 111 for deriving a freeze effect (pseudo game effect) corresponding to a freeze game in the effect display device 15 or the like will be described with reference to FIG. 24 etc. Note that the freeze effect setting process is performed as part of normal processing that is periodically performed in the sub-control device 111.

First, in step S3201, it is determined whether the freeze effect in progress flag is set to on. If a negative determination is made in step S3201, it is determined in step S3202 whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control device 131. If a negative determination is made in step S3202, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S3202, it is determined in step S3203 whether the first freeze effect flag or the second freeze effect flag is set to on.

If the result of step S3203 is affirmative, the first freeze effect flag and the second freeze effect flag are turned off in step S3204, and the freeze effect in progress flag is set to on in step S3205. Furthermore, in step S3206, the freeze operation 1 effect is set, and then this process is terminated. The freeze operation 1 effect of this embodiment is a 3-second effect corresponding to the freeze operation 1 (swing effect) of the reel unit 41, as shown in Figures 25 (b) and 26 (h), in which the character prays on the effect display device 15 and a corresponding sound is also generated. The freeze operation 1 effect is the same regardless of whether the special replay A or the special replay B is stopped and displayed on the reel unit 41. Furthermore, the device may be configured so that by operating the effect button 125 during this period, an effect suggesting the occurrence of reverse rotation can be produced (for example, when the effect button 125 is operated, a display is generated showing character A passing through the background in 1/20 of the cases where the game fails and in 1/10 of the cases where the game is successful, and a display is generated showing character B passing through the background in 1/20 of the cases where the game is successful, etc.).

If the answer is YES in step S3201, then in step S3207 it is determined whether or not a reverse rotation command has been received from the main control device 131. If the answer is YES in step S3207, then in step S3208 the freeze operation 2 effect is set, and then this process ends. As shown in FIG. 25(d), the freeze operation 2 effect of this embodiment is a 3-second effect that corresponds to the freeze operation 2 (reverse rotation effect) of the reel unit 41, and the effect display device 15 outputs a scene of the character being overjoyed, along with an appropriate sound. The freeze operation 2 effect is the same regardless of whether special replay A or special replay B is displayed stopped on the reel unit 41.

If the result of step S3207 is negative, in step S3209, it is determined whether or not a pseudo stop command has been received from the main control device 131. If the result of step S3209 is positive, in step S3210, the freeze operation 3 effect is set, and then this process is terminated. The freeze operation 3 effect of this embodiment is a 3-second effect corresponding to the freeze operation 3 (pseudo stop effect, pseudo stop display) of the reel unit 41 when the special replay A is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 25(e), in which a "white 7" is displayed large in the center on the effect display device 15, and a display indicating that the RT state will transition to RT2 is re-derived to the left of the "white 7", and a display (additional display) indicating that the number of games in the RT2 period has increased to the right (for example, the number of games was instructed to be 50 games in the guidance game effect, but in fact it was about 50 games more, for a total of 100 games) is derived. In addition, a relatively flashy sound effect is also derived. In this embodiment, the special effect display and bonus effect display are made up of the display of "white 7", a display indicating that the RT state is transitioning to RT2, and a display indicating the number of games that will be in the RT2 period (a display indicating that the number of games that will be in the RT2 period has increased).

If a negative judgment is made in step S3209, then in step S3211, it is judged whether or not an abbreviated teaching command has been received from the main control unit 131. If a positive judgment is made in step S3211, then in step S3212, the second completed freeze operation 3 performance is set, and then this processing is terminated. The second completed freeze action 3 effect of this embodiment is a 5-second effect corresponding to the freeze action 3 (pseudo stop effect, pseudo stop display) of the reel unit 41 when the special replay B is stopped, as shown in Fig. 26(i), in which a large "V" is displayed in the center on the effect display device 15 (displayed in the same position, with the same size and decoration as the "white 7" display of the specific effect display described above), and a display indicating that the RT state will transition to RT2 is derived to the left of it, and a display (additional display) indicating that the number of games in the RT2 period has increased (for example, the guidance game effect instructed 50 games, but in fact it is 50 games or 100 games more than that, for a total of 100 games or 150 games) is derived to the right. Furthermore, a relatively flashy sound effect is also derived. In this embodiment, the alternative display and bonus display are made up of the letter "V" displayed as an alternative display, a display indicating that the RT state is transitioning to RT2, and a display indicating the number of games that will be in the RT2 period (a display indicating that the number of games that will be in the RT2 period has increased).

In this embodiment, even if the RT2 period is "150 games", the reverse rotation effect is completed only once, so in the second completion freeze operation 3 effect, all of the remaining RT2 period is instructed (plus 100 games). In addition, assuming that the reversal achievement effect of the guidance game is skipped, the display of plus XX games may be stopped, and only a display instructing the transition to RT2 and a display of total XX games may be displayed.

Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step S3211, then in step S3213, it is judged whether or not a maximum added effect command has been received from the main control device 131. If a positive judgment is made in step S3213, then in step S3214, the first completed freeze action 3 effect is set, and then this processing is terminated. The first completed freeze action 3 effect of this embodiment is basically the same as the freeze action 3 effect, but is about 2 seconds longer than the freeze action 3 effect, and an effect is added that further emphasizes that the RT2 period is the maximum of 150 games. Furthermore, a relatively flashy sound effect is also derived.

If the result of step S3213 is negative, then in step S3215 it is determined whether or not an operation guidance command has been received from the main control device 131. If the result of step S3215 is positive, then in step S3216 the operation guidance display is set, and then this process is terminated. In this embodiment, the operation guidance display is generated when special replay A is stopped, the RT2 period is 100 or 150 games, and a reverse rotation display has been performed once. As shown in FIG. 25(f), a display prompting the user to operate the start lever 71 is generated on the display device 15. Based on the operation of the start lever 71 in the operation guidance display, a reverse rotation display occurs when the number of games is 150, and a reverse rotation display does not occur when the number of games is 100.

If the answer is negative in step S3215, then in step S3217, it is determined whether or not a freeze end command has been received from the main control device 131. If the answer is negative in step S3217, then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S3217, a freeze end effect is set in step S3218. In this embodiment, the freeze end effect is, as shown in FIG. 25(c), generated on the effect display device 15 a display indicating that the character leaves the display screen, and a display indicating that the RT state is transitioning to RT2 is regenerated. After step S3218, the freeze effect in progress flag is turned off in step S3219, and then this process is terminated.

If the result of step S3203 is negative, then in step S3220 it is determined whether or not the sudden freeze effect flag is set to on. If the result of step S3220 is negative, then this process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S3220 is positive, then in step S3221 the sudden freeze effect flag is turned off, and in step S3222 the freeze effect flag is set to on. Furthermore, in step S3223, the sudden freeze operation 1 effect is set, and then this process ends.

In this embodiment, the sudden freeze action 1 effect is derived when the special replay B, which does not win at the same time as the special replay A, is stopped (wins) and the freeze game (freeze effect) starts without the guide game effect. Regarding the reel unit 41 at this time, for example, the state in which the special replay B (the activated line in the upper row) is derived as shown in the lower part of FIG. 26(l) is swung up and down as shown in the lower part of FIG. 26(h). Furthermore, the sudden freeze action 1 effect is the same as the state shown in the upper part of FIG. 25(d) in the effect display device 15. In other words, since the guide game effect was not derived in the previous game, the transition to RT2 is instructed at the time the freeze game occurs, which is a welcome thing for the player, so the effect display device 15 also derives a corresponding display. The effects after the sudden freeze action 1 effect are the same as those described above.

As described above in detail, in the first embodiment, if either Special Replay A or Special Replay B is won during the RT1 period after the big bonus and the regular bonus, the game transitions to RT2. In addition, if Special Replay A is won, Special Replay B is also won (simultaneously), and if the player is unable to align Special Replay A (a combination of symbols in which white 7s are lined up on a predetermined effective line) on an effective line, Special Replay B (for example, a combination of symbols in which white 7 tenpai and watermelon or red 7s are lined up on a predetermined effective line) is aligned on an effective line. In this embodiment, three types of RT2 with different periods are provided (the number of initial games in RT2 is three patterns), and if Special Replay A (Special Replay B) is won during the lottery for the role during the RT1 period, one of RT2 of 50 games, RT2 of 100 games, and RT2 of 150 games is awarded. In this embodiment, the stop display (and pseudo stop display) of special replay A as a specific aspect is associated with the award (addition) of 50 games in the RT game, which is the game executed in RT2. In other words, the stop display of special replay A in RT1 indicates the transition to RT2 and the award of 50 RT games in RT2 (the initial number of games is at least 50).

In addition, if the special replay A is stopped and RT2 of 100 games or 150 games is won, the number of RT games that have not been taught (50 games or 100 games) will be taught in the next game or later. In this embodiment, a freeze game (pseudo game) in which reel operation different from normal reel operation is performed at the beginning of the next game, and the variable display of the pattern (main game) that teaches the result of the winning/losing lottery based on the operation of the start lever 71 (lever on) is performed following the freeze game. In the freeze game, the occurrence of reverse rotation of the reels corresponds to the addition of RT games (teaching from the untaught portion). In addition, if RT2 of 50 games is won, a freeze game will occur in the next game. In the freeze game of this embodiment, first, from a state in which the special replay A is stopped and displayed, reels 42L, 42M. The reel (special replay A) swings up and down to tease whether or not the reel 42R will rotate in the reverse direction. After that, if the RT is for 50 games, the reels 42L to 42R start rotating forward (ending the freeze game) and the game moves to the main game, and if the RT is for 100 or 150 games, the freeze game continues and the reels 42L to 42R rotate in the reverse direction. When the reels 42L to 42R have just rotated a few times in the reverse direction, the reels 42L to 42R are pseudo-stopped (the reels are made to look as if they are stopped by continuing to move slightly), and the state of the white 7s lined up is pseudo-stopped. In other words, this means that 50 games are added. After that, the reels swing up and down again, and if the RT is for 100 games, the reels 42L to 42R rotate forward and the game moves to the main game, and if the RT is for 150 games, the reels rotate in the reverse direction again and the state of the white 7s lined up is pseudo-stopped. In addition, the freeze game presentation (pseudo game presentation) of the presentation display device 15, which is performed in synchronization with the pseudo stop display, also displays a display indicating a pseudo stop display of a line of white 7s (for example, displaying three white 7 symbols in a row) and a display indicating the award (addition) of 50 games (for example, displaying +50 games).

If special replay B (a combination of white 7, red 7, and watermelon that does not have three of the same symbols lined up on a given pay line, and aiming for white 7 results in a combination of symbols that fail to hit the white 7, such as white 7, white 7, and watermelon) is won, the game will move to RT2, but the settings for freeze play, etc. are different. In this example, when special replay A is won, special replay B is also won, and special replay B can be won regardless of the position (rotation phase) of the reel when the reel is stopped (if special replay A and special replay A are won together, the reel will win except when special replay A is won). However, in this embodiment, the guidance display on the performance display device 15 does not encourage the player to aim for special replay B or show the correspondence between special replay B and RT2 (a player who does not recognize the relationship between special replay B and RT2 may simply recognize special replay B as a "miss"), and special replay B is not a specific mode associated with a specific bonus.

The sequence of play related to freeze play is as follows: first, after a big bonus, if special replay A is won in RT1 of 20 games, a guide play is derived in which the performance display device 15 displays a guide to aim for special replay A (white 7) and stop it in that winning game. Here, if all the white 7s are displayed (special replay A wins), the performance display device 15 displays a display indicating the stop of white 7s, a display indicating a transition to RT2, and a display indicating the award of 50 games as the period during which games can be played in RT2 (bonus play progress value). By performing an operation to start the next game (start lever on), the freeze play is executed as described above.

On the other hand, if special replay B is won at the same time as special replay A in RT1, and special replay B wins in the guide game instead of special replay A, the effect display device 15 will display a display indicating that something good has happened to the player, even though the white 7 is not displayed as stopped (a V-shaped display: the value of the winning is the same as special replay A, but since the white 7s are not lined up, a display indicating that the white 7s have been stopped and displayed is inappropriate and will be refrained from), a display indicating a transition to RT2, and a display indicating the award of 50 games as the period of RT2. Note that in this example, this effect display is performed as a reversal achievement effect two seconds after the third stop of the guide game.

Furthermore, even if the special replay B is stopped, the freeze game will start from the state where the special replay B is stopped by performing an operation to start the next game (start lever on). Here, if the number of RT games is 50 games, the reels will rotate forward after rocking, and the game will move to the main game, just like when the number of RT games is 50 games of special replay A. In addition, in a freeze game that starts with the special replay B stopped and displayed, the maximum number of reverse rotations is one, regardless of whether the number of RTs is 100 or 150. In addition, after the reverse rotation, the symbol that is pseudo-stopped and displayed is the same special replay B as before the reverse rotation, and in the freeze game performance of the performance display device 15 that is performed in synchronization with the freeze game, a display (V-shaped display) indicating that something good has happened to the player and a display indicating the addition (addition) of the number of games not yet taught (+50 games if the number of RTs of RT2 is 100, and +100 games if the number of RTs is 150) are displayed.

That is, if special replay A (a line of white 7s), which is actively associated with "a transition to RT2 when lined up" in the display of the performance display device 15 during the guide game, is won, special replay B is also won, so even if special replay A cannot be displayed (a win) due to a mistake in pressing the buttons, special replay B will be displayed (a win) and the game will transition to RT2. Here, to create excitement about the start of RT2 with a performance, a freeze game (pseudo game) is played on the reel unit 41, but it is thought that the player's impression of the freeze game, etc. will be different when special replay A is displayed and when special replay A is not derived during the freeze game. In other words, if the symbol guided in the guide game can be stopped and a relatively beautiful special replay A (line of white 7s) is derived, and if the symbol guided in the guide game cannot be stopped and it is difficult to obtain RT2 based on the stopping pattern of the symbol alone (this cannot be understood by a player who does not have knowledge of the slot machine 10), and an appearance that is not beautiful (white 7s are not lined up) is derived, it is thought that there is a big difference in the state of mind, even just in terms of whether or not the player is excited with the certainty of receiving RT2.

Furthermore, with regard to the freeze game effect of the effect display device 15 that is performed in response to a freeze game, if, for example, a common pattern occurs both when special replay A is derived (stopped display) at the start of a freeze game and when special replay A is not derived at the start of a freeze game, even though special replay A (a line of white 7s) has not been derived, the same freeze game effect (displaying white 7s on the effect display device 15) as when special replay A has been derived may be performed, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable with the freeze game effect, and ultimately with the freeze game, etc.

In addition, when a freeze game is started in a state where special replay B (for example, the appearance of a missing white 7) is displayed on the reel unit 41 due to a mistake in pressing the button, it is also possible to pseudo-display special replay A (a set of white 7s) after the reel is rotated in reverse, as if to recover from the mistake in pressing the button. However, in this case, in order to pseudo-display special replay A (a set of white 7s) after the reel is rotated in reverse, the reel on which the symbol matching special replay A (white 7) is displayed and the reel on which the symbol deviating from special replay A (white 7) is displayed must be driven differently during the reverse rotation of the reel, and further, a process must be performed to align the symbol matching special replay A (white 7) (all reels display white 7s on a predetermined pay line at the same timing) to pseudo-display the symbol, which may complicate the process and may cause processing lags.

In this regard, in this embodiment, the freeze game presentation is different when special replay A (white 7s) is derived from when special replay A (white 7s) is not derived. That is, when special replay A (white 7s) is derived at the start of the freeze game and the RT2 period is 100 games or more, special replay A (white 7s) is pseudo-stopped in the freeze game, and at that time, the presentation display device 15 displays, as a freeze game presentation, a display indicating that special replay A (white 7s) has been derived and a display indicating that an additional 50 games will be added to the RT2 period. This makes it possible to strengthen the correspondence between special replay A (white 7s) of the reel unit 41 and the 50-game extension (addition) of the RT2 period.

On the other hand, for example, if special replay B has been derived at the start of the freeze game but special replay A (white 7s lined up) has not been derived and the RT2 period is 100 games or more, special replay B (for example, the appearance of a missing white 7) is pseudo-stopped in the freeze game. In that case, the effect display device 15 displays, as a freeze game effect, an indication that an additional 50 games will be added to the RT2 period without indicating that special replay A (white 7s lined up) has been derived, thereby preventing the association between special replay A (white 7s lined up) of the reel unit 41 and RT2 from becoming weaker.

Furthermore, for example, in a freeze game presentation when Special Replay A (line of white 7s) has not been derived, it is possible to show a presentation (reversal achievement presentation) different from that when Special Replay A (line of white 7s) has been derived, such as a reversal resulting in RT2 being awarded, and it is possible to provide a presentation that matches the player's state of mind. As a result, it is possible to improve the presentation and gameplay.

In addition, in this embodiment, in which three reels are operated and the symbols constituting special replay A etc. are mechanically displayed in a variable manner, the behavior of each reel in freeze game (operation control and processing related to reel unit 41) is exactly the same whether special replay A (line of white 7s) is displayed as stopped or not when freeze game starts. Therefore, it is possible to simplify control, etc., compared to a configuration in which the behavior of reel unit 41 in a freeze game started from a state in which special replay B (for example, the appearance of a missing white 7) is displayed as stopped and then completely matched halfway through to the behavior of reel unit 41 in a freeze game started from a state in which special replay A (line of white 7s) is displayed as stopped and then forcibly using complex processing.

In addition, whether or not special replay A (7s in white) is displayed when a freeze game is started depends on whether or not the player was able to operate stop switches 72, 73, and 74 to display special replay A (7s in white) in the game preceding that game in which special replay A (7s in white) could be displayed. For this reason, it is quite possible that a combination of symbols other than "7s in white" is displayed when a freeze game is started, and there are generally not just one pattern, but multiple patterns of combinations of symbols other than "7s in white". Therefore, in this configuration, for example, it is not necessary to control the behavior of the reel symbols in a freeze game started from a state in which special replay B is displayed, to completely match the behavior of the reel symbols in a freeze game started from a state in which the white 7s are displayed, and this further reduces the complexity of the control. In addition, in this embodiment, the freeze game is performed using a reel unit 41 that drives three reels. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the freeze game is performed in a simulated display, such as a liquid crystal display device, it is difficult to control the matching of the symbols on the three reels while the symbols are rotating, and the effect of suppressing the complexity of the control is more pronounced.

Furthermore, although the control of the performance display device 15 is performed by the sub-control device 111 and the display control device 112, and the control of the reel unit 41 is performed by the main control device 131, the burden on the main control device 131 can be reduced by suppressing the complexity of the control related to the freeze game as described above. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the main control device 131 executes important processes such as the winning/losing lottery by the main control device 131 when the freeze game is performed (reducing the processing burden during the corresponding period and avoiding adverse effects on controls other than the freeze game).

Furthermore, in games where special replay A (line of white 7s) can be displayed, a guide game is generated to guide the player to aim for the "white 7" symbols on the reels that correspond to RT2 to display them, so that the timing to display special replay A (line of white 7s) can be reliably communicated to the player. Even if a guide game is generated and the stop switch is operated, if the operation is not timed correctly, the "line of white 7s" may not be displayed, so the original enjoyment of a slot machine with a stop switch, in which the player aims for the "white 7" to display it, can be maintained.

In addition, with regard to the guidance game performance performed by the performance display device 15 etc. in response to the guidance game, when special replay A (white 7s) is displayed in the guidance game, a performance (displaying white 7s) is performed to inform the player that the white 7s have been displayed in a stopped state, and when special replay B is displayed in the guidance game, a performance to inform the player that the 7s have been displayed in a stopped state is not performed (a V shape is displayed as a reversal achievement performance after a failure performance). This makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of discomfort (worrying that a bug has occurred, etc.) caused by deriving a guidance game performance corresponding to the special replay A (white 7s) being displayed in a stopped state even though special replay A (white 7s) has not been displayed in a stopped state, even though RT2 has been won. In addition, for example, a performance in which the mission in the guidance game performance is failed at least once can be derived, thereby improving the performance, etc.

In addition, even in situations where the guide game presentation is not clearly visible because the stop switch is operated as quickly as possible in the guide game, a freeze game is played in which the presentation cannot be skipped by operating the start lever 71 of the next game, so it is possible to reliably inform the player that RT2 has been won in the freeze game. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the opportunity to inform the player that RT2 has been won is lost, and the details of RT2 can be reliably conveyed to the player.

In addition, the guide game is also triggered when a fake replay is won that does not transition to RT2. This makes it possible to avoid simple gameplay in which a freeze game is always triggered when a guide game is triggered, and thus transitioning to RT2, thereby improving the gameplay of the guide game.

In addition, the guide play is only performed when Special Replay A is won (when Special Replay B is won at the same time) and when Fake Replay is won. Therefore, even if RT2 is not won, it is possible to derive a form similar to Special Replay A in the guide play (pulling the white 7 into the pay line with the first and second stops). In other words, even when a fake replay wins, it is possible to stop and display the white 7 until it is in a ready state. Therefore, in the guide play, you can play in the hope of stopping and displaying a line of white 7s until the last reel to be stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, in both the special replay B mode and the fake replay mode, if the stopping operation is performed at a time when the white 7 is stopped and displayed on the active line, it may result in a white 7 miss mode (if the third stop in special replay B is the right reel 42R, the white 7 will be in the middle of the left and middle reels, and the white 7 will be on the top or bottom of the right reel frame. If the third stop in special replay B is the middle reel 42M, the white 7 will be in the middle of the left and right reels, and the white 7 will be on the top or bottom of the middle ... If the third stop is on the left reel 42L, a white 7 is placed in the middle of the middle and right reels, and a white 7 is placed on the top or bottom of the left reel frame. If the third stop is on the right reel 42R in a fake replay, a white 7 is placed in the middle of the left and middle reels, and a white 7 is placed on the top or bottom of the right reel frame. If the third stop is on the middle reel 42M in a fake replay, a white 7 is placed in the middle of the left and right reels, and a white 7 is placed on the top or bottom of the middle reel. If the third stop is on the left reel 42L in a fake replay, a white 7 is placed in the middle of the middle and right reels, and a white 7 is placed on the top or bottom of the left reel frame. ). For this reason, a player who knows that a freeze game may occur even if the white 7s are not lined up in a guide game aiming for a white 7 (when a special replay B is won), can operate the start lever 71 with the expectation that a freeze game may occur in the next game even if a fake replay is won, and the gameplay can be improved.

Fake replay is also a replay role, and allows you to coordinate the operations to start the next game in the guide play, making the game progress relatively smooth. Furthermore, it can create a situation where you can look forward to the occurrence of a freeze play in the next game.

In addition, the behavior at the start of a game in which a fake replay is won (until the third stop) is the same as the behavior at the start of a game in which a special replay A or B is won (until the third stop), allowing the player to proceed with the guided play without knowing in advance whether or not they have won RT2.

In addition, if special replay B, which is not won at the same time as special replay A, is won, no guide play is derived in the game, and no instruction such as a "V" indicating a transition to RT2 is given until the freeze game starts. For this reason, a pattern can be added in which a freeze game (sudden freeze game) starts suddenly without a guide game (a freeze game starts suddenly without the player noticing the opportunity to transition to the RT2 state), improving the playability of the freeze game. However, the freeze game presentation corresponds to a situation in which the grant of RT2 is taught just by the start of the freeze game (a presentation instructing a transition to RT2 in the swinging state of pseudo game operation 1), eliminating any sense of incongruity and allowing the game to proceed relatively smoothly. In addition, even with special replay B, the presentation can be improved by making the presentation different between when it overlaps with special replay A (simultaneous win) and when it does not overlap (single win). Furthermore, when transitioning to RT2, even if special replay A (7 whites) is not displayed, the effect display device 15 will display a "V" as an auxiliary special mode to teach the transition to RT2. This allows the player to be sure that RT2 will be granted.

In addition, in freeze games with an RT2 period of 100 games or more, a pseudo stop display is performed to pseudo-stop the changing display of the symbols. This further increases attention to the freeze game. By eliminating the sense of incongruity between the appearance of the symbols at the start of a freeze game (pseudo stop game) in which such a notable pseudo stop display is performed and the correspondence between the freeze game presentation, the effect of improving presentation and playability is more pronounced. In particular, in a configuration in which the appearance of the symbols at the start of a freeze game is maintained for a predetermined period (this is maintained when all white 7s are lined up, but also when no white 7s are lined up), or in which a behavior in which the symbols move back and forth for a predetermined period is derived based on the appearance of the symbols at the start of a freeze game, this effect is even more pronounced.

Furthermore, if the number of games in RT2 is 150, a pseudo stop game (reverse rotation + pseudo stop display) will occur twice in a freeze game that is started with a line of white 7s. This makes it possible to derive an exhilarating effect in multiple stages, in which the content of the RT2 state given to the player steps up to become more advantageous for the player (the number of games in a certain chunk gradually increases). Furthermore, the effect display device 15 derives a display of the number of added games corresponding to the current pseudo stop display and a display of the total number of added games (accumulation display means), so the situation in the freeze game can be grasped reliably.

In addition, at the timing when the second pseudo stop game will occur, the player is prompted to operate the start lever 71 (pseudo start operation input), and this operation triggers reverse rotation if successful, or a return to forward rotation if unsuccessful. Therefore, the player is asked to participate in the freeze game by operating the start lever 71, which can improve the player's motivation to play.

In addition, by dividing the number of games in the granted RT2 into multiple parts (for example, dividing 50 games into 20 games and 30 games) and making it possible to give instructions or suggestions, the variety of such instructions or suggestions can be increased, and it is possible to derive a relatively long and dramatic presentation that informs the player of already determined content, as described above. In particular, by providing a freeze game, it is possible to reliably give instructions and suggestions regarding RT2 in the freeze game, separate from the variable display of patterns that follows the freeze game (main game). As a result, it is possible to improve the presentation, and ultimately to increase interest, etc.

When RT2 (bonus state) starts, whether the state of the reel unit 41 at the start of RT2 is special replay A or special replay B, freeze play is executed and the start of the game (variable display of the symbols that are identification information; reel variation) is awaited. This prevents a situation in which the variable display of the identification information can be consumed more quickly when special replay B is stopped at the start of RT2 than when special replay A is stopped. In other words, it prevents a situation in which a player who prioritizes time efficiency selects the stopped display of special replay B just for the sake of time efficiency, and allows the player to enjoy the series of effects leading to special replay A without any worries.

In the first embodiment, the length of the freeze game instructing the same content is the same when the special replay A is stopped and when the special replay B is stopped when the pseudo game starts, or is shorter when the special replay B is stopped (in the case of 150 games, the performance with the operation guide display; the start of the second reverse rotation is omitted), but it may be configured to be longer when the special replay B is stopped. In this case, it is preferable that the special replay A is stopped from the viewpoint of time efficiency, and the player can be genuinely happy that the special replay A has been derived. In addition, the freeze game when the special replay B is stopped and displayed may be configured to be longer than the freeze game when the special replay A is stopped and displayed by including a reversal (resurrection) performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the symbols are displayed as still images at the start of the game (specific variable display) in which the freeze game is executed. Furthermore, if RT2 is won, the freeze game will be executed even if a symbol (special replay B) different from special replay A (white 7s) is displayed as still images at the start of the specific variable display. Therefore, the player's mood can be lifted at the start of the game (variable display of symbols), which is the timing when the freeze game may be executed, and the player operates the start lever 71 with all his heart (feelings). As a result, the game playability can be improved. In addition, at the stage where the specific variable display is started, that is, at the start stage of the freeze game (pseudo game), the variable display of symbols (main game) has not yet been performed (the role selection is completed when the start lever 71 is operated). For this reason, in a configuration in which the trigger for starting the variable display of the patterns is based on a specified operation by the player (operation of the start lever 71), it is possible to allow sufficient time before the variable display starts, which may result in a frozen game (even if the player leaves their seat to go to the toilet or get a drink, there is no need to worry that the game will continue on its own), improving convenience for the player.

Furthermore, in a freeze game presentation corresponding to a freeze game (a specific variable display in which a freeze game is performed) started with special replay A (a line of white sevens) displayed frozen, a presentation indicating the frozen display of special replay A (a line of white sevens) and a presentation indicating the granting of RT2 (transition to RT2) are derived, and in a freeze game presentation corresponding to a freeze game (a specific variable display in which a freeze game is performed) started with a combination of symbols (special replay B) different from that of special replay A (a line of white sevens) displayed frozen, a presentation (a V-shaped display) different from the presentation indicating the frozen display of special replay A (a line of white sevens) and a presentation indicating the granting of RT2 are derived. For this reason, in a freeze game presentation corresponding to a freeze game that is started with special replay A (line of white 7s) stopped, the player feels that special replay A (line of white 7s) has stopped, creating more excitement, and an announcement that RT2 will be given is given, and in a freeze game presentation corresponding to a freeze game that is started with special replay A (line of white 7s) not stopped, the presentation in which special replay A (line of white 7s) is stopped is stopped because special replay A (line of white 7s) is not stopped (an announcement is given that something good will happen), and an announcement is given that RT2 will be given, etc. In other words, presentations that do not match the corresponding relationship can be avoided, and the presentation necessary for the progress of the game can be left.

In addition, in a game in which special replay A wins, the first freeze game flag is set to ON, and in a game in which special replay B wins, the second freeze game flag is set to ON, and the first freeze game flag and the second freeze game flag are maintained until the setting of the next game. Therefore, at the start of a specific game (when the start lever 71 is operated to start the game), it is possible to know whether or not special replay A (white 7s) was stopped and displayed in the previous game by checking the first freeze game flag. Therefore, it is relatively easy to derive consecutive effects that are related to each other with a timing in which a white 7 (specific pattern) can be derived on the reel unit 41, and it is possible to reliably avoid a situation in which a display that makes it seem as if a specific pattern has been derived is derived even though the specific pattern has not been derived, giving the player a sense of incongruity. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance, etc.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the result of the role selection (win/lose selection) is indicated by the stopping mode of the symbols on the reel unit 41, the stopping mode of the symbols on the reel unit 41 is checked to confirm whether the variable display of the symbols is stopped normally. Here, the information on whether the symbol stopping mode is a special replay A (7 whites lined up) or not is stored in the first freeze game flag (storage means) and the memory is retained until the setting of the next variable display (game). This makes it possible to avoid a new process of checking the phase of the reels of the reel unit 41 when setting the next variable display, and to relatively easily (by simply checking the storage means) to know whether the variable display of the symbols (game) will start with the special replay A (7 whites lined up) stopped. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when setting the variable display (game) in which the freeze game is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the variable display (guidance game) in which special replay A (white 7s) can be stopped and displayed, special replay A and special replay B (missing white 7s, etc.) can be stopped and displayed, and if special replay A is not stopped and displayed, special replay B is stopped and displayed, and whether special replay A or special replay B is stopped and displayed, the game transitions to RT2. Therefore, in the case where special replay A (white 7s) is stopped and displayed (a prize is won) and the case where special replay B (missing white 7s, etc.) is stopped and displayed (a prize is won), RT2 (a specific benefit) is awarded in both cases, but the freeze game and the freeze game presentation can be reliably different. In other words, in a variable display where special replay A (line of white 7s) can be stopped and displayed, if special replay A cannot be stopped and displayed due to an error in the stop operation, a situation in which RT2 is not awarded can be avoided, while also avoiding a situation in which the balance of the arrangement of multiple patterns becomes poor when the arrangement of the "white 7" pattern is increased so that special replay A (line of white 7s) can be stopped and displayed regardless of when the stop switch is operated, and it is possible to reliably distinguish and grasp whether special replay A has been stopped and displayed.

The bonuses awarded based on the stopped display are the same (excluding the effects) when Special Replay A (all white 7s) is displayed as when Special Replay B (missing white 7s, etc.) is displayed. In other words, both are replay roles, and there is no advantage to having either of them displayed. This makes it possible to avoid situations where beginners or other players incur losses because they are unable to stop the white 7s properly.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the information that the power supply is cut off is stored at the start (operation of the start lever 71) of the variable display (specific variable display) in which the freeze game is performed, and when the information that the front door 12 is in the open state is stored, the freeze game mode and the freeze game presentation mode are configured to be different from the freeze game presentation mode corresponding to the freeze game in the case where the stop mode of the symbols at the start of the specific variable display is special replay A (white 7s lined up) (freeze game presentation corresponding to the freeze game corresponding to the stop display of special replay B, i.e., a presentation displaying a V). In other words, if the power supply is cut off (power outage, etc.) or the front door 12 is opened between the specific variable display and the previous variable display (variable display in which the guide game is performed), the slot machine 10 cannot grasp the operation performed on itself during that time, and in some cases, the stop mode of the symbols on the reels of the reel unit 41 may have changed. For this reason, even if memory information indicating the stop mode of the variable display before the specific variable display remains (even if the first freeze game flag is on), it is not certain whether the memory information is accurate. In this regard, by making the freeze game and freeze game presentation different in mode from the freeze game presentation corresponding to the specific variable display started in a situation where special replay A (line of white 7s) is stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a freeze game presentation corresponding to the stopped display of special replay A (line of white 7s) is derived even though special replay A (line of white 7s) is not stopped and displayed.

In addition, when a freeze game starts, there is no need to set up a process to determine the stopping state of the patterns at the start of a specific variable display just to know when a power outage has occurred or when the front door 12 has been opened, which prevents the process from becoming too complicated.

Furthermore, in freeze play, the operation of the three reels of the reel unit 41 is synchronized. In other words, the start timing, rotation speed (acceleration), and stop timing are the same. This simplifies control. In particular, if a momentary power outage occurs during freeze play, the misalignment between the reels can be almost eliminated, and even if the reels are restarted without taking the misalignment into account, no adjustment or only minor adjustment is required.

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment will be described below. In the second embodiment, a push order role is provided that allows a player to win by correctly operating the stop switches 72, 73, and 74 (operating them in the same order as the set operation order), and an assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") is provided that teaches the push order for the push order role. Since the basic configuration of the slot machine 10 is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description will be omitted and the same component names and component numbers will be used for the description. Also, the numerical values of various settings described later can be changed appropriately for each model.

The role configurations of the second embodiment include cherries, watermelons, common bells, push order bells (six types, 1st to 6th), replays (two types, A and B), push order replays (two types, A and B), fake replays, and misses. Through role selection, for example, cherries and watermelons have a combined chance of 1/64 to win, common bells (bells that don't matter what order you press) have a chance of 1/64 to win, push order bells (total of 1st to 6th) have a chance of 24/64 to win, replays (total of A and B) have a chance of 25/64 to win, fake replays (for example, a combination of replay, bell, and replay) have a chance of 5/64 to win, and misses have a chance of 8/64 to win. Replay A and replay B overlap (win simultaneously) with each other.

Furthermore, Push Order Replay A and B will win (overlap) at the same time as Replay A and B. However, the probability of winning Push Order Replay A (line of white 7s in this example) is 16/64, and the probability of winning Push Order Replay B (line of red 7s in this example) is 1/64, so Replay A and B may not overlap with Push Order Replay A and B. The number of medals paid out (awarded) when a minor win is achieved is, for example, two cherries (four if there are two active lines), five watermelons, and nine common bells and push order bells. With fake replay, no matter what order the stop switches are operated in, it is possible to get white 7s and red 7s to a ready state, but it is impossible to get three of them together.

When the third stop is on the right reel 42R, the fake replay is controlled to line up on the top line, when the third stop is on the middle reel 42M, the fake replay is controlled to line up on the line that falls to the right, and when the third stop is on the left reel 42L, the fake replay is controlled to line up on the bottom line. That is, first, when the stop operation is performed when the white 7 is displayed on the left reel, a replay is displayed on the top of the left reel and the white 7 is displayed on the middle of the left reel, then, when the stop operation is performed when the white 7 is displayed on the middle reel, a bell is displayed on the top of the middle reel and the white 7 is displayed on the middle of the middle reel, and finally, when the stop operation is performed when the white 7 is displayed on the right reel, a replay is displayed on the top of the right reel and the white 7 is displayed on the top or bottom of the right reel frame. Also, for example, first, when the white 7 is displayed on the left reel, a replay appears on the top of the left reel and the white 7 appears on the middle of the left reel. Next, when the white 7 is displayed on the right reel, a replay appears on the bottom of the right reel and the white 7 appears on the middle of the right reel. Finally, when the white 7 is displayed on the middle reel, a bell appears on the middle reel and the white 7 appears on the bottom of the middle reel. That is, when the "white 7" is aimed at the effective line, it is possible to make a ready on the center line (there are also patterns where it is not possible to make a ready depending on the pressing order (so-called "2 sure" patterns)), but it is not possible to make a "white 7 alignment" (fake replays are aligned behind it). Furthermore, the vicinity of the red 7 symbol is configured (arranged) in the same way as the vicinity of the white 7 symbol, and when a fake replay is established, it is possible to make a ready red 7, but it is controlled so that three red 7s cannot be aligned.

In this embodiment, the game states include a normal game state in which the push order is not instructed, an AT state in which the push order of the push order bell is instructed, and a specific AT state in which the push order of both the push order bell and the push order replay are instructed. In addition, the main control device 131 (RAM 153) is provided with a game state counter that indicates the game state, and is set to "0" in the normal game state, "1" in the AT state, and "2" in the specific AT state. In this embodiment, even if the game state is changed, the probability of winning a role, including a replay, is not changed. Furthermore, by inserting and operating the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 124 by the hall manager or the like, it is possible to set multiple stages that differ in the probability of transition to the AT state, but even if the setting is changed, the probability of winning a role, including a replay, is not changed. It is also possible to configure the winning probability of a role to be different depending on the change in the game state or the setting change. In this case, it is possible to make a setting determination based on the winning probability of a role.

In this embodiment, the gameplay aims to transition from the normal gaming state to an AT state where the player can expect to increase the number of medals in their possession, and ultimately to maintain the AT state for a long period of time. To transition from the normal gaming state to the AT state, it is necessary to win the AT transition lottery that is held when a small winning combination such as watermelon or cherry is won (it is not necessary to win), or to play a set number of games in the normal gaming state (reach the ceiling number of games).

In addition, the normal game state includes a normal probability state in which the AT transition lottery is performed under a predetermined condition, and a high probability state in which the AT transition lottery is performed under more favorable conditions for the player. In the normal probability state, the AT transition lottery is won in about 1% to 3% (setting 1 to setting 6) when a watermelon is won, and 1% when a cherry is won. When the AT transition lottery is won, the number of AT precursor games (AT precursor game number), which is the period until the transition to the AT state, is determined. For example, the value of the AT lottery random number counter is obtained, and the AT lottery table is referenced to determine the number of AT precursor games to be one of 8 to 18 games. When the number of AT precursor games is determined, a value corresponding to the AT precursor game number counter indicating the number of AT precursor games is set. In addition, in this embodiment, when the AT lottery is won directly when a watermelon or cherry is won, 50 games are awarded as the initial number of games in the AT state at a rate of about 95%, 100 games are awarded at a rate of about 4%, and 150 games are awarded at a rate of about 1%. When the initial number of games in the AT state is determined, a value corresponding to the AT game number counter, which acts as a remaining amount storage means indicating the number of games remaining in the AT state, is set.

In addition to the AT game number counter, this embodiment also includes an untaught game number counter as an untaught amount storage means for storing the untaught amount of the remaining number of games in the AT state, and a taught game number counter as a taught amount storage means for storing the taught amount of the remaining number of games in the AT state. When the initial number of games in the AT state is determined, a value corresponding to the initial number of games in the AT state is set not only in the AT game number counter but also in the untaught game number counter.

Furthermore, an AT precursor flag is provided which is set to ON when the AT precursor starts (when the AT transition lottery is won) and is turned OFF when the value of the AT precursor game number counter is set to "0", and when a game starts with the AT precursor flag in the ON state, the value of the AT precursor game number counter is decremented by 1. In addition, the game state counter is set to "1" when the AT precursor flag is turned OFF, and is set to "0" when the value of the AT game number counter is set to "0".

The AT game number counter and the taught game number counter are counters that are decremented by one each time a game is played in the AT state, and even if the AT game number counter and the taught game number counter are set to a value other than "0", they are not decremented in the AT precursor. Furthermore, when the game ends while the game state counter is in the "1" state, the values of the AT game number counter and the taught game number counter are decremented by one. Incidentally, the value of the AT game number counter is determined by adding the value of the untaught game number counter and the value of the taught game number counter.

In addition, to transition from the normal probability state to the high probability state (the period during which the normal game state is considered to be a high probability state is also called the chance zone), it is necessary to win the high probability transition lottery that is held when a watermelon, cherry, or common bell is won. In this example, the high probability transition lottery is won 20% to 25% (settings 1 to 6) when a watermelon is won (and the AT transition lottery is missed), 25% to 33% (settings 1 to 6) when a cherry is won (and the AT transition lottery is missed), and 3% to 5% (settings 1 to 6) when a common bell is won (and the AT transition lottery is missed). In this embodiment, the chance zone has a pattern of up to 10 games, a pattern of up to 20 games, and a pattern of up to 30 games. When the chance zone is won with watermelon, 10 games are selected with about 70%, 20 games with about 25%, and 30 games with about 5%. When the chance zone is won with cherry and common bell, 10 games are selected with about 99% and 30 games with about 1%. When the number of games in the chance zone is determined, a value corresponding to the chance zone counter indicating the remaining period (number of games) of the chance zone is set. In addition, when the high probability transition lottery is won, the number of games of high probability premonition (number of high probability premonition games), which is the period until transition to the chance zone, is set (8 to 16 games in this example). When the number of high probability premonition games is determined, a value corresponding to the high probability premonition game number counter indicating the number of high probability premonition games is set.

When the value of the high probability premonition game number counter is other than "0", the value of the high probability premonition game number counter is decremented by one each time a game is played. In other words, a high probability premonition flag is provided which is set to ON when the high probability premonition starts (when the high probability transition lottery is won) and is turned OFF when the value of the high probability premonition game number counter is set to "0", and when a game starts with the high probability premonition flag in the ON state, the value of the high probability premonition game number counter is decremented by one.

In addition, when the AT state is switched to the normal game state, the value of the ceiling game number determination random number counter is obtained, and a ceiling game number lottery is performed to determine the ceiling game number by referring to the ceiling game number table (for setting 1 to setting 6). For example, a first ceiling game number table in which 250 to 265 games are selected as the ceiling game number at about 20% of the time, 500 to 520 games are selected as the ceiling game number at about 40% of the time, and 750 to 777 games are selected as the ceiling game number at about 40% of the time, a second ceiling game number table in which 250 to 265 games are selected as the ceiling game number at about 50% of the time, and 500 to 520 games are selected as the ceiling game number at about 50% of the time, and a third ceiling game number table in which 100 to 120 games are selected as the ceiling game number at about 40% of the time, and 250 to 265 games are selected as the ceiling game number at about 60% of the time may be provided, and it may be determined which ceiling game number table is to be referred to when the ceiling game number lottery is performed. When the ceiling game number is determined, a value corresponding to the ceiling game number counter indicating the period (number of games) until the ceiling game number is set. In addition, when the ceiling number of games is to be selected, the ceiling number of games table is not always determined at the same rate. Instead, there is a first mode in which the first ceiling number of games table is more likely to be selected and the third ceiling number of games table is not selected, a second mode in which the second ceiling number of games table is more likely to be selected, and a third mode in which only the third ceiling number of games table is selected. When the ceiling number of games is to be selected, if the previous mode was the first mode, the current mode will be the first mode with about 50% probability, and the second mode with about 50% probability; if the previous mode was the second mode, the second mode with about 70% probability, and the third mode with about 30% probability; if the previous mode was the third mode, the third mode with about 30% probability, the first mode with about 60% probability, and the second mode with about 10% probability.

When the ceiling game number is reached (the value of the ceiling game number counter becomes "0"), the number of AT precursor games (here, 8 to 18 games) is determined. As described above, when the number of AT precursor games is determined, a value corresponding to the AT precursor game number counter is set. The ceiling game number counter is a counter that is decremented by one each time a game is played in the normal game state. In other words, the game state counter is set to "0" when the normal game state starts (when the value of the AT game number counter is set to "0") and is set to "1" when the value of the ceiling game number counter is set to "0", and when a game is started in the "0" state, the value of the ceiling game number counter is decremented by one.

In the chance zone (high probability state in normal game mode), the AT transition lottery is won in about 33% of cases when a watermelon is won, about 50% of cases when a cherry is won, about 20% of cases when a common bell is won, about 50% of cases when a push order bell is won, and about 5% of cases when a push order bell is won but not won. If the value of the chance zone counter is other than "0", the value of the chance zone counter is decremented by one each time a game is played. In other words, a chance zone mid-flag is provided which is set to on at the start of the chance zone (when the value of the high probability premonition counter becomes "0" and the high probability premonition flag is turned off) and is turned off at the end of the chance zone (when the value of the chance zone counter is set to "0" or when the AT transition lottery is won), and when a game is started with the chance zone mid-flag on, the value of the chance zone counter is decremented by one.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the AT transition lottery is won in the chance zone, the next game is transitioned to the AT state without the intervention of an AT precursor. That is, the chance zone flag is turned off, and the value of the game state counter is set to "1". Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the AT state is won in the chance zone, 50 games are awarded in about 90%, 100 games in about 8%, 150 games in about 1%, and 200 games in about 1%, regardless of the winning role. When the initial number of games in the AT state is determined, a value corresponding to the AT game number counter is set. As a modified example, even if the AT transition lottery is won in the chance zone, the AT state may be transitioned to after the intervention of an AT precursor. Also, when push order replays A and B are won in the chance zone, the push order for push order replays A and B (which may be all or part, or may be configured so that there are all patterns and some patterns) may be instructed, and if the push order is correct (if push order replays A and B are won), the system may be configured to transition to the AT state. Alternatively, the system may be configured to instruct that the push order replay has been established, and transition to the AT state if the correct answer is given.

In the AT precursor, a lottery is held to determine how many games will be added to the AT state (AT game number). In this example, when a watermelon is won, there is a roughly 50% chance of winning 50 additional games, when a cherry is won, there is a roughly 80% chance of winning 30 additional games, when a common bell is won, there is a roughly 80% chance of winning 10 additional games, when a push order bell is won, there is a roughly 25% chance of winning 10 additional games, when a miss is won, there is a roughly 50% chance of winning 10 additional games, and when Replay A or B is won, there is a roughly 20% chance of winning 10 additional games. When an AT game number is won, the corresponding values are added to the AT game number counter and the uninstructed game number counter.

However, the fact that the additional lottery has been won in the AT precursor is not indicated in the AT precursor (although it may be indicated in this example), but is instead indicated or suggested in the AT start freeze game executed at the start of the AT state, which will be described in detail later. In addition, in this embodiment, when the AT is won in the chance zone, there is no AT precursor (the AT state starts in the next game), whereas when the AT lottery is won when a watermelon or cherry is won in the normal probability state (other than the chance zone) of the normal game state, or when the ceiling number of games is reached, the AT precursor is set to 8 to 18 games (the AT win is indicated before the final game, and the AT state starts from the game after the final game), and during this time, the number of games in the AT state is likely to be increased, and although a relatively small number of games is likely to be selected as the initial number of games, taking into account the increase in the AT precursor period, the number of remaining games in the AT state at the start of the AT is likely to be relatively large.

In the high probability premonition, a lottery is held to add (promote) the number of games in the chance zone. In this embodiment, if the 10-game chance zone is won, there is a 5% chance of winning a watermelon and a 5% chance of winning a cherry, and if the 20-game chance zone is won, there is a 1% chance of winning a watermelon and a 1% chance of winning a cherry, and if the 20-game chance zone is won, there is a 1% chance of winning a watermelon and a 1% chance of winning a cherry, and if the 30-game chance zone is won, there is a 1% chance of winning a watermelon and a 1% chance of winning a cherry, and the AT state is won (in this case, the AT premonition is 0 games, and the initial number of games is allocated the same as when the AT state is won in the chance zone).

Even if there is a high probability premonition, an AT transition lottery is held, and if the AT transition lottery is won, the game will move to the AT premonition (the high probability premonition flag will be turned off), and if the AT transition lottery is not won, an additional chance zone lottery is held.

In addition, as a modified example, the right to transition to the chance zone can be reserved and stored multiple times (in this modified example, this is handled by providing multiple high-probability premonition flags, but a counter can be provided instead), and instead of a lottery to add (promote) the number of games in the chance zone being played in the high-probability premonition, if the AT transition lottery is not won, a high-probability transition lottery is held, and if the high-probability transition lottery is won, the high-probability premonition continues and another high-probability premonition flag is set on (for example, when the chance zone expires and ends and the corresponding high-probability premonition flag is turned off, if the on high-probability premonition flag remains, a transition to the high-probability premonition (after a specified number of games) occurs).

In addition, when a watermelon or cherry is won in the normal probability state of the normal game state, whether or not the AT state or the chance zone (high probability state) is won, the player transitions to a premonition effect state in which there may be a transition to the AT state or the chance zone. For this reason, even if the player is in the AT premonition (main AT premonition), the player cannot be sure whether or not he or she is actually in the AT state. Furthermore, in the premonition effect state, the results of whether or not the AT transition lottery and the high probability transition lottery have been won are displayed by the final game of the AT premonition and the high probability premonition. Here, if the AT transition lottery and the high probability transition lottery have been won (main premonition effect), an effect (success effect) is derived that teaches the player that the AT state or the chance zone will be transitioned to (after an effect leading to failure, an effect leading to success may be derived). On the other hand, if the AT transition lottery and the high probability transition lottery are not won (if the effect is a fake premonition), an effect (failure effect) is generated to inform the player that they were unable to transition to the AT state or chance zone.

In addition, there may be provided a presentation that transitions to the AT state when a winning is instructed, a presentation that transitions to a chance zone (high probability state) when a winning is instructed, and a presentation in which it is unclear which state to transition to. In addition, if a watermelon or cherry is won in the normal probability state of the normal game state and the AT transition lottery and the high probability transition lottery are lost, a fake presentation lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to the premonition presentation state (fake premonition presentation), and if a fake premonition presentation is won, it may be configured so that the premonition presentation state (fake premonition presentation) is always performed even if a watermelon or cherry is won in the normal probability state of the normal game state and the AT transition lottery and the high probability transition lottery are lost, but a short number of games is likely to be selected (for example, 2 games to 18 games).

In the AT state, a lottery is held to add the (remaining) number of games in the AT state (the number of AT games), and a lottery is held to determine whether or not to move to a specific AT state (which can be said to be a high-probability state of the AT state in which the lottery to add the number of AT games in the AT state is held under more favorable conditions for the player). In this example, in the AT state, the lottery to add is won about 10% of the time when a watermelon is won, and about 50% of the time when a cherry is won, and in the case of an add-on win triggered by a watermelon, 30 games are added in about 90% of the time, and 50 games are added in about 10% of the time, and in the case of an add-on win triggered by a cherry, 10 games are added in about 90% of the time, 20 games are added in about 5% of the time, and 30 games are added in about 5% of the time. When the number of AT games is added in the AT state, the effect display device 15 or the like basically notifies the player that an add-on has been made (including the number of games added) in the game. In other words, if you win an addition to the number of AT games, a value corresponding to the addition is added to the AT game number counter and the uninstructed game number counter, and then when setting the number of added games to be instructed, a value corresponding to the number of added games to be instructed is subtracted from the uninstructed game number counter, and a value corresponding to the number of added games is added to the instructed game number counter.

In this embodiment, in the AT state, even if you win the push order bell, there is a 3% chance that you will win the additional lottery (if you win, there is a 100% chance that 10 games will be added). However, you will not be informed that you have won the additional lottery (a value corresponding to the addition will be added to the AT game number counter and the uninstructed game number counter).

In addition, the specific AT transition lottery is won 30% of the time when a watermelon is won (and the additional lottery is lost), 10% of the time when a cherry is won (and the additional lottery is lost), and 5% to 15% of the time when a common bell is won (setting 1 to setting 6). In this embodiment, the specific AT state is 10 games. When the specific AT transition lottery is won, the value of the game state counter is set to "2" corresponding to the specific AT state (that is, during the specific AT state, the remaining period of the AT state, that is, the value of the AT game number counter does not decrease). Furthermore, a value corresponding to "10 games" is set for the specific AT game number counter indicating the remaining period (number of games) of the specific AT state. In addition, the number of games of the specific AT precursor (here, 1 to 4 games), which is the period until the transition to the specific AT state, is set. When the number of games of the specific AT precursor is determined, a value corresponding to the specific AT precursor game number counter indicating the remaining period (number of games) of the specific AT precursor is set.

A specific AT precursor flag is provided which is set to ON at the start of the specific AT precursor period (when the specific AT transition lottery is won) and is turned OFF when the value of the specific AT precursor game number counter is set to "0". When the game is started with the specific AT precursor flag ON, the value of the specific AT precursor game number counter is decremented by 1. The specific AT game number counter is a counter which is decremented by 1 each time a game is played in the specific AT state, and is not decremented in the specific AT precursor. In other words, the game state counter is set to "2" at the start of the specific AT state (when the value of the specific AT precursor counter is "0" and the specific AT precursor flag is turned OFF) and is set to "1" when the value of the specific AT game number counter is set to "0", and when the game is started with the game state counter in the "2" state, the value of the specific AT game number counter is decremented by 1.

In the specific AT state, a lottery is held to add to the number of AT games. In the specific AT state, not only the order in which to press the push order bell, but also the order in which to press the push order replays A and B are instructed. The specific AT state is set to 10 games. Furthermore, the specific AT state is a game state different from the AT state (in the AT state, the game state counter is set to "1", and in the specific AT state, the game state counter is set to "2"), and even if a game is played in the specific AT state, the number of remaining games in the AT state is not subtracted. In an AT state that is not the specific AT state, an incorrect order is instructed for the push order replays A and B.

In this embodiment, in a specific AT state, the player wins the additional lottery 100% of the time when a watermelon is won, 100% of the time when a cherry is won, 100% of the time when a common bell is won, and 100% of the time when push order replays A and B are won. Furthermore, when a watermelon-triggered additional win occurs, 30 games are added at about 90% of the time, and 50 games are added at about 10% of the time, when a cherry-triggered additional win occurs, 10 games are added at about 50% of the time, 20 games are added at about 25% of the time, and 30 games are added at about 25% of the time, to the number of AT games, and when a common bell-triggered additional win occurs, 30 games are added at about 50% of the time, and 50 games are added at about 10% of the time. In addition, if you win an additional prize triggered by Push Order Replay A (lined up white 7s), there is about a 90% chance that 50 games will be added to the number of AT games, about a 5% chance that 100 games will be added, and about a 5% chance that 150 games will be added to the number of AT games, and if you win an additional prize triggered by Push Order Replay B (lined up red 7s), there is about a 98% chance that 100 games will be added, about a 1% chance that 200 games will be added, and about a 1% chance that 300 games will be added to the number of AT games.

In addition to the pattern in which the number of games in the AT state is added, it may be configured so that there is a pattern in which the number of games in a specific AT state is added (for example, when a red 7 is won, the number of AT games is not added, but 10 games in the specific AT state are added, i.e., one more set of the specific AT state is granted), or the number of remaining games in the specific AT state is reset (in a specific AT state of 10 games and one set, the number is subtracted from the remaining 10 games, and the set ends when the red 7s are lined up before the end of the final game, and the specific AT state is resumed from a state in which the number of remaining games has been reset to 10).

In addition, if the number of AT games is added in a specific AT state, even if the player wins an additional 50 games due to a watermelon trigger, only 30 games will be added (20 games will not be taught), even if the player wins an additional 20 or 30 games due to a cherry trigger, only 10 games will be taught, and even if the player wins an additional 20 games due to a common bell trigger, only 10 games will be taught (for example, if 50 games are added due to a watermelon trigger, a value corresponding to the addition of 50 games is added to the AT game number counter and the uninstructed game number counter, and then, when setting an additional 30 games to be taught, a value corresponding to 30 games is subtracted from the uninstructed game number counter and a value corresponding to 30 games is added to the instructed game number counter).

Moreover, as will be described in detail later, when the number of AT games is added due to the winning of Push Order Replay A and Push Order Replay B in a specific AT state, the content of the instruction (how to instruct the number of uninstructed games) differs depending on whether or not Push Order Replay A and B can be won. Furthermore, in order to win Push Order Replay A and Push Order Replay B in this embodiment, it is not only necessary to get the push order correct, but also to aim for the "white 7" and "red 7" and stop them on the valid line.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a specific AT state, there is a 25% chance that you will win the push order bell, and a 50% chance that you will win the additional lottery even if you miss the bell (if you win, there is a 100% chance that 10 games will be added). However, you will not be informed that you have won the additional lottery (a value corresponding to the addition will be added to the AT game number counter and the uninstructed game number counter).

Here, the AT start freeze processing, which is a process for executing an AT start freeze game at the start of the AT state and is a pseudo game performed in place of the freeze game processing of the reel control processing of the first embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. 27. Note that in this embodiment, when the AT precursor game number counter is set to "0" and the AT precursor flag is turned off, and when the AT transition lottery is won in the chance zone, not only is the value of the game state counter set to "1", but the start freeze flag is also set to on.

First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the start freeze flag is set to ON. If the result of step S4101 is NO, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S4101 is YES, the start freeze flag is turned OFF in step S4102. In the following step S4103, the start freeze in progress flag, which indicates that the AT start freeze game is in progress, is set to ON.

After that, in step S4104, a pseudo stop symbol setting process is performed to determine the symbol to be pseudo-stopped for the player in the AT start freeze game. Here, the value of the uninstructed game number counter is checked, and if it is less than 100 games, "white 7" is determined, if it is 100 or more games but less than 200 games, "white 7" is determined in about 90% and "red 7" in about 10%. If it is 200 games or more, "white 7" is determined in about 80% and "red 7" in about 20%. If it is determined to be "white 7", the white 7 permission flag is set to ON, and if it is determined to be "red 7", the red 7 permission flag is set to ON.

In step S4105, the first freeze operation is set. That is, this is a process for causing the reels of the reel unit 41 to execute the first operation of the AT start freeze game, and in this example, the reels are rotated forward. In the following step S4106, the value of the freeze counter used for the AT start freeze control is set to "1", and in step S4107, a value corresponding to the time required for the reels to reach a predetermined speed is set for the freeze timer used for the AT start freeze control. Furthermore, in step S4108, a freeze start command is set to inform the sub-control device 111 that the AT start freeze game is about to begin.

After step S4108, in step S4109, start freeze processing is executed, which is processing for progressing the AT start freeze game. Here, start freeze processing is explained with reference to Figures 28, 29, and 30.

First, in step S4201 of FIG. 28, it is determined whether the start freeze flag is set to on. If the result of step S4201 is affirmative, it is determined in step S4202 whether the value of the freeze timer is "0". If the result of step S4202 is affirmative, it is determined in step S4203 whether the value of the freeze counter is "1".

If the result of step S4203 is affirmative, i.e., if the AT start freeze game is started and the reels are rotated forward at a predetermined speed, the freeze counter value is set to "2" in step S4304. Furthermore, in step S4305, a value corresponding to the longest time for which the reels will continue to rotate forward is set in the freeze timer.

In the next step S4206, the sub-control device 111 sets an "Aim for 7 command" that prompts the performance display device 15 to stop displaying the reels aiming for either a white 7 or a red 7, and then ends this process. The aim for 7 command also includes information on whether to aim for a white 7 or a red 7, and when setting the command, it is confirmed that one of the white 7 permission flag and the red 7 permission flag is set to on. Note that it may be configured so that when the white 7 permission flag is set to on, a guide display is derived in the performance display device 15 to aim for a red 7 and to stop display, or when the red 7 permission flag is set to on, a guide display is derived in the performance display device 15 to aim for a white 7 and to stop display.

If the result of step S4202 is negative, i.e., if the upper limit of the period for continuing the specified processing state has not yet been reached, then in step S4207, it is determined whether the value of the freeze counter is "2". If the result of step S4207 is positive, i.e., if a guide display encouraging the player to stop displaying the white 7 or red 7 is generated, then in step S4208, it is determined whether the stop switch has been operated.

If the result of step S4208 is negative, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of step S4208 is positive, in step S4209, if the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is spinning, the process of making the reel appear to be stopped in a pseudo manner (a pseudo stop display) is executed. Note that, since the game is in the middle of the AT start freeze, the reel is not displayed as stopped (completely stopped), but continues to move slightly to make it look like it is stopped (a pseudo stop display). Also, in the pseudo stop display, slip control may be performed in the same way as when the reel is displayed as stopped when a predetermined combination is achieved in the first embodiment. That is, for example, when the white 7 permission flag is set on and the white 7 of the reel in question is located on a pay line (if the white 7 is already displayed in a pseudo-stop state on a specified pay line on another reel, the white 7 of the reel in question is located on the specified pay line), the reel will basically display the pseudo-stop state as is, but if the white 7 of the reel in question is shifted one to four symbols back from the pay line (said specified pay line) (it is in a position where it will be located on said specified pay line one to four symbols behind the symbol currently on the specified pay line), the reel will be rotated (slid) an extra time in the forward direction until the white 7 reaches the pay line (said specified pay line). However, if the white 7 or red 7 corresponding to the ON white 7 permission flag or red 7 permission flag is more than four symbols away from an active line (the first of the three reels is any active line, the second is an active line that can be a tenpai, and the third is an active line that can be a doublet in a straight line), the reels are displayed as pseudo-stopped at that position (the white 7 or red 7 corresponding to the ON white 7 permission flag or red 7 permission flag is not necessarily displayed as pseudo-stopped on a specific active line). This allows the player to play as if they were playing a normal game, even in a freeze game.

After step S4209, in step S4210, it is determined whether all reels have been pseudo-stopped. If the result of step S4210 is negative, in step S4211, it is determined whether the reel that has been pseudo-stopped is the first of three reels. If the result of step S4211 is positive, in step S4212, a first pseudo-stop command is set to the sub-control device 111 indicating that a pseudo-stop has been displayed for the first reel, and then the process ends. The first pseudo-stop command includes information on whether the target white 7 and red 7 have been pseudo-stopped (on an active line).

If the result of step S4211 is negative, then in step S4213, it is determined whether the reel that has been pseudo-stopped is the second of the three reels. If the result of step S4213 is negative, for example, if the stop switch has been operated but the reel corresponds to one that has already been pseudo-stopped, then this process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S4213 is positive, then in step S4214, a second pseudo-stop command is set to the sub-control device 111 indicating that a pseudo-stop has been displayed for the second reel, and then this process ends. The second pseudo-stop command includes information on whether the target white 7 and red 7 have been pseudo-stopped (on a winning line) in the form of a tenpai (two white 7s or two red 7s have been pseudo-stopped on a specific winning line).

If step S4210 returns a positive result, i.e., all reels are displayed in a pseudo-stop state, then in step S4215 of FIG. 29, it is determined whether the red 7s are lined up on a predetermined pay line (whether they are displayed in a pseudo-stop state). If step S4215 returns a positive result, then in step S4216, the value of the uninstructed game number counter is subtracted by 100, and the value of the taught game number counter is added by 100. In other words, in this embodiment, the pseudo-stop display of the red 7 symbol once during AT start freeze play corresponds to the addition of 100 AT games (being taught that it is owned).

In the next step S4217, a red 7 command is set to the sub-control device 111 to inform the sub-control device 111 that a red 7 has been lined up. Upon receiving the red 7 command, the sub-control device 111 derives a display on the performance display device 15 indicating that the red 7s have been lined up (for example, by displaying red 7s), and also derives a display indicating that 100 games have been added. The instructed number of AT games is displayed on the performance display device 15 as the number of remaining AT games.

After step S4217, in step S4218, the freeze counter is set to "3". Furthermore, in step S4219, a value corresponding to the time for which the line-up of sevens is to be maintained is set in the freeze timer. After that, in step S4220, freeze operation 2 (pseudo stop; maintaining a slightly oscillating state) is set, and this process ends. Note that in this embodiment, the guidance play corresponds to the period from when a guidance display is generated encouraging the player to aim for a white 7 or red 7 and display it as a stopped number, until the three reels are displayed as pseudo-stops.

If the result of step S4215 is negative, then in step S4221 it is determined whether the white 7s are lined up on a specified pay line (whether they are displayed as a pseudo-stop). If the result of step S4221 is positive, then in step S4222 the value of the untaught game count counter is subtracted by 50 and the value of the taught game count counter is added by 50. In other words, in this embodiment, the pseudo-stop display of the white 7 symbol once during AT start freeze play corresponds to the addition of 50 AT games (being taught that it is owned).

In the next step S4223, a white 7 command is set to the sub-control device 111 to inform the sub-control device 111 that a line of white 7s has been formed. Upon receiving the white 7 command, the sub-control device 111 causes the performance display device 15 to display a message indicating that a line of white 7s has been formed (for example, displaying white 7s), and also to display a message indicating that 50 games have been added.

After step S4223, in step S4218, the freeze counter is set to "3", in step S4219, a value corresponding to the time for which the 7-line state is to be maintained is set in the freeze timer, and in step S4220, freeze operation 2 (pseudo stop; maintaining a slightly swaying state) is set, and this process ends.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S4221, that is, if the white 7 or red 7 is not pseudo-stopped in the performance (guidance play) in which the stop switch is used to display a pseudo-stopped white 7 or red 7 at the beginning of the AT start freeze play, then in step S4224, 50 is subtracted from the value of the uninstructed game number counter and 50 is added to the value of the taught game number counter. In other words, in this embodiment, when transitioning to the AT state, a minimum of 50 games is granted as the AT state period (the initial number of games is at least 50 games).

Furthermore, in step S4225, a mismatch command is set to the sub-control device 111 to inform it that neither the white 7 nor the red 7 have been matched. Upon receiving the mismatch command, the sub-control device 111 derives a display on the performance display device 15 indicating that 50 games have been added. Since the white 7 and red 7 are not matched, the performance display device 15 does not display the white 7 or red 7, but a display to excite the player (for example, displaying the letter "V") may be derived in response to the start of the AT state and the awarding of 50 games. In the AT state, the performance display device 15 basically continues to display the number of games remaining in the AT (except during the performance that uses the entire display unit).

After step S4225, in step S4226, the freeze counter value is set to "4", and in step S4227, the freeze timer is set. Then, in step S4220, freeze operation 2 (pseudo stop) is set, and this process ends. Note that the time set in step S4227 is very short (for example, 0.1 seconds).

In addition, if the result of step S4203 in FIG. 28 is negative, in step S4228, it is determined whether the value of the freeze counter is "2". If the result of step S4228 is positive, that is, in a state in which the reels are in a pseudo-stop state (all reels are in a pseudo-stop state), and a guide display (such as that shown in FIG. 26(j)) is derived in the display device 15 to prompt the player to aim for either the white 7 or the red 7 and display the stop, if the value of the freeze timer is set to "0" (for example, 10 seconds have passed) without the operation of the stop switch being completed (all stop switches 72, 73, 74 are operated), in S4229, a process is performed to display all reels 42L, 42M, and 42R in a pseudo-stop state. In this process, the reels are displayed in a pseudo-stop state in a manner in which none of the roles are winning. The manner of the pseudo-stop display is appropriately determined according to the position (phase) of the reel at the stage when the corrective pseudo-stop process is executed. After step S4229, proceed to step S4215 in FIG. 29 described above.

As a variant, if the white 7 or red 7 corresponding to the white 7 permission flag or red 7 permission flag that is set to ON is located on a specified pay line, it is displayed as a pseudo stop at that position, if it is shifted by one to four symbols, it is shifted to the specified pay line and displayed as a pseudo stop, and if it is shifted by more than that, the reel is displayed as a pseudo stop at that position (the white 7 or red 7 corresponding to the white 7 permission flag or red 7 permission flag that is set to ON is not necessarily displayed as a pseudo stop on the specified pay line). Furthermore, for example, it is also possible to always display the white 7 or red 7 corresponding to the white 7 permission flag or red 7 permission flag that is set to ON as a pseudo stop on the specified pay line.

If the result of step S4228 is negative, step S4230 determines whether the value of the freeze counter is "3", that is, whether the player has operated the stop switch to cause a pseudo-stop display of the white 7 or red 7.

If the result of step S4230 is affirmative, the freeze counter value is set to "4" in step S4231. Furthermore, in step S4232, a lever reception command is set for the sub-control device 111 to cause the performance display device 15 to display an operation guide display (such as that shown in FIG. 25(f)) that prompts the user to operate the start lever 71. After step S4232, in step S4233, the freeze timer is set to a time (e.g., about 5 seconds) to wait for the operation of the start lever 71, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of step S4207 is negative, then in step S4234 of FIG. 30, it is determined whether the value of the freeze counter is "4", i.e., whether the value of the freeze timer is not "0" and the predetermined symbol is displayed in a pseudo-stop state. If the result of step S4234 is negative, then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is YES in step S4234, then in step S4235, it is determined whether the start lever 71 has been operated. If the answer is NO in step S4235, i.e., if operation of the start lever 71 has not been confirmed, then this process ends.

If the answer is affirmative in step S4235, then in step S4236 it is determined whether a set of red sevens (double number) is displayed as a pseudo-stop. If the answer is affirmative in step S4236, then in step S4237 it is determined whether the value of the uninstructed game count counter is equal to or greater than 100. If the answer is affirmative in step S4237, then in step S4238 it is determined whether the value of the uninstructed game count counter is reduced by 100 and the value of the taught game count counter is increased by 100.

In the following step S4239, settings are made to cause the reels to perform freeze operation 3-2 (reverse rotation of red 7). In this embodiment, settings are made to make all reels rotate in the reverse direction at the specified speed exactly five times before displaying a pseudo-stop (that is, the reel unit 41 displays the same state as before the reverse rotation, and thus the red 7 is displayed pseudo-stop). Furthermore, in step S4240, a red 7 reverse rotation command is set for the sub-control device 111 to cause the effect display device 15 to produce a reverse rotation effect of red 7 (pseudo-stop game effect).

Then, in step S4241, the value of the freeze counter is set to "5". Furthermore, in step S4242, the time required for the reel to rotate in reverse is set in the freeze timer, and then this process ends. Note that the period from when the reels are displayed in a pseudo-stop state to when they rotate in reverse and are displayed in a pseudo-stop state corresponds to pseudo-stop play.

If the result of step S4236 is negative, then in step S4243, it is determined whether or not a set of white 7s (double number) is displayed as a pseudo-stop. If the result of step S4243 is negative, i.e., neither the white 7s nor the red 7s are displayed as a pseudo-stop, then this process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S4243 is positive, then in step S4244, it is determined whether or not the value of the uninstructed game number counter is "50" or more. If the result of step S4244 is positive, then in step S4245, it is determined whether or not the value of the uninstructed game number counter is "100" or more. If the result of step S4245 is negative, then in step S4246, the value of the uninstructed game number counter is decremented by 50, and the value of the taught game number counter is incremented by 50.

Furthermore, in step S4247, freeze operation 3-1 (white 7 reverse rotation) is set. In this embodiment, the setting is made so that all reels rotate in the reverse direction at the specified speed exactly five times before the pseudo-stop display (i.e., the white 7 is pseudo-stopped). In the following step S4248, a white 7 reverse rotation command is set to the sub-control device 111 to derive the white 7 reverse rotation display (pseudo-stop game display) in the display device 15. Thereafter, in the above step S4241, the freeze counter value is set to "5", and in step S4242, the freeze timer is set, and then this process ends.

Also, if step S4245 returns a positive result, i.e., if there are 100 or more uninstructed AT games with the white 7 displayed as a pseudo-stop, then in step S4249, a selection is made to determine whether or not the symbol to be displayed as a pseudo-stop after reverse rotation will be a red 7 (for example, there is about a 1/4 chance of winning). In the following step S4250, it is determined whether or not the selection is won. If step S4250 returns a negative result, the process proceeds to step S4246, where a process is performed to display the white 7 as a pseudo-stop after reverse rotation.

On the other hand, if the result of step S4250 is affirmative, then in step S4251 the red 7 permission flag is set to ON and the white 7 permission flag is set to OFF. In the following step S4252, the value of the uninstructed game number counter is decremented by 100 and the value of the taught game number counter is incremented by 100. Furthermore, in step S4253, settings are made to execute freeze operation 3-3 (upgraded reverse rotation). In this embodiment, all reels are rotated in the reverse direction at the specified speed for exactly five revolutions, and then rotated in the same direction for 12 symbols before displaying a pseudo stop (i.e., the white 7 is displayed in the pseudo stop state, and then rotated in the reverse direction to display a pseudo stop of the red 7).

As shown in Figure 7, 21 symbols are attached to each reel at equal intervals (between the centers of the symbols) in the direction of rotation of the reel, and on each reel, from the white 7 symbol to the red 7 symbol, there is a 10 symbol offset in the forward direction of rotation of the reel (with 9 symbols between them), and there is a 11 symbol offset in the reverse direction of rotation of the reel (with 10 symbols between them).

In the next step S4254, an upgraded reverse rotation command is set for the sub-control device 111 to derive an upgraded reverse rotation effect in which the effect display device 15 reverses from the pseudo-stop display of white 7 and displays a pseudo-stop display of red 7. After that, in the above step S4241, the value of the freeze counter is set to "5", and in step S4242, the freeze timer is set, and then this process is terminated.

In addition, if a negative judgment is made in step S4237 (if the number of uninstructed AT games is less than 100 games with the red 7 displayed as a pseudo-stop) and if a negative judgment is made in step S4244 (if the number of uninstructed AT games is less than 50 games with the white 7 displayed as a pseudo-stop), the process proceeds to step S4255 in FIG. 28, and transitions to processing for ending the AT start freeze game. That is, in step S4255, the value of the freeze counter is set to "0", and in step S4256, the reels are set to operate normally (forward rotation at the specified speed). In this embodiment, when the red 7 is displayed as a pseudo-stop, if the number of uninstructed AT games is 100 or more, the red 7 is displayed as a pseudo-stop again after the reels are rotated in reverse, but if the number is less than 100, the reels are not rotated in reverse. If the red 7, which corresponds to an additional 100 games, is displayed as a pseudo-stop even once during one AT start freeze play period, the white 7, which corresponds to an additional 50 games, will not be displayed as a pseudo-stop thereafter.

Furthermore, in step S4257, a freeze end command is set to inform the sub-control device 111 of the end of the AT start freeze game. Upon receiving the freeze end command, the sub-control device 111 derives a performance display as shown in FIG. 25(c) on the performance display device 15. After step S4257, in step S4258, the start freeze in progress flag is turned off and then this process is terminated.

If the result of step S4230 is negative, then in step S4259, it is determined whether the value of the freeze counter is "4". If the result of step S4259 is positive, that is, at the beginning of the AT start freeze game (guidance game), the player does not complete the operation of the stop switch within the derivation period of the guidance display, or the player operates the stop switch but the white 7 and red 7 do not display pseudo-stops, or during the AT start freeze game (after the end of the pseudo-stop game), the player does not operate the start lever when the white 7 or red 7 is displayed pseudo-stop, then the process proceeds to step S4255 and transitions to processing to end the AT start freeze game.

Also, if the result of step S4259 is negative, i.e., if the value of the freeze counter is "5", i.e., if the white 7 or red 7 is in a pseudo-stop state after the reels 42L to 42R have rotated in reverse, the freeze counter value is set to "3" in step S4260. In other words, a setting is made to induce an operation guide display again. After step S4260, in step S4261, a value corresponding to the time during which the white 7 or red 7 is in a pseudo-stop state (the time to give an aftertaste of the pseudo-stop display, and the time until the operation guide is displayed) is set to the freeze timer, and then this process ends.

If the result of step S4201 is negative, then in step S4262 it is determined whether normal rotation is in progress. In other words, it is determined whether the reels 42L to 42R are in a state of rotating forward at a specified speed. If the result of step S4262 is negative, then this process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S4262 is positive, then in step S4263 the start freeze end flag is set to on, and then this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 27, after the start freeze processing in step S4109, in step S4110, it is determined whether or not the start freeze end flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S4110, the process proceeds to step S4109 (the start freeze processing in step S4109 is looped unless all AT start freeze games have been completed). On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S4110, the start freeze end flag is turned OFF in step S4111, and then this process is terminated.

Next, the specific AT freeze process for executing a specific AT freeze game that can be performed in the next game in which a white 7 (push order replay A) or a red 7 (push order replay B) is won in the specific AT state will be described with reference to FIG. 31. The specific AT freeze process is performed after the AT start freeze process, for example, when the start lever 71 is operated to start the game.

Before explaining the specific AT freeze process, the process of the specific AT state will be explained. In this embodiment, when the specific AT precursor game number counter is set to "0" and the specific AT precursor flag is turned off, the value of the game state counter is set to "2" and a specific AT start command is set to the sub-control device 111. Furthermore, when the transition to the specific AT state is decided, a value corresponding to "10 games" is set to the specific AT game number counter, and when the game is started with the game state counter value of "2", the value of the specific AT game number counter is subtracted by "1", and when the value of the specific AT game number counter becomes "0", the value of the game state counter is set to "1", and a specific AT end command is set to the sub-control device 111. In addition, in the specific AT state, the words "High probability of adding" are displayed on the left side of the display unit of the performance display device 15, and the words "Chance of winning a small role" are displayed on the upper part of the display unit.

As mentioned above, in the specific AT state, when watermelon, cherry, or common bell are won, an instruction to add on is always given, but the total number of games added based on the win may not be given. Furthermore, when the push order bell or miss is won, the number of AT games may be added, but is not given. For this reason, in the specific AT state, it is easy for the number of AT games that has not been instructed to accumulate.

In this embodiment, when push order replay B is won in a specific AT state, a push order replay B command including the push order for "red 7" is output from the main control unit 131 to the sub-control unit 111, and a display showing the push order for "red 7" is generated on the performance display device 15.

In addition, if push order replay A is won in a specific AT state, a push order replay A command including the push order for "white 7" is output from the main control unit 131 to the sub-control unit 111, and a display showing the push order for "white 7" is generated on the performance display device 15.

In addition, in a configuration in which a single stop display or pseudo stop display of push order replay A (line of white 7s) is associated with an additional instruction of 50 games, the addition of the number of AT games triggered by the winning of push order replay A may be configured to be less than 50 games (20 games, 30 games), and when push order replay A is won in a specific AT state, it is determined whether the number of uninstructed games of the AT game including the addition of the number of AT games triggered by the winning of push order replay A is 50 games or more, and if the number of uninstructed games of the AT game including the addition of the number of AT games triggered by the winning of push order replay A is 50 games or more, a push order replay A command including the push order of "white 7" is output, and if it is less than 50 games, the output of the push order replay A command is stopped (a display showing the push order of "white 7" is not derived).

In addition, in a specific AT state, a game in which push order replays A and B are frozen and displayed is not a pseudo (freeze) game but a real game, and the frozen display of push order replays A and B results in the winning of push order replays A and B. In this embodiment, when the winning of push order replays A and B is confirmed in a game in which push order replays A and B are won, the push order replay A winning flag or the push order replay B winning flag is set to ON. The settings of the push order replay A winning flag and the push order replay B winning flag are carried over until the setting of the game, which is performed when the lever is turned on to start the next game in the specific AT state, and are set to OFF uniformly after the setting of the game.

In order to win the Push Order Replay A and Push Order Replay B of this embodiment, it is necessary not only to get the push order correct, but also to aim for the "white 7" and "red 7" and stop them on the valid line. Therefore, even if you win Push Order Replay A and B and get the push order correct, Push Order Replay A and B may not be stopped. Also, even if stop switches 72, 73, and 74 are operated when the white 7 or red 7 is positioned 1 to 4 symbols behind the valid line, slip control is performed and the white 7 or red 7 is stopped and displayed on the valid line (if it is shifted by 5 symbols or more, slip control is not performed to position the white 7 or red 7 on the valid line).

Furthermore, a freeze effect extension flag is provided to indicate whether or not push sequence replays A and B were able to win in the final game of the specific AT state. When push sequence replays A and B win in the final game of the specific AT state and the push sequence replay A winning flag or the push sequence replay B winning flag is set to ON, the freeze effect extension flag is set to ON instead of turning OFF the push sequence replay A winning flag or the push sequence replay B winning flag that has been set to ON. The setting of the freeze effect extension flag is carried over until the setting of the game that is performed when the lever is turned ON to start the next game, and is set to OFF uniformly after the setting of the game. In addition, when a pattern is displayed as a stop in the final game of the specific AT state and the freeze effect extension flag is turned OFF, a command is set to the sub-control device 111 to instruct the end of the specific AT state. On the other hand, when a pattern is displayed as a stop in the final game of the specific AT state and the freeze effect extension flag is turned ON, the command to instruct the end of the specific AT state is not set.

In addition, in the case where a fake replay is won in a specific AT state, a guide game is derived to aim for and display a white 7 or a red 7. Upon receiving a command to the effect that a fake replay has been won, the sub-control device 111 selects either a white 7 or a red 7, determines the display contents of the push order, and derives this as a guide game display on the performance display device 15. Of course, even if you try to aim for and display a white 7 or a red 7 as instructed in the guide game display, it is possible to reach a ready state, but it is impossible to line up all three.

As shown in FIG. 31, the specific AT freeze process first determines in step S4501 whether the freeze effect extension flag is set to on, that is, whether push order replay A (7 whites lined up) or push order replay B (7 reds lined up) was awarded in the final game of the specific AT state.

If the answer is negative in step S4501, then in step S4502, it is determined whether the value of the game state counter is "2", i.e., whether the game is in a specific AT state. If the answer is negative in step S4502, then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is YES in step S4502, then in step S4503, it is determined whether either the push order replay A winning flag or the push order replay B winning flag is set to ON. If the answer is NO in step S4503, then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is YES in step S4503, or if the answer is YES in step S4501, then in step S4505, it is determined whether the value of the uninstructed game number counter is "50" or more, that is, whether the number of AT games that the player owns but has not been instructed to own is 50 or more. If the answer is NO in step S4504, the process is terminated. In this embodiment, if push order replay A is won, a minimum of 50 games are added, and if push order replay B is won, a minimum of 100 games are added, so that unless an error occurs, a positive answer is given in step S4504.

If the result of step S4504 is positive, then in step S4505 it is determined whether the value of the uninstructed game number counter is equal to or greater than "100". If the result of step S4505 is positive, then in step S4506 it is determined whether the value of the uninstructed game number counter is equal to or greater than "200". If the result of step S4506 is negative, that is, if the number of uninstructed AT games is equal to or greater than 100 games but less than 200 games, then in step S4507 a first pseudo stop symbol lottery process is performed to determine the symbol to be displayed in the next pseudo stop. Here, there is approximately a 1/20 chance of red 7 being selected, and approximately a 19/20 chance of white 7 being selected.

If the result of step S4506 is affirmative, then in step S4508, a second pseudo-stop symbol lottery process is performed in which the red 7 has about a 1/4 chance of being selected as the symbol to be displayed as a pseudo-stop next time, and the white 7 has about a 3/4 chance of being selected.

After steps S4507 and S4508, in step S4509, it is determined whether the symbol to be displayed as a pseudo stop next time is "white 7". If the result of step S4505 is negative, or if the result of step S4509 is positive, in step S4510, all reels are rotated in reverse, and then a pseudo stop is displayed with white 7 (pseudo stop game is performed), and a white 7 reverse rotation setting is performed. Here, it is confirmed whether the push order replay A winning flag or the push order replay B winning flag is set to on, and if the push order replay A winning flag is set to on, the reels are rotated in the reverse direction at a predetermined speed for exactly five revolutions before the pseudo stop is displayed (white 7 → white 7), and if the push order replay B winning flag is set to on, the reels are rotated in the reverse direction at a predetermined speed for five revolutions, and then the pseudo stop is displayed after rotating 10 symbols in the same reverse direction (red 7 → white 7). Furthermore, the size (circumference), number of symbols, spacing between symbols (centers of symbols), and spacing between the white 7 and red 7 are all the same for all reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, and for any of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, when a red 7 is displayed stationary on a designated pay line and the reel is rotated 10 symbols in the opposite direction, a white 7 will be displayed stationary on the designated pay line.

After step S4510, in step S4511, the white 7 set flag is set to ON, indicating that the white 7 will be displayed as a pseudo-stop. In the following step S4512, the value of the untaught game number counter is subtracted by 50, and the value of the taught game number counter is added by 50. After that, in step S4513, a white 7 reverse rotation command is set to inform the sub-control device 111 that the white 7 will be displayed as a pseudo-stop after the reels are rotated in reverse. Furthermore, in step S4514, a value equivalent to the time required for the operation of rotating the reels in reverse and then displaying the pseudo-stop is set in the freeze timer, and the process proceeds to step S4520.

In the AT state, at the start of the game, the effect display device 15 generates a display that subtracts one from the remaining AT game number display to teach the value of the taught game number counter. For example, if the value of the untaught game number counter is "0" and push order replay A is won in the final game of the specific AT state, and 100 games are added, and 50 games are taught to be added in the winning game of push order replay A, the number of untaught AT games in the next game will be 49. However, after teaching the addition of 50 games in the specific AT freeze game, a display that subtracts one is generated at the start of the game following the specific AT freeze game, so the effect does not feel particularly strange.

If the result of step S4509 is negative, then in step S4515, all reels are rotated in reverse, and a pseudo stop is displayed at red 7, and a red 7 reverse rotation setting is performed. Here, it is confirmed whether the Push Order Replay A winning flag or the Push Order Replay B winning flag is set to on, and if the Push Order Replay B winning flag is set to on, the reels are rotated in the reverse direction at a specified speed for exactly five revolutions before the pseudo stop is displayed (red 7 → red 7), and if the Push Order Replay A winning flag is set to on, the reels are rotated in the reverse direction at a specified speed for five revolutions, and then the reels are rotated in the same reverse direction for 12 symbols before the pseudo stop is displayed (white 7 → red 7).

After step S4515, in step S4516, the red 7 set flag is set to ON, indicating that the red 7 will be displayed as a pseudo-stop. In the following step S4517, the value of the untaught game count counter is decremented by 100, and the value of the taught game count counter is incremented by 100. After that, in step S4518, a red 7 reverse rotation command is set to inform the sub-control device 111 that the red 7 will be displayed as a pseudo-stop after the reels are rotated in reverse. Furthermore, in step S4519, a value equivalent to the time required for the reels to be rotated in reverse and then the pseudo-stop display is set in the freeze timer, and the process proceeds to step S4520.

In addition, if push order replays A and B are never won in the specific AT state, the freeze effect extension flag is set to ON, and if the number of uninstructed games is 50 or more, the reels may be reversed from a state in which a symbol other than a set of white 7s or red 7s is displayed, and a pseudo stop display may be displayed in the form of the symbol before the reverse rotation. In this case, the pseudo stop game effect (pseudo stop game display) performed by the effect display device 15 in response to the pseudo stop display may be configured to display "V" and an additional XX game.

In step S4520, it is determined whether the value of the freeze timer is "0". The freeze timer is updated by a fixed value at regular intervals in a separate process. If the result of step S4520 is negative, the process returns to step 4520. On the other hand, if the result of step S4520 is positive, it is determined in step S4521 whether the specific AT freeze end flag is set on. If the result of step S4521 is negative, it is determined in step S4522 whether the value of the uninstructed game number counter is "50" or more. If the result of step S4522 is positive, the process proceeds to step S4505, where the process proceeds to display a pseudo stop of a white 7 or a red 7 after the reels are rotated in reverse.

If the result of step S4522 is negative, i.e., if there are not enough uninstructed AT games remaining to pseudo-stop the white 7, which corresponds to the addition of 50 games, the specific AT freeze end flag is set to ON in step S4523. Furthermore, in step S4524, the reels 42L to 42R are set to operate normally (forward rotation at the specified speed).

Next, in step S4525, it is determined whether the freeze effect extension flag is set to on. If the result of step S4525 is positive, i.e., if the effect notifying the end of the specific AT state has not yet been performed, the freeze effect extension flag is turned off in step S4526. Furthermore, in step S4527, a specific AT end effect addition command is set to the sub-control device 111 to derive the specific AT end effect, and in step S4528, a value corresponding to the time taking into account the specific AT end effect is set in the freeze timer, and the process proceeds to step S4520. Also, if the result of step S4525 is negative, the process proceeds directly to step S4520.

If the answer is affirmative in step S4521, then in step S4529 it is determined whether or not reels 42L to 42R are spinning normally. If the answer is negative in step S4529, then the process proceeds to step S4520. On the other hand, if the answer is affirmative in step S4529, then in step S4530 the specific AT freeze end flag is turned off, in step S4531 the push order replay A winning flag and the push order replay B winning flag are turned off, and in step S4532 the white 7 set flag and the red 7 set flag are turned off, and then this process ends.

In the second embodiment, in the specific AT state, when watermelon, cherry, and common bell are won, some of the number of added games may not be instructed, and when push order bell and miss are won, the number of added games is not instructed. However, when a combination other than push order replay A and B is won and the number of games is added, the entire number of added games may be instructed. Furthermore, in the specific AT state, when push order replay A and B are won, the number of added games granted based on the winning may be configured to be grasped when setting the freeze game of the next game, and in the freeze game (freeze game presentation), only the number of added games based on the winning of push order replay A and B may be instructed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the minimum number of games added by winning the push order replay A is the same as the minimum number of games added by the stop display or pseudo stop display of the push order replay A, and the push order of the push order replay A is always navigated, but for example, even if the push order replay A is won in a specific AT state, the number of added AT games may be less than 50 games, and if the number of uninstructed games at the time of winning the push order replay A is less than 50 games, the push order of the push order replay A may not be navigated. In this case, while observing the rule that 50 or more AT games are granted when the push order replay A is stopped and displayed in the specific AT state, the winning probability of the push order replay A in the specific AT state is set high, and thus it is possible to make it easier to generate a freeze game in the specific AT state. In other words, since the specific AT state is finite (for example, 10 games), if the winning probability of the push order replay A (and B) is lowered, there is a concern that the occurrence probability of the freeze game will be significantly reduced. On the other hand, if the probability of winning the push order replay A (and B) is increased, there is a concern that the probability of transitioning to a specific AT state will decrease. Furthermore, if the amount of AT games awarded when the push order replay A (white 7s) is stopped and displayed is reduced, there is a concern that the content of the bonus awarded will not be appropriate, which will lead to a decrease in the interest of the player, even though the push order replay A (white 7s) is stopped and displayed with a relatively flashy production. In this regard, by reducing the number of games (20 or 30 games) awarded when the push order replay A is won in the specific AT state to less than the number of games (50 games) associated with the awarding of the white 7s, the number of opportunities to stop and display the push order replay A is increased, but if the number of games that can be taught is insufficient for the number of games corresponding to the white 7s, the push order replay A is not stopped and displayed (it is not navigated, but it is possible to match it by guessing the push order and aiming for the white 7s), the above concerns can be eliminated.

In addition, in a freeze game in a specific AT state, the reel state at the start of the freeze game and the pseudo stop state may be different (for example, white 7 → red 7), but the reel state at the start of the freeze game and the pseudo stop state may always be the same. Furthermore, in a specific AT state, if push order replays A and B are won but push order replays A and B do not win, the number of added games is not instructed, but it may be configured so that only the number of wins of push order replays A and B, or only the minimum number of games of push order replay A, or the number of uninstructed AT games is instructed until the number of uninstructed AT games becomes less than 50 games. In addition, in this embodiment, in a freeze game, the number of uninstructed AT games that is less than 50 games associated with the stop display of white 7 and the pseudo stop display is not instructed, but it may be configured so that it is instructed (for example, instructed when a lottery is won on whether to instruct all the remaining games). Incidentally, in the specific AT freeze game, even if the red 7 is displayed as a stopped display at the start or the red 7 is displayed as a pseudo-stop display during the game, the white 7 may be displayed as a pseudo-stop display after that. This allows the number of uninstructed AT games to be less than 50 games remaining. In the specific AT freeze game, as in the AT start freeze game, if the red 7 is displayed as a stopped display or a pseudo-stop display once in the specific AT freeze game, the white 7 may not be displayed as a pseudo-stop display after that, and a greater value may be given to the reverse rotation caused by the red 7 stopped display or the pseudo-stop display (increasing the sense of excitement at that timing). In addition, in the AT start freeze game or the specific AT freeze game, even if there are 50 or 100 or more uninstructed AT games remaining, the reverse rotation may not occur (it is not taught and is hidden) (there is an option to not cause a reverse rotation by lottery). When this configuration is adopted, it is desirable to increase the chances of a freeze game, since when the value of the taught game number counter becomes "0", there is a high possibility that a relatively large number of untaught AT games will remain. For example, when the value of the taught game number counter is "0", a freeze game may occur. In the freeze game, for example, a performance is generated in which a pseudo stop is displayed by aiming at the white 7 from the right, and if the number of untaught games is one or more, the white 7 is pseudo-stopped on the right reel 42R (if there is not one game, the white 7 is not pseudo-stopped and the freeze game ends at that point), if the number of untaught games is ten or more, the white 7 is pseudo-stopped on the middle reel, and the tens digit of the number of untaught AT games is displayed on the performance display device 15, and if the number of untaught AT games is 100 or more, the white 7 is pseudo-stopped on the left reel, and the hundreds digit of the number of untaught AT games is displayed on the performance display device 15.

Furthermore, when the value of the untaught game number counter is subtracted and the value of the taught game number counter is added, the value of the untaught game number counter and the value of the taught game number counter are added to determine whether they match the value of the AT game number counter, and if they do not match, an error process is executed to cause an error state. Note that the AT game number counter may be omitted from the untaught game number counter, taught game number counter, and AT game number counter. In addition, even if either the untaught game number counter or the taught game number counter is omitted, the value counted by the omitted counter can be calculated using the remaining one and the AT game number counter, but since there is a risk of the process becoming complicated, it is desirable to provide the untaught game number counter and the taught game number counter.

In addition, when the value of the taught game number counter (taught amount storage means) becomes "0" (when it is "1"), if the value of the untaught game number counter is other than "0", the same value as the value of the untaught game number counter is added to the taught game number counter, and the value of the untaught game number counter is set to "0". When the value of the taught game number counter becomes "0" (when it is "1"), if the value of the untaught game number counter is "0", an AT state end effect is performed to notify the end of the AT state (for example, the effect display device 15 displays a result screen that shows the total number of medals won from the transition to the AT state until the return to the normal game state, the number of games played in the AT state, and the number of times a specific AT state has occurred, and displays a display object with setting suggestions).

As described above in detail, according to the second embodiment, if a pseudo-stop display of white 7 or red 7 can be achieved in the guidance game in the AT start freeze game executed at the start of the AT state, an effect is performed to inform the player that a pseudo-stop display of white 7 or red 7 has been achieved and that the number of games has been added, and a state in which further addition may be made (the pseudo-stop state of the reels is maintained and a display is generated encouraging the operation of the start lever 71). On the other hand, if a pseudo-stop display of white 7 or red 7 cannot be achieved in the guidance game, no effect is displayed to indicate that a pseudo-stop display of white 7 or red 7 has been achieved (the letter "V" is displayed instead), and although an effect is performed to inform the player that the number of games has been added, a state in which further addition may be made does not transition to one in which further addition may be made (returning to normal reel spin). Furthermore, regarding the stopping mode of the guide game in the AT start freeze game, although the symbols are pseudo-stopped, the reels are pseudo-stopped and displayed based on the player's operation of the stop switch in the same manner as the stopping behavior of normal reels (for example, even if the player operates the corresponding stop switch when the white 7 symbol on a specific reel during rotation is more than four symbols away from the pay line, the white 7 symbol on that reel will not be pulled into the pay line), so players can enjoy the guide game of the freeze game with the same feeling of "eyeballing" as in normal games.

In addition, if Push Order Replay A or Push Order Replay B can be displayed in a stopped state in the specific AT state, a specific AT freeze game is executed, but if Push Order Replay A or Push Order Replay B is won in the specific AT state but cannot be displayed in a stopped state (winning), the specific AT freeze game is not executed. In other words, if Push Order Replay A or Push Order Replay B is displayed in a stopped state, the reels can be rotated in reverse at the beginning of the next game to execute a specific AT freeze game in which Push Order Replay A or Push Order Replay B is pseudo-stopped and displayed, but if Push Order Replay A or Push Order Replay B is won but cannot be won (the push order is announced, so the timing of the player's operation is not appropriate), the specific AT freeze game in which the state at the start of reverse rotation is pseudo-stopped again is not executed.

For this reason, as in the first embodiment, when the AT state starts (when the first game starts after transition to the AT state) or when a game in a specific AT state starts, the mode of the performance display performed by the performance display device 15 in association with the game can be made different depending on whether or not a specific mode of the stop display or pseudo stop display of the pattern associated with the addition is derived for the player. Therefore, the correspondence between the specific mode associated with the addition and the addition can be strengthened, and the occurrence of discomfort due to the mismatch between the mode of the stop display or pseudo stop display of the reel unit 41 and the mode of the performance display of the performance display device 15 can be suppressed. As a result, the performance and playability can be improved. Furthermore, as in the first embodiment, the performance can be improved in terms of being able to derive the guide play and the guide play performance.

In addition, in the second embodiment, if the white 7 or red 7 cannot be pseudo-stopped in the guide game of the AT start freeze game, and if the push order replay A or push order replay B cannot be won in the specific AT state, the pseudo stop game (reverse rotation + pseudo stop display in the pattern state before reverse rotation) is not executed. For this reason, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a different mode (meaningless mode) from the mode (specific mode) of the white 7 alignment, red 7 alignment, push order replay A, and push order replay B corresponding to the addition is pseudo-stopped again in the pseudo stop game, thereby reducing the performance and playability (for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which, when a player is unable to make a specific mode due to his/her own operation error, the mode due to the operation error is displayed repeatedly, making the player feel bad, or being humiliated and causing a decrease in interest). In addition, by simply preparing a pattern of pseudo stop game and a pattern that is not pseudo stop game as a freeze game, it is possible to avoid a mode that does not correspond to the addition in the freeze game being derived. This makes it possible to avoid complicating control while eliminating concerns that may arise from a pseudo-stop display of a mode different from the specific mode during freeze play.

In addition, in the AT start freeze game, if the white 7 or red 7 cannot be pseudo-stopped in the guide game, the freeze game ends with the number of uninstructed games remaining. Furthermore, if the push order replay A or push order replay B cannot be won in the specific AT state, the freeze game does not even occur and the number of uninstructed games remains the same. This makes it possible to avoid a spectacular presentation being derived even if the patterns (specific patterns) of the white 7s, red 7s, push order replay A, and push order replay B corresponding to the addition are not complete. This makes it possible to make the correspondence between the patterns of the reel unit 41 in the freeze game, etc., and the pseudo game presentation natural, and also improves the presentation and playability.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the AT start freeze game, the reels are configured to rotate in reverse from the state in which the white 7s are pseudo-stopped, and not only are the white 7s pseudo-stopped as related identification information, but also the red 7s pseudo-stopped as related identification information. Therefore, two different pieces of information can be taught by the pseudo stop game. That is, for example, in the pseudo stop game, when the white 7s are pseudo-stopped, it indicates that the content of the AT state to be granted has been improved (50 games added), and when the red 7s are pseudo-stopped, it indicates that the AT state to be granted has been improved even more (100 games added). Therefore, it can be used for various presentations, such as the pseudo stop display leading to a different state from normal, or the state that should be led is not led, and the fun of the freeze game can be improved.

In addition, in the AT start freeze game, a guide game that allows the player to play a game in which the white 7 or red 7 is stopped and displayed is performed as part of the freeze game at the beginning of the game when the AT state starts (after the operation of the start lever 71 to start the game and before the main game) (the stop in the guide game is also a pseudo stop display). Therefore, it is possible to complete the process from the guide game to the end of the freeze game. For example, in a configuration in which a guide game is performed in the game and a pseudo stop game is performed in the next game (game) following the game, in the lottery for the next game, a role (for example, a bonus role) that takes precedence over the freeze game (pseudo stop game) is won, and even though a set of white 7s is stopped and displayed in the guide game, the freeze game (pseudo stop game) is not executed, or the instruction of the state transition corresponding to the winning of a role that takes precedence over the pseudo stop game (for example, a bonus announcement, etc.) is delayed. In addition, even after the AT start freeze game guidance game ends, the stopped state of the symbols on the reels (pseudo stopped display state) is maintained for a specified time, and the performance display device 15 displays the aligned symbols and the number of added games. Therefore, the results of the guidance game can be reliably communicated to the player.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, even if there is an untaught number of games remaining (the value of the untaught game number counter as an untaught amount storage means), the freeze game may end without teaching all of it (without teaching any part of it). This allows for more leeway (improving freedom) in setting the freeze game and the number of AT games (bonus game progress value), making it possible to provide more diverse gameplay and preventing the control from becoming too complicated. In addition, the untaught game number counter makes it relatively easy to manage the untaught amount of the AT game number, and it is also relatively easy to set the effects that teach the untaught amount.

In addition, in pseudo-stop games (including guide games) of freeze games (AT start freeze games, specific AT freeze games), the proportion (probability) of not teaching part of the uninstructed amount of the AT game number is different between when a combination of symbols (specific identification information) corresponding to the addition is pseudo-stopped and when a different combination of symbols is pseudo-stopped (when a set of seven symbols corresponding to the addition is pseudo-stopped, the uninstructed amount is more likely to be smaller, and when a mode that does not correspond to the addition is pseudo-stopped, the uninstructed amount is more likely to remain). Therefore, it is possible to increase the opportunities to properly teach the uninstructed amount of the AT game number in a state where specific identification information can be pseudo-stopped, and it is possible to make it easier for players who have a good match between the freeze game mode and the addition to enjoy a pleasant presentation.

In addition, when setting up a freeze game (AT start freeze game, specific AT freeze game), a lottery (instruction amount lottery) is carried out to determine how much of the uninstructed amount of the special AT game number will be instructed in the freeze game. For this reason, the uninstructed amount of the AT game number instructed in the freeze game is not constant, and even after confirming the occurrence of the freeze game, players can be interested in how much of the AT game number will be instructed (added). This makes it possible to increase the variety of freeze games, and improve the presentation, etc.

Furthermore, if the teaching amount of the number of AT games determined by the teaching amount lottery exceeds the untaught amount of the number of AT games held (the value of the untaught game number counter), the freeze game (pseudo stop game) corresponding to the teaching amount lottery is not executed. Therefore, although the upper limit (within the number held) of the number of AT games that can be taught by freeze game is fixed (the teaching of the untaught amount of the number of AT games by freeze game is performed within a range that does not exceed the untaught amount of the number of AT games), the amount of freeze game to be performed and the amount of the untaught amount of the number of AT games to be taught are added to the lottery (teaching amount lottery, etc.), which increases the variety of freeze game, etc., and reduces the feeling of a fixed race.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the AT state (specialized state) is provided with a function (specialized transition means) that transitions to a specific AT state (specialized state) in which the uninstructed amount of AT game numbers can be instructed or suggested in multiple batches through pseudo play. Therefore, in the AT state, the game can be progressed while always hoping for a transition to the specific AT state, and it is possible to improve the playability after transition to the AT state.

In addition, in the AT state, if a winning combination that may result in an AT game being added is won, a lottery is held to transition to a specific AT state. Therefore, every time there is an opportunity to increase (add) the amount of AT games, players can play in the hope of the specific AT state occurring, which can lead to improved presentation, etc.

Furthermore, even in a specific AT state, a freeze game does not necessarily occur in every game, and there are cases where it does not occur. This increases the opportunities to enjoy the specific AT state for a longer period of time, and increases the variety of games played. Also, in a specific AT state, even if a freeze game does not occur, there is a relatively high probability that an additional number of games will occur. However, if a freeze game does not occur, the system is configured to teach only a portion of the number of games that have been added (awarded), or to not teach any at all. This increases the number of games that are left uninstructed, and increases the enjoyment when a freeze game occurs.

In addition, it is possible to know when the number of instructed AT games will reach 0, and if there is an uninstructed number of games remaining, that number of games will be instructed. This makes it possible to smartly inform the player that there is still an amount of AT games remaining, and thus the continuation of the AT state. Furthermore, the instructed game number counter makes it relatively easy to manage the remaining number of AT games instructed to the player, and it is also relatively easy to set effects such as when the instructed amount has run out or is about to run out.

In addition, if the uninstructed amount of the AT game is less than a specified amount (50 games in this example), the uninstructed amount of the AT game is not taught or suggested by freeze play. This makes it possible to maintain the value of the freeze play (pseudo stop play) at a specified level or higher, which contributes to improving the presentation, etc. Furthermore, any uninstructed amount of the AT game that is less than the specified amount is reliably taught without being left behind by any method other than freeze play.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the settings of the freeze game (AT start freeze game, specific AT freeze game) can be changed according to the uninstructed amount of the granted AT game number. For example, when the uninstructed amount of the AT game number is large, the number of pseudo stop games is more likely to be set than when it is small. For this reason, for example, in the case where the control is premised on the stop display or the pseudo-stopped display of the symbol that is pseudo-stopped when the pseudo stop game of the freeze game is executed, if the 7 symbol alignment corresponding to the addition of the game number is stopped and displayed when the pseudo stop game is executed, the 7 symbol alignment is pseudo-stopped and the 7 symbol alignment is overlapped, that is, the grant of the AT state is transitioned (stepped up) to a more preferable content for the player, it is possible to provide a performance that gives a stronger impression to the player. Furthermore, when a pseudo-stop game is started, the seven symbols that should be displayed as a pseudo-stop are not displayed as a pseudo-stop, but a different seven symbol arrangement (for example, white 7 → red 7) is displayed as a pseudo-stop, creating a surprise effect, which can improve the presentation of the freeze game.

Here, red 7s are associated with a greater number of added games than white 7s. This makes it possible to enrich the presentation when the player transitions to the long-awaited situation of being granted the AT state. As a result, it is possible to improve the presentation and, ultimately, to increase interest. In the second embodiment, white 7s correspond to an addition of 50 games, and red 7s correspond to an addition of 100 games, making the pseudo stop game relatively easy to understand, and therefore making it possible to avoid situations where the presentation is difficult to understand and the player is unable to concentrate on the presentation.

In addition, the spacing between the white 7s and the red 7s is the same on the left reel 42L, the center reel 42M, and the right reel 42R. For this reason, it is possible to pseudo-display a set of red 7s by displacing each of the three reels by the same amount from a state in which a set of white 7s is displayed as stopped or pseudo-stopped on the reel unit 41. Therefore, it is relatively easy to control the display of a set of red 7s as pseudo-stopped from a state in which a set of white 7s is displayed as stopped or pseudo-stopped (and to control the display of a set of white 7s as pseudo-stopped from a state in which a set of red 7s is displayed as pseudo-stopped).

Furthermore, the effect display device 15 displays images that mimic the pseudo-stop display of the white 7 symbol combination and the red 7 symbol combination in the pseudo-stop game, and also displays an instruction on the meaning of the pseudo-stop display. This makes it possible to more easily convey to the player the meaning of the pseudo-stop display of the matching white 7s and red 7s. Furthermore, even if it is derived that a pseudo-stop display is likely to occur but is not actually performed (for example, the speed at which the symbols change may slow down and the pseudo-stop display may continue, or the speed may be increased again), it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that a pseudo-stop display has occurred.

In addition, in the freeze game of the second embodiment, there is not only a pattern in which a pseudo stop game in which a line of white 7s is pseudo-stopped is executed multiple times, but also a pattern in which a pseudo stop game in which a line of reds is pseudo-stopped is executed multiple times, and a pattern in which a pseudo stop game in which a line of white 7s is pseudo-stopped is executed in combination with a pseudo stop game in which a line of red 7s is pseudo-stopped. Therefore, even after the pseudo stop game has started, the player can be interested in what is pseudo-stopped, and the playability of the freeze game can be improved.

By operating the left stop switch 72 when the BAR symbol is displayed generally within the display window 31L on the spinning left reel 42L, it is possible to perform a cherry or watermelon follow-up (to prevent missing out) on the left reel 42L. Here, if you are aiming for the BAR symbol on the left reel 42L as usual, the white 7 symbol will not be drawn into the display window 31L, so it is possible to prevent the white 7 symbol from unintentionally lining up in a specific AT state (unless the configuration is such that a cherry or watermelon win is definitively displayed as a cherry or watermelon win). Furthermore, by operating a BAR symbol (number 19 on the left reel 42L in FIG. 7) that does not have a cherry symbol underneath it, one symbol below the display window 31L, a white 7 can be drawn into the display window 31L if a cherry or watermelon is followed and push order replay A is won, improving the playability for advanced players. However, the structure may also be such that the white 7 cannot be drawn into the display window 31L when a cherry or watermelon is followed.

In addition, when a role other than the push order replay is won in a specific AT state, some of the AT games awarded in the winning game may be instructed as being added, and some may not be instructed, and all of the awarded AT game numbers may not be instructed. When a freeze game occurs in a specific AT state, the number of games that have been accumulated as uninstructed may be instructed all at once. This allows for variation in the remaining number of games instructed in pseudo-stop play. In other words, it is possible to create unexpected patterns in pseudo-stop play, such as the amount of game number instruction being greater than expected, and to increase the player's expectations. This allows for a departure from the stereotypical and unchanging presentation of pseudo-stop play, and further increases interest in pseudo-stop play.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example:

(a-1: Application to other gaming machines) In the above embodiment, a specific example was shown for a slot machine 10, but the invention may also be applied to various gaming machines such as pachinko machines, arrange ball machines, and similar mahjong ball machines, or gaming machines that combine slot machines and pachinko machines.

The basic structure of a pachinko machine is "a game area to which a game ball launched by a launching means is guided, a start ball entry means (start ball entry device, start chucker) into which a game ball moving through the game area can enter, a start ball entry detection means for detecting that a game ball has entered the start ball entry means, a variable ball entry means (variable ball entry device, attacker) that changes state between an open state in which a game ball moving through the game area can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a special game state (the start ball entry detection means a big win state or a small win state in which the variable ball entry means is opened based on the detection of the big win state or the small win state; a high probability state in which the probability of winning the win/lose lottery is increased; and a main control means for holding a win/lose lottery to determine whether or not a high ball entry state in which the game ball is likely to enter the starting winning means is generated, and holding a win/lose lottery to determine whether or not a high ball entry state in which the game ball is likely to enter the starting winning means is generated, and generating the special game state if the win/lose lottery is won. The pachinko machine may also include a firing operation means (handle) that is operable by the player and causes the firing means to fire the game ball with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation, a variable display means that starts a varying display of the identification information when a win/loss lottery is held and is capable of executing a varying display of the identification information that informs the player of the result of the win/loss lottery (capable of displaying a stationary display of the identification information corresponding to the result of the win/loss lottery), a performance display means (performance display device) that is performed in conjunction with the varying display of the identification information of the variable display means and is capable of deriving a performance display that informs or suggests the result of the win/loss lottery, and a sub-control means that controls the performance display means based on information from the main control means.

Here, the variable display means and the performance display means may be configured as a reel body (a cylinder, a box, an endless band, etc., to which multiple types of identification information are attached and which can be variably displayed so that the identification information can be sequentially viewed by the player). Furthermore, a display means for performance and guidance of game progress, such as a liquid crystal display, an EL display, or a dot matrix display, may be provided separately from the reel body. Also, the performance display means may be provided with, for example, three pattern variable areas in which decorative patterns each having a number from 1 to 9 are variably displayed, and the winning of a 10-round jackpot is taught by stopping and displaying a 7 pattern as a double number, the winning of either a 10-round jackpot or a 4-round jackpot is taught by stopping and displaying other odd-numbered patterns as a double number, and the winning of either a 10-round jackpot, a 4-round jackpot, or a 4-round regular jackpot is taught by stopping and displaying even-numbered patterns as a double number. In addition, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a state in which they are pseudo-stopped and then changed again, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in a state more desirable for the player. Also, even if the player wins a special game state (e.g., a guaranteed jackpot) that is more desirable for the player in the winning/losing lottery, the performance display of the performance display means may derive a state in which a different special game information may have been won, and the performance display means may be configured to teach the player that the special game state is more desirable for the player in a display state in which a different special game information may have been won, and to display the corresponding state.

The variable display means may be composed of a plurality of light-emitting bodies, or may be composed of a digital display device such as a segment display device or a liquid crystal display device. Furthermore, the performance display means may also be composed of a digital display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In addition, the performance display means may be capable of executing a performance in which the identification information of the performance display means can be stopped and displayed based on a predetermined operation by the player (the timing of the operation or the result of a lottery performed based on the operation), and the performance may be in a form that teaches the content corresponding to the display content of the variable display means (a repeating odd number, and a teaching of the granting of a special probability mode that is easier to win in a win/lose lottery than in the normal mode), or in a form that is merely suggestive (a repeating even number where it is not clear whether the normal mode or the special probability mode will be granted).

Another type of pachinko machine may include, for example, a specific area into which a game ball moving through the game area can enter, a variable ball entry means having an opening/closing means (wing member) that can be changed between an open state that allows balls to enter the specific area and a closed state that prohibits balls from entering the specific area, a specific ball entry means and a non-specific ball entry means into which game balls that have entered the specific area can enter, a specific ball entry detection means for detecting game balls that have entered the specific ball entry means, a start ball entry means that is provided outside the specific area and into which a game ball moving through the game area can enter, a start ball entry detection means for detecting game balls that have entered the start ball entry means, and a main control unit that performs a lottery to determine whether or not a special game state (jackpot state) will be granted. The system may be applied to a pachinko machine having a special variable ball entry means that is opened when a special game state occurs, and a main control means that performs a winning/losing lottery based on the detection of the initial ball entry detection means, and if the winning/losing lottery is not successful, performs an auxiliary winning/losing lottery (small winning lottery) to determine whether to grant an auxiliary special game state (small winning state) in which the opening/closing means of the special variable ball entry means is opened, and when a game ball enters a specific area, a predetermined number of game values (game balls) are granted to the player depending on whether the game ball enters the specific ball entry means or the non-specific ball entry means, and when the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, a special game state is granted.

Furthermore, when a small win state is won, the number of times the variable ball entry means is opened may be determined, and the number of times may be displayed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. In addition, a normal mode and an advantageous mode in which the variable ball entry means is opened more times than in the normal mode may be provided as game modes. In addition, the variable information may be configured to be able to be reserved and stored, and a reserved icon may be displayed on the display means corresponding to the reserved and stored variable information, and the reserved icon may suggest and display the contents of the variable information that has not been executed. Furthermore, when setting the reserved icon, it is desirable to check whether there is a change in the game mode until the corresponding variable information is executed (if the game mode may be changed due to the jackpot state, check whether the jackpot is reserved (and also the type of jackpot), or if the game mode is changed due to the number of changes, check the number of changes), and set it without any contradictions.

(a-2) For example, the variable ball entry means may be provided with a first variable ball entry means and a second variable ball entry means, the second variable ball entry means being provided with a specific entry section into which a game ball that has entered the second variable ball entry means can enter, and a distribution means that changes the state between a state in which the game ball that has entered the second variable ball entry means is permitted to enter the specific entry section and a state in which it is not permitted, and the invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a high probability state is imparted based on the game ball entering the specific entry section of the second variable ball entry means in a special game state.

(a-3) Furthermore, for example, a first variable ball entry means and a second variable ball entry means are provided as the variable ball entry means, and in a low ball entry state, it is configured so that it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second start ball entry means, and a ball entering the first start ball entry means does not result in a small win state, and when a ball enters the first start ball entry means and a special game state is won, a special game state occurs in which the first variable ball entry means is in an open state, and there is a possibility that a ball entering the second start ball entry means will win the special game state with the same probability as a win/lose lottery based on a ball entering the first start ball entry means, and This configuration allows a small win state to be won with a higher probability than the special game state, and in the small win state, the second variable ball entry means is opened, and the second variable ball entry means is provided with a specific winning section into which a game ball that has entered the second variable ball entry means can enter, and a distribution means that changes its state between a state in which the game ball that has entered the second variable ball entry means is allowed to enter the specific ball entry section and a state in which it is not allowed to enter, and this may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a game ball that has entered the second variable ball entry means in the small win state has a probability of entering the specific ball entry section with a probability higher than 1/10, generating a special game state.

(a-4) In addition, when one of the first special display means, which executes a variable display of identification information based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first start ball entry means, and the second special display means, which executes a variable display of identification information based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start ball entry means, is displaying a variable display, the variable display of the other may not be performed (is put on hold), or the variable displays of the first special display means and the second special display means may be configured to be executable simultaneously. In other words, if there is a hold for each of the first variable display on the first special display means and the second variable display on the second special display means, the corresponding variable display is executed (except during a winning state).

(a-5) In addition, pachinko machines are configured so that game balls are paid out as game value to an upper tray or a lower tray into which a player can put and take out game balls, but for example, game balls that are shot by a launching device and guided to the play area may be circulated and used inside the pachinko machine (or a device for cleaning the game balls may be interposed), and the player may not be able to take out the game balls (from the front side of the pachinko machine). In other words, while a configuration related to a tank to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are replenished is unnecessary, a mechanism for bringing game balls discharged from the play area to the launching device (a storage section for game balls, a mechanism for sending game balls from the storage section to the launching device; it may also serve as a storage section, or may basically send game balls only by height difference, or may send game balls by an electric sending device) is provided, and a configuration for discharging and refilling game balls from the pachinko machine for maintenance and movement of the game balls and the pachinko machine is provided. Also, the mechanism that brings the game balls discharged from the game area to the launching device may be configured to deliver the game balls (in a corresponding number) to a position where the game balls can be seen by the player, and may be configured so that the player cannot touch the game balls (because they are covered with a transparent plate or the like).

(a-6) A gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine (a reel-type gaming machine that uses balls), that is, a gaming machine that has a ball insertion and ball payout function like a pachinko machine instead of the medal insertion and medal payout function of a slot machine. The basic configuration is as follows: "a gaming machine comprising: an insertion device which has a ball receiving tray (upper tray, etc.) and performs an insertion process of taking in gaming balls from the ball receiving tray; a dispensing device which dispenses gaming balls into the ball receiving tray; and variable display means which dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, wherein operation of a start operation means is enabled when a gaming ball is inserted by the insertion device; the dynamic display of the identification information is started due to operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever); the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed; and a special gaming state generating means which generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player, with the necessary condition that the definitive identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information, wherein the gaming machine uses balls as gaming media (shares the gaming balls of a pachinko machine), requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and is configured so that a large number of gaming balls are dispensed in the special gaming state." If such gaming machines were used in place of slot machines, the amusement hall would be able to handle only balls as gaming value, eliminating problems seen in current amusement halls that mix pachinko machines and slot machines, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as gaming value, and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed.

(b-1: Detection of reel rotation position) In the above embodiment, the rotation position of the left reel 42L, etc. is detected by measuring the ON time t1, t3 corresponding to each sensor cut band 56, 57 (protrusion 56a, 57a) and the OFF time t2, t4 corresponding to each sensor cut band 56, 57. Not limited to this, the main control device 131 as a drive signal counting means may count the number of drive signals (number of pulses) required for the angle change (movement) from the starting end 56s, 57s to the end end 56e, 57e of each sensor cut band 56, 57, and detect the rotation position of the left reel 42L, etc. based on the difference in the number of drive signals corresponding to each sensor cut band 56, 57. In this way, it is not necessary to separately set a timer, etc. for measuring the ON time, etc., and it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load. Of course, in addition to this configuration, the number of drive signals required for the angle change between each sensor cut band 56, 57 (non-detection section) may be counted, and the rotational position of the left reel 42L, etc. may be detected based on this. Furthermore, the various drive signal numbers may be stored in advance in ROM 152 as drive signal number storage means, and the rotational position may be detected by comparing these with the counted numbers of drive signals. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load without performing complex calculations, etc. Therefore, the main control device 131 constitutes the drive signal counting means and the comparison means.

In the above embodiment, the rotational position of the left reel 42L, etc. is detected based on the difference between the ON times t1, t3, which are the passing times of each sensor cut band 56, 57, and the OFF times t2, t4, which are the passing times between each sensor cut band 56, 57. This is not limiting, and the rotational position of the left reel 42L, etc. may be detected based only on the difference between the ON times t1, t3, which are the passing times of each sensor cut band 56, 57, i.e., the difference in the length of each sensor cut band 56, 57 (protrusions 56a, 57a).

In the above embodiment, the sensor cut bands 56, 57 are arranged at equal angular intervals (180° apart), but they do not have to be arranged at equal angular intervals. However, as mentioned above, considering the balance of the left reel 42L and the like and the efficiency of detecting the rotational position, it is preferable to arrange them at equal intervals.

In the above embodiment, a transmissive photosensor in which a light-emitting element 55a and a light-receiving element 55b are held at a predetermined distance is used as the reel index sensor 55 as the detection means, but the detection means is not limited to this. For example, a reflective photosensor in which the light-emitting element as the light-emitting section and the light-receiving element as the light-receiving section are arranged on the same side of the detected section (protrusions 56a, 57a) and the position (presence or absence) of the detected section is detected by the reflected light from the detected section may be used as the detection means.

(b-2) In the above embodiment, the reel index sensor 55 outputs a detection signal to the main control device 131 when it detects the sensor cut bands 56 and 57, and the main control device 131 calculates the on-time, which is the time when the detection signal is received (on-time), by measuring the time when the detection signal is not received (off-time), and calculates the off-time, which is the time when the detection signal is not received. Not limited to this, the reel index sensor 55 may be configured to output a detection signal to the main control device 131 when it detects a section where the sensor cut bands 56 and 57 are not provided, and not to output a detection signal when it detects the sensor cut bands 56 and 57. In this case, the main control device 131 calculates the detection time (off-time of the detection signal) that means that the sensor cut bands 56 and 57 have been detected by measuring the time when the detection signal is not received (off-time of the detection signal), and calculates the non-detection time (off-time of the detection signal) that means that the sensor cut bands 56 and 57 have not been detected by measuring the time when the detection signal is received (on-time of the detection signal).

(b-3) In the above embodiment, if the stop switches 72 to 74 are pressed during the invalid period, the CPU 151 of the main control device 131 is configured to invalidate the ON signals of the stop detection sensors 72a to 74a. However, the stop detection sensors 72a to 74a may not output an ON signal to the main control device 131 during the invalid period, i.e., the stop detection sensors 72a to 74a may be disabled. One example of a means for realizing such a configuration is to provide an AND circuit between the stop detection sensors 72a to 74a and the main control device 131. The stop detection sensors 72a to 74a are configured to output an ON signal to the main control device 131 when they receive both a signal from the main control device 131 and a signal from the stop switches 72 to 74, and the main control device 131 is configured to output a signal to the stop detection sensors 72a to 74a during the valid period. With this configuration, the CPU 151 of the main control device 131 only needs to turn on the signal and check whether it has received the ON signal from the stop detection sensors 72a to 74a, so that the processing load can be reduced. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the pressing operation of the stop switches 72 to 74 is invalidated during the invalid period. As a means for realizing this configuration, an example is provided with a pressing operation restriction member so that the stop switches 72 to 74 cannot be pressed during the invalid period. Specifically, a notch is provided on the back of the stop switches 72 to 74 when viewed from the front of the slot machine 10, and a solenoid is normally engaged with this notch. This solenoid is connected to the main control device 131 by electrical wiring, and when the valid period begins, the engagement between the solenoid and the notch is released by an electrical signal from the main control device 131, and the stop switches 72 to 74 can be pressed. With this configuration, the stop switches 72 to 74 cannot be pressed, making it possible to inform the player that the stop switches 72 to 74 are disabled.

(b-4) In the above embodiment, a two-phase stepping motor employing a 1-2 phase excitation method was used as the drive motor, but a four-phase stepping motor employing a 3-4 phase excitation method or a five-phase stepping motor employing a 4-5 phase excitation method may also be used.

(c; Variable display means) In the above embodiment, a slot machine having three reels in parallel and five effective lines has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and may be, for example, a slot machine having one, two, or four or more reels in parallel, or a slot machine having one, two, three, four, or six or more effective lines. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to so-called type A slot machines, and may be applied to any type of slot machine, such as type B, type C, a combination of types A and C, or a combination of types B and C, and it is clear that in any case, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiment will be obtained.

In the above embodiment, each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R of the reel unit 41 constitutes a rotating body, but the rotating body may have other configurations. For example, an endless belt or drum may be used to perform variable display of symbols as identification information. The reels may rotate horizontally (the axis direction is the left-right direction of the slot machine 10) instead of vertically (the axis direction is the up-down direction). Furthermore, a variable display means capable of performing variable display of identification information may be configured by a digital display device such as a liquid crystal display device, an EL display device, or a dot matrix display device (multiple light-emitting bodies). In addition, the symbols of each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., but may also be geometric lines, figures, etc. In addition, the symbols may be configured by light, color, etc., or by three-dimensional shapes, etc., or by a combination of these. In other words, the symbols may function as information (identification information) with identifiability.

(d; Bonus, Replay Time, Assist Time) The slot machine 10 of the first embodiment is equipped with BB and RB, and the slot machine 10 of the second embodiment is not equipped with a bonus, but the type and content of the bonus are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the first embodiment is configured to change the RT state (so-called A+RT machine), and the second embodiment is configured to have no change in the RT state, but the configuration is not particularly limited to this, and the number of types of RT states, the content of the RT state (probability of winning a replay, etc.), and the transition conditions (start and end), etc., can be changed as appropriate. For example, a configuration may be used in which a bonus is basically won but no prize is won, that is, the replay probability is relatively increased based on the bonus win, and the random number value of a pure loss corresponds to a replay, but since a pure loss is not won, the game proceeds without a bonus being lined up.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, a push order role is provided, and the configuration is such that it can switch between a state in which the push order role is instructed (assisted) (AT state) and a state in which it is not instructed (so-called AT machine), but the contents of the AT state (such as whether to inform the player of the probability of winning a specified role or which of the simultaneous winning roles), the number of types of AT states, and the transition conditions can be changed as appropriate. In addition, it may be a configuration in which there is a change in the RT state and a change in the AT state (so-called ART machine). Furthermore, it may be a configuration in which there is no change in the RT state and no change in the AT state.

(e; Effective lines, winning combinations) In the above embodiment, the effective lines are an upper line, a central line, a lower line, a downward-right line, and an upward-right line, but the number and shape of the effective lines are not particularly limited, and may be one or more, four or less, or six or more. Also, the effective lines do not have to be a straight line, and may be mountain-shaped (lower left, middle center, lower right), V-shaped (upper left, middle center, upper right), spaced-apart (upper left, upper center, lower right, etc.), or outside-frame (middle left, upper center, upper right frame, etc.).

In addition, the combination of symbols that constitute each winning combination is not particularly limited and can be changed appropriately for each machine. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the combination of "white 7 symbols" lined up on a straight effective line corresponds to the special replay A, but for example, the effective line may not be straight (for example, it is composed of the lower left, middle center, and lower right), and a line different from the effective line (for example, the horizontal line in the middle) may be made to be a pseudo effective line in appearance (hereinafter, "designated line"), and a guide game that aims for the "white 7 symbol" on the designated line may be executed (the combination of symbols that constitute the actual combination is not white 7 alignment, but when the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the white 7s may be aligned on the designated line). For example, the bottom left reel, the bottom middle reel, and the middle right reel may be active lines, with special replay A being won by a bell on the bottom left reel, a cherry or bell on the bottom middle reel, and a white 7 or watermelon on the middle right reel, and when special replay A is won, the white 7s may be aligned in the center of the display of reel unit 41 (the central pseudo active line).

In the second embodiment, a minor feature (push order bell) is provided that is stopped and displayed by performing the stop operation in a predetermined order (the correct order), and the appearance (stop type) of the push order bell when it is stopped and displayed (a winning prize) is that the bell patterns are lined up on the winning line, just like the winning bell pattern, but the bell patterns may not be lined up on the winning line (for example, they may be lined up in a V shape, such as in the upper left, middle center, and upper right, or in a mountain shape, such as in the lower left, middle center, and lower right). In addition, if the push order bell is won, a "miss" pattern combination that does not award a medal, etc., is stopped and displayed by performing the stop operation in the incorrect order.

(f; No occurrence of pseudo game) In the first embodiment, the freeze game (including oscillation) is always performed at the start of RT2, and in the second embodiment, the freeze game is always performed at the start of the AT state, but the timing of the guide game and the freeze game is not particularly limited and can be set appropriately. For example, if there is no instruction (uninstructed number of games) greater than the number of games instructed in the guide game, the subsequent freeze game may not be performed, or even if there is an instruction (uninstructed number of games) greater than the number of games instructed in the guide game, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to perform the freeze game. Furthermore, for example, in the RT1 of the first embodiment, it may be configured to be possible to win a special replay C that transitions to RT2 but does not execute the freeze game. In addition, for example, as a premium effect, an intro game that is executed with a series of specific effects on the effect display device 15 from the RT2 transition game to a specified number of games, and a freeze game that includes an additional effect (pseudo stop display) at the beginning of the first game of a normal RT2 game that is executed following the intro game may be configured. It is also possible to embody the present invention in a slot machine that does not have a freeze game.

(g; Simultaneous winning of roles) In the above embodiment, the combination of roles that simultaneously win multiple roles in one winning/losing lottery is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the above first embodiment, if special replay A is won, special replay B is also won at the same time, but for example, if special replay A is not lined up by eyeballing (the timing of operating stop switches 72, 73, and 74 is poor and the white 7 pattern is not lined up), a normal replay instead of special replay B is lined up (a prize is won). It is also possible to configure it so that different roles do not win at the same time.

(h; lottery of roles) In the first embodiment, the special replay A is not won except in RT1. However, in RT2, the special replay A, the special replay B, and the fake replay are won, and a guide game is performed. In addition, if the special replay A and the special replay B are won, the number of games in RT2 may be added. Furthermore, the special replay A may be a push order replay, and if the push order is correct, the white 7 can be arranged (and the "white 7" may not be displayed when the identification information is displayed in the left display window 31L aiming for the "cherry"). In addition, when the special replay A is won, the push order that can stop the "white 7" may or may not be instructed in the performance display device 15. In addition, in the second embodiment, the "push order" is managed by the main control device 131, but it may be managed by the sub-control device 111.

(i; duration of the bonus state) In the above embodiment, the duration of the bonus state in which the probability of replaying is increased and the push order of the push order role is navigated is determined by the number of games (xx games remaining), but it may also be determined by, for example, the difference between the number of medals inserted and the number of medals paid out (awarded) (xx medals remaining; this not only decreases when a small role is won, but can also increase when a miss is won), or by the number of medals paid out (xx medals remaining; this will decrease unless a corresponding role is added), or until a specified special game state (e.g., a bonus) is won.

In addition, game points may be awarded as the game progresses in a bonus state (such as an AT state) (for example, upon winning a specified small prize, or winning a point-awarding lottery at the time of such winning, or based on the number of games played), and when the game points exceed a specified value, the specified value of points may be converted into a specified bonus, such as a pseudo bonus (which may be a period in which the presentation is changed to play a number of games corresponding to the amount of the added number of games, or a period in which the content of the specified lottery is different (for example, it is easier to add on, etc.)).

In addition, a special privilege state may be provided that continues until the player wins the drop lottery (until the player misses the continuation lottery). For example, when the special privilege state is entered, a predetermined privilege may be granted (for example, the remaining period of the AT state or RT2 state is added), and the player is set to a state in which the player draws a drop lottery when the lever is turned on (the drop probability may be constant, or a different drop probability may be set by lottery. Here, by inserting a freeze game when the lever is turned on, it is possible to improve the presentation, etc. Also, a minimum guaranteed number of times may or may not be set). When the player does not win the drop lottery, a predetermined privilege may be granted (for example, the remaining period of the AT state or RT2 state is added), and the player is set to a state in which the player draws a drop lottery when the lever is turned on, and the player is set to return to the AT state or RT2 state before the transition to the special privilege state when the player wins the drop lottery. Furthermore, by associating a win in the fall lottery with a specified role (for example, a fall at a specified rate when a replay is won), it is easy for players to understand, and it is possible to get players interested in the reel stopping operation, etc. In addition, it is possible to configure it so that a fall lottery does not fall for a specified number of games by winning a specified role (or by winning a lottery held at the time of the win). In this case, the specified number of games may be instructed or suggested by continuing the specified action of one freeze game multiple times.

Also, for example, the right to move to the bonus state is obtained → the lever is turned on to move to the bonus state, the initial bonus is awarded, and a drop lottery is held → when the lever is turned on for the next game, if the player has fallen in the previous drop lottery, the bonus state ends. If the player has not fallen, a freeze game is triggered, a bonus for the continuation is awarded, and a drop lottery is held. Here, if the drop lottery is not won, a lottery for an additional bonus for the continuation is held, and a freeze game corresponding to the winning amount is added.

(j; advantageous state) It is possible to provide an advantageous state in which a predetermined lottery is held, for example an RT state (RT1, RT2 in the first embodiment above) that is advantageous to the player, or a lottery for transition to an AT state, and a non-advantageous state in which the predetermined lottery is not held. In a non-advantageous state, a transition to an advantageous state may occur upon winning a predetermined role or winning a prize, and in an advantageous state, a transition to a non-advantageous state may occur upon winning a predetermined role or winning a prize, the end of a predetermined state, the end of a predetermined number of games, the completion of the payout of a predetermined number of medals, etc.

Also, for example, in the second embodiment described above, it is possible to provide an advantageous zone in which an AT lottery that transitions to the AT state (can also be the ART state) can be entered, and a non-advantageous zone (normal zone) in which this cannot be entered. Triggers for transitioning from a non-advantageous zone to an advantageous zone include, for example, winning the target role, winning the lottery that is held when the target role is won, and playing a specified number of games in the non-advantageous zone. In addition, advantageous zones include during a bonus, an AT state (can also be the ART state), and a preparation state in which it has been determined to transition to the AT state (can also be the ART state).

In this example, if "Replay", "Watermelon", or "Cherry" is won in the normal zone, a lottery for transition to a favorable zone is held to transition to the favorable zone. The probability of winning the lottery for transition to a favorable zone is higher for Cherry (e.g., 7/64 with a setting of 6) than for Replay (e.g., 1/1024 with a setting of 6), and higher for Watermelon (e.g., 3/16 with a setting of 6) than for Cherry. In this example, other small symbols and bonus symbols do not win, but they may be made to win (e.g., transition to the favorable zone after the bonus ends). Furthermore, if the lottery for transition to a favorable zone is won, transition is made to a Chance Zone of 10 or 20 games, which is an advantageous zone.

Here, an example of the chance zone will be described. For example, in a configuration in which no AT lottery is performed in the normal section, and even if push order replays A and B are won, the AT state is not entered and normal replays are aligned. In the chance zone, the AT state is entered in some cases when push order replays A and B are won, and the push order of push order replays A and B is instructed (as long as the push order is followed, the corresponding push order replay is stopped and displayed), and from the next game, the AT state is entered with a freeze game (if push order replays A and B are stopped and displayed, all of the granted number of games is instructed, and if they are not stopped and displayed, only the minimum number of games is instructed). Note that in the chance zone, even in 10% of cases when watermelon or cherry is won, the AT lottery may be won, and from the next game, the AT state may be entered with a freeze game.

As another example of the chance zone, for example, points are awarded according to the winning combination during the 10-game or 20-game chance zone (for example, 50 points for a winning and winning combination of Push Order Replay A, 10 points for a winning and non-winning combination of Push Order Replay A, 100 points for a winning and winning combination of Push Order Replay B, 10 points for a winning and non-winning combination of Push Order Replay B, 50 points for a winning combination of watermelon, 30 points for a winning combination of cherry, and 20 points for 25% of winning combinations of bells and misses). If a win is achieved, instructions are given, and in some cases where such instructions are given, some or all of the push order replays A and B may be given (basically no push order instructions are given), and if the points reach a specified number (e.g., 100 points) or more by the end of the chance zone, a transition to the AT state occurs (if the specified number of points is exceeded during the chance zone period, the next game may be configured to include a freeze game (a guide game in the freeze game may be played) to indicate the transition to the AT state and the number of games).

In this example, the winning probability of the advantageous zone transition lottery is different depending on the six-stage setting value of the slot machine 10, but it may be the same (furthermore, the advantageous zone transition lottery may not be executed when a role with a different winning rate depending on the setting is won, or when a role with a different winning probability depending on the game state is won, or the winning probability may not differ depending on the state). Also, the chance zone may be configured to have multiple modes with different winning probabilities of the AT lottery. Also, the types and numbers of small roles such as watermelon, replay roles such as replay, and bonus roles, and the design of the patterns are not particularly limited, and furthermore, the winning expectation of the advantageous zone transition lottery and the AT lottery when the small role is won, the expectation of overlap with the bonus, etc. are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the expected probability of winning in a given lottery may be higher when cherries are stopped and displayed in the middle of the left display window 31L, or when cherries are stopped and displayed in a line in the left, middle, and right pattern display areas, than when cherries are stopped and displayed in the upper or lower rows of the left display window 31L. Also, as a modified example, the AT lottery may be performed in association with multiple small winning combinations, such that the probability of winning in the AT lottery in the chance zone is higher for watermelons (e.g., 3/16 with a setting of 6) than for bells (e.g., 1/32 with a setting of 6), higher for cherries (e.g., 5/16 with a setting of 6) than for watermelons, and higher for bonuses (e.g., 1/1 with all settings of 6; a configuration in which a lottery is not performed to respond to winning) than for cherries.

In this example, the AT state ends when a set number of games that is set at the start of the AT state and may be added (topped off) in a series of favorable zones including the AT state is consumed. When the favorable zone ends (when transitioning to the AT state, the favorable zone basically ends in the AT state), the performance display device 15 derives a result display (instruction of the number of medals acquired, the number of AT games consumed, and the number of bonuses) that indicates the results of play in the series of favorable zones (it may also be possible to display a background according to the results of the series of favorable zones or to display a background suggesting the settings), resets the various counts of the favorable zone, and then transitions to the normal zone.

In addition, an upper limit may be set for the advantageous zone. For example, when the number of games played after transitioning to the advantageous zone reaches a first specific number (e.g., 1500 games) or when the number of medals won by the player in the advantageous zone reaches a second specific number (e.g., 2400 medals), the advantageous zone ends and transitions to the normal zone. In addition, when it is determined that the number of uninstructed AT games cannot be completed, including the number of instructed (and unexecuted) AT games, by the time the advantageous zone ends, or a situation equivalent thereto, the number of uninstructed AT games may remain uninstructed (no performance that instructs or suggests an addition (freeze play, guide play, etc.) is performed), and the AT state may be continued up to the upper limit (a dedicated ending performance may be derived).

Also, as a chance zone, a transition to an AT state when a predetermined condition is achieved may be provided. (k: performance means) A device capable of displaying a performance pattern may be provided separately from the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R. Of course, such display may be performed by the performance display device 15 of the above embodiment. It is possible to omit the performance display device 15, but by providing a display device (performance display means) separate from the reel unit 41, it is possible to improve the performance.

Also, a movable part that can be linked to the performance of the performance display means may be provided. For example, a covering means may be provided in front of the performance display device 15, which can change between a covered state in which the entire display unit of the performance display device 15 is invisible or difficult to see from the front, an exposed state in which the entire display unit is visible or easy to see from the front, and a partially covered state in which part of the display unit is invisible or difficult to see from the front. The covering means may be configured as a movable part such as a shutter that is driven and controlled by a driving means, or as a transparent display device. Furthermore, a covering means may be provided in front of the reel unit (for example, the stopping order of the reels in the second embodiment may be configured to be instructable by the covering means).

In addition, in a machine with a bonus role or a machine with an AT state, a continuous performance that is performed over multiple games on the performance display device 15 may be performed after winning the bonus or AT state, and in order to improve playability, a fake continuous performance may be performed even if the bonus or AT state is not won. If a bonus or AT state is won in a game during which a fake continuous performance is performed, the content of the continuous performance may be changed from the content that was expected to be a "miss" to the content that was won in the bonus or AT state. Furthermore, in a continuous performance for instructing a win of a bonus or AT state, if an additional bonus is won (if an ART is also won in a machine with a bonus or ART, or if an additional AT game number is won in a machine with an AT), the content of the number of games that teaches the win may be changed to a content that teaches the additional win. In addition, even if a bonus that was not expected at the beginning of the continuous performance is won during the continuous performance, the continuous performance may not teach the win.

(l; Counting display) In the above embodiment, the number of medals won by the player and the number of games remaining are displayed by the performance display device 15, but instead of or in addition to this configuration, a display device that can display the number of medals won and the number of games remaining may be provided. Also, it may be possible to switch between displaying the number of medals paid out and the number of medals won.

(m; effect button) The effect button 101 in the above embodiment is merely configured so that the operation part, which is a part that can be operated by the player, can be displaced between an operation position and a non-operation position. However, for example, the operation part may be configured so that it can be displaced when it is not being operated. Also, for example, a predetermined display device may be built into the effect button 101, or a vibration means may be provided so that the hand of the player who operates the effect button 101 feels a vibration. In addition, the effect button 101 may be configured to be able to suggest the probability of a big win depending on the state of the effect button 101. In addition, the LED built into the effect button 101 may be configured so that the light emission state (light emission color, etc.) is different between a button disabled state in which the visible state of the slot machine 10 does not change even when the effect button 101 is operated, a button enabled state in which the visible state of the slot machine 10 changes when the effect button 101 is operated, and an operation state in which the effect button 101 is operated in the button enabled state (during operation or after operation).

(n; reserved icon) When the AT state is won, the number of games remaining in the AT is determined, and in a configuration in which the number of games remaining in the AT is instructed in a freeze game, the performance display device 15 may display a display suggesting the number of games to be added if a reverse rotation occurs prior to the reverse rotation of the reels. For example, when the freeze game starts, multiple treasure chests are displayed side by side on the left and right, and a reverse rotation may occur when the lever is turned on. When a reverse rotation occurs, the contents of the treasure chest on the left are revealed, and after the disclosure, the treasure chest is erased and one treasure chest is added to the right. The treasure chests are colored differently, and the number of games to be added (instructed) is suggested by the color. If a reverse rotation occurs when a treasure chest of a color corresponding to a large number of games is located on the left side, the player can proceed with the game with the feeling that a large number of games will be added. Of course, the number of games remaining in the AT will not be instructed (for example, if the number of remaining AT games that have not been instructed is 20, and a green treasure box is displayed indicating that 30 or more games will be added if a reverse rotation occurs, the reverse rotation will not occur, the freeze game will end, and the number of remaining AT games that have not been instructed will be instructed later. Alternatively, if the number of remaining AT games that have not been instructed is 20, only a blue or white treasure box indicating that 10 or more games will be added, or a yellow treasure box indicating that 20 or more games will be added, will be displayed). In addition, the freeze game may be configured to end not only when the number of remaining AT games that have not been instructed is insufficient or has run out, but also when a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to perform a reverse rotation based on the lever being turned on during the pseudo-stop display of the freeze game, and the result is a negative result.

(o: Mobile-linked game) In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to exchange data (so-called mobile-linked game) between the pachinko machine 10 and a server operated by a gaming machine manufacturer or the like via a communication mobile terminal owned by the player. Furthermore, when the mobile-linked game is ended, a two-dimensional code including the current game information is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, and the player reads the two-dimensional code with a mobile communication terminal and accesses the server with the mobile communication terminal, so that the game information is transmitted to the server. In this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 may be equipped with a fluctuation counter that counts the number of fluctuations of the special display devices 43a and 43b, a jackpot counter that counts the number of occurrences of various jackpot states, and the like, and may be configured so that the two-dimensional code displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 at the end of the mobile-linked game includes information indicating the values of the various counters. Furthermore, the two-dimensional code may also include information on the total number of game balls shot, the type and number of derived effects, the number of times the player operated the effect button 125 during the button effect, etc. In this case, the gaming machine manufacturer can grasp the game situation.

The counter value may be erased by being converted into a two-dimensional code, but otherwise may be stored (even if the power is turned off) (erased by turning the power on while operating the RAM clear switch). In addition, the player may be able to select from several types of tendencies in the behavior pattern of the pseudo-wing member 431 (for players playing mobile-linked games).

(p; real-time clock) A real-time clock capable of grasping the date and time may be provided, and the presentation mode may be derived according to the date and time information of the real-time clock. Also, the presentation that is likely to be selected may change depending on the time and date (the table for the presentation that is likely to be selected may change). For example, a real-time clock may be provided in the sub-control device 262, and multiple settlement time setting tables may be provided to be referenced when it is decided to lengthen the settlement presentation. If the time when it is decided to lengthen the settlement presentation is in the morning, the first settlement time setting table may be referenced, if it is in the afternoon (until night), the second settlement time setting table in which a longer time than the first settlement time setting table is likely to be set may be referenced, and if it is night (for example, after 9 p.m.) when the closing time of the game hall is approaching, the first settlement time setting table or the third settlement time setting table in which a shorter time than the first settlement time setting table is likely to be set may be referenced. Furthermore, a real-time clock may be provided in the main control device 261, and multiple variable time determination tables may be provided to be referenced when determining the variable time of the special display devices 43a and 43b, so that at night (e.g., after 9 p.m.), a variable time determination table that is likely to set a relatively short variable time may be selected.

(q; Setting by the player) In the above embodiment, the contents that can be set by the player's operation are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. In other words, in the above embodiment, by operating the performance button 101 when no game is being played, a menu screen is displayed on the performance display device 15, and it is possible to change the volume, change the brightness, and select a favorite character, but it may be possible to change the performance pattern on the decorative pattern display device 42, enter a password when playing a mobile-linked game, and output a two-dimensional code. As a change in the performance pattern, it may be possible to change the derivation ratio of a predetermined performance type, change the winning expectation of a predetermined performance, or set a setting to increase the derivation frequency of a predetermined character. Furthermore, a button for setting the volume and a button for setting the brightness may be provided, and the adjustment setting may be possible without opening the menu screen (it may be one button that can take a standard position, an increase position, and a decrease position, or it may be composed of an increase button and a decrease button). Furthermore, it may be possible to change the size and color of the characters displayed on the performance display device 15 based on the player's operation. As input means that can be used to make various settings, for example, a touch panel may be provided in a position that the player can touch (allowing for sensory adjustments) or multiple input buttons may be provided (allowing for more precise adjustments).

(r; Mode of freeze game) The mode of freeze game (pseudo game) of the reel unit 41 is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. In other words, freeze game basically includes behavior different from the reel fluctuation in a normal game (forward rotation in which the symbols are displaced from top to bottom), and the different behavior includes displacement in a direction different from the forward rotation (reverse rotation in which the symbols are displaced from bottom to top), stopping temporarily or vibrating slightly (for example, fine back and forth motion), the reel rotation speed (speed at which the symbols are displaced) is slow, the reel rotation speed changes, the display of the variations in the identification information of the multiple identification information columns each behaves independently (when the direction of rotation of a specific reel is In some cases, the reels may move in the opposite direction or at different moving speeds), or may repeat a pseudo-stop display and then move once or multiple times, or may perform acrobatic combinations (switching from "slow" to "fast" when the rotation speed of the adjacent reels switches from "fast" to "slow" in a configuration where the fluctuation speed is switched, or switching from "return" to "forward" when the adjacent reels switch from "forward" to "return" while reciprocating). Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a pattern is included in which the reels rotate in reverse and then are pseudo-stopped in a freeze game, but the reels may continue to rotate in reverse without being pseudo-stopped, or may move back and forth, so that no stopped state is derived. In addition, in order to reduce the burden on the reel unit 41, it is desirable to suppress as much as possible a sudden stop from a high-speed fluctuation state or a sudden switch to a displacement in the opposite direction.

In addition, the pseudo stop display may be configured to be able to be cancelled by a specified operation by the player (for example, by continuing to rotate in reverse). In other words, if the pattern displayed as stopped when the special variable display starts is not what the player wanted (due to a mistake in timing) and is not special replay A, it is possible to prevent a situation in which special replay B is pseudo-stopped multiple times in the pseudo stop game (making the player feel embarrassed) and causing a loss of interest.

In addition, for example, if a reel unit 41 is not provided and instead a specified digital display means (such as a liquid crystal display device) is used as the variable display means, the pseudo game may be a display of changing patterns (identification information) that are displayed in a variable manner (scrolling display, cyclic display such as display that switches in sequence, etc.) on the digital display means, and that include a different behavior from the pattern change in a normal game (forward rotation such as the pattern being displaced from top to bottom).

In addition, in the first embodiment, the white 7s are displayed as a stop or pseudo stop as an instruction to transition to RT2 or to add to the RT2 period, but in order to indicate a longer period of addition, the red 7s may be displayed as a pseudo stop (as a pseudo stop mode) as related identification information in the freeze game. In this case, in order to simplify the control when changing from the white 7s to the red 7s, it is desirable to have a configuration that can be easily changed, such as making the intervals (number of frames, number of pitches) between the white 7s and the red 7s the same on all reels. In addition, when controlling the white 7s to red 7s or the red 7s to white 7s in the freeze game, the control may be configured to be executed if the white 7s or red 7s are aligned based on information on whether or not the white 7s or red 7s are aligned at the start of the freeze game (at the end of the guide game), and not executed if they are aligned.

Furthermore, as a freeze game, it is not necessary to have a configuration that allows a pseudo stop display. For example, the reels may not rotate even when the start lever 71 is operated, and after a specified effect is performed on the effect display device 15, the reels may rotate forward, and the effect display device 15 may guide the pattern to be displayed as a stop, and the reels (pattern) may be displayed as a stop when the stop switch is operated. Or, the reels may rotate backward when the start lever 71 is operated (possibly with a swinging state in between, as in the above embodiment), and after a specified instruction is performed on the effect display device 15, the reels may return to rotating forward and the effect display device 15 may guide the pattern to be displayed as a stop, and the reels (pattern) may be displayed as a stop when the stop switch is operated.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the reels are displayed as pseudo-stops once in the freeze game after the special replay B corresponding to the RT2 of a period of 100 games or more is won, but it may be configured so that no pseudo-stops are displayed at all (instructed by a freeze game of a different pattern). For example, if the white 7 (white 7 or red 7 in the first embodiment) is not displayed as a stop or pseudo-stop at the start of the freeze game, reverse rotation occurs in the freeze game, but the reels continue to rotate without being displayed as pseudo-stops, and the number of games of RT2 or the number of AT games to be awarded is instructed on the performance display device 15 during the reverse rotation of the reels, and the game may be switched to normal rotation (main game) without securing a long time for holding the reels in an almost stopped state such as a pseudo-stop display. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a different pattern from the special replay A (white 7s) (a combination of symbols that has not been instructed as a pattern corresponding to RT2, such as a missing white 7, and is not a pretty combination) is pseudo-stopped again in the freeze game, thereby reducing the presentation and gameplay (for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a player feels bad when the pattern of the operation error is repeatedly displayed when the player is unable to align the white 7s due to his/her own operation error). In addition, by simply preparing a freeze game pattern in which the variable display of the symbols is pseudo-stopped and a pattern in which the variable display of the symbols is not pseudo-stopped, it is possible to avoid a pattern different from the special replay A (white 7s) being derived in the freeze game. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate concerns caused by a pattern different from the special replay A (white 7s) being pseudo-stopped in the freeze game while suppressing the complexity of the control.

In addition, patterns other than pseudo-stop displays include a slow pattern change speed, a change in the pattern change speed (at least a change in speed from fast → slow → fast → slow), multiple pattern rows (three reels) are provided on which multiple patterns are each displayed, and the pattern change display (each reel) of the multiple pattern rows each performs its own unique function (the pattern of a given pattern row may change in the opposite direction or move at a different speed, etc.), or an acrobatic combination of functions (in a configuration in which the change speed is switched, the change speed switches from "slow" to "fast" when the change speed of an adjacent pattern row switches from "fast" to "slow", or the patterns of each pattern row move back and forth and switch from "return" to "forward" when the pattern of an adjacent pattern row switches from "forward" to "return"). In addition, when the symbols are displayed in a mechanically changing manner, it is desirable to prevent the symbols from suddenly stopping from a high-speed changing state or suddenly switching to a displacement in the opposite direction as much as possible in order to reduce the burden on the reel unit 41. In addition, even if RT2 is not won, it is possible to configure it so that a freeze game can be derived, but it is desirable not to derive a pseudo stop display.

(r-2: Example of a case where a guide game is not derived and where special replay A is not stopped) When a guide game is not derived and when special replay A is not stopped in the guide game in the first embodiment, the player may not recognize whether a freeze game will be derived in the next game. In the above embodiment, when special replay B is stopped, the reels perform an operation different from the normal operation at the start of the next game (the reels may swing and swing, and then rotate in reverse, etc.), so that the player notices the freeze game immediately after the start of the next game. However, for example, in a pseudo game, the reels may be rotated in the same way as at the start of a normal game, and the corresponding reels may be stopped and displayed (here, pseudo stop display) in response to the operation of the stop switch by the player, and at any timing of the pseudo game (for example, at the timing of the first stop or the third stop), a reel operation different from the normal operation may occur (for example, an operation like the above embodiment, such as swinging and then rotating in reverse, may be started).

In addition, if a role such as watermelon or cherry is won, the player may enter a chance zone where the player is instructed on the push order for the push order replay (this may be a configuration where only the full push order is instructed, or where only some of the push order is instructed, or where no push order is instructed at all), and if the push order replay is won in the guide play of the chance zone, the player may enter the AT state accompanied by freeze play, and if a role such as watermelon or cherry is won and an AT lottery is held and won, the player may enter the AT state without freeze play (in a winning game for a role such as watermelon or cherry, a display is generated on the performance display device 15 indicating that a role that provides a chance for an AT lottery, etc. has been won (if a cherry is won, a "picture of a cherry" may be displayed, or a "?" or the like may be displayed to indicate the possibility of winning another role such as watermelon). In the AT state of the second embodiment, a freeze game does not occur even if an AT game number is added, but for example, if a watermelon is won in the AT state and an AT game is added, a guide game that aims at the watermelon symbol is generated, and a freeze game can be generated in the next game, and the contents of the freeze game and the freeze game presentation can be made different depending on whether the watermelon symbol is displayed stationary in the guide game or not. Also, for example, if a watermelon is won in the AT state and an AT game is added, a guide game in a pseudo game that aims at the watermelon symbol is generated, and a freeze game of the pseudo game is performed following the guide game, and the contents of the freeze game and the freeze game presentation can be made different depending on whether the watermelon symbol is displayed stationary in the guide game or not.

(r-3: Example of the mode at the start of the AT state) In the above second embodiment, the guidance game is performed as a freeze game (pseudo game) at the start of the AT state, but it may be performed in this game. For example, if the lottery for transition to the AT state is won, after a predetermined number of games (it can also be the next game), the state transitions to an AT preparation state in which the push order bell and the push order replays A and B are navigated, and if push order replay A or push order replay B is won in the AT preparation state, a guidance game is derived that instructs the winning push order replay to be stopped and displayed, and push order replays A and B, or push order A miss replay and push order B miss replay are stopped and displayed (winning), transitioning to the AT state (the push order that wins the push order bell and the push order that misses the push order replay are navigated) (counting of the number of games starts). As with the second embodiment, push order replays A and B cannot be displayed in a stopped state unless the push order is correct and the stop switch is operated to stop the target symbols when they are at most four symbols away from the active line. The probability of winning push order replays A and B is always constant, and it is harder to win push order replay B than push order replay A.

If you win the push order replay A, there is a 95% chance that you will be awarded 50 games, a 4% chance that you will be awarded 100 games, and a 1% chance that you will be awarded 150 games. If you win the push order replay B, there is a 95% chance that you will be awarded 100 games, a 4% chance that you will be awarded 200 games, and a 1% chance that you will be awarded 300 games. If you win the push order replays A and B, even if you cannot stop the push order replays A and B (even if you win the push order A miss replay or the push order B miss replay), you will enter the AT state and be awarded the number of games corresponding to the win. In addition, in the guide game, when the push order replay A is stopped and displayed, the performance display device 15 will teach you that the push order replay A is stopped and displayed and the 50-game AT state will start. When the push order replay B is stopped and displayed, the performance display device 15 will teach you that the push order replay B is stopped and displayed and the 100-game AT state will start. In the guide game, if a replay showing an incorrect push order A is displayed in a frozen state, the letter "V" or similar will be displayed, and it will instruct the player that an AT state of 50 games will begin; if a replay showing an incorrect push order B is displayed in a frozen state, the letter "V" or similar will be displayed, and it will instruct the player that an AT state of 100 games will begin.

In the game following the winning game of push order replay A or B, a freeze game similar to that of the first and second embodiments is performed. In other words, after the reels oscillate while maintaining the stop state of the previous game, if there are still uninstructed games remaining, the reels will rotate in reverse and then be displayed as a pseudo stop in the stop state before the reverse rotation, and if there are no more uninstructed games remaining, the game will move to the main game (the reels will rotate normally). If push order replay A or B is displayed as a stopped game at the start of the freeze game, the performance display device 15 will instruct an additional 50 games for push order replay A and 100 games for push order replay B upon the pseudo stop display, and the oscillation, reverse rotation, and pseudo stop display will be repeated until there are no more uninstructed games remaining. On the other hand, if the push order A miss replay and push order B miss replay are displayed as stopped at the start of the freeze game, the pseudo-stop display will display "V" on the performance display device 15, and all uninstructed game numbers will be instructed before transitioning to the main game (without repeating the reverse rotation of the freeze game).

(s; pseudo-play time) In the above embodiment, if the symbol specified in the guide game is not displayed as a stop or pseudo-stop, the time of the freeze game can be shorter than when it is displayed as a stop or pseudo-stop (if the white 7s are not lined up in the guide game of the first embodiment and RT2 of 150 games is awarded, one pseudo-stop game is omitted. If the white 7s and red 7s are not lined up in the guide game performed as part of the freeze game of the second embodiment, the pseudo-stop game is omitted). However, conversely, it may be configured to be longer. In this case, it is preferable to successfully press the white 7s, etc., and execute (function) the pseudo-stop game in the freeze game, also from the viewpoint of improving time efficiency, and the player can be genuinely happy that the white 7s have been lined up (specific mode).

(t; Benefits associated with (can be used as a trigger for) freeze game) In the first embodiment, a freeze game may occur when transitioning to RT2, and in the second embodiment, a freeze game may occur when transitioning to the AT state. However, another benefit may be associated with the occurrence of a freeze game. For example, a freeze game may occur or may be possible when transitioning to a bonus or a specific bonus, when a specific small win is won, and when transitioning to the AT state. In addition, multiple freeze game patterns may be provided, multiple triggers for the occurrence of a freeze game may be provided, or one of multiple freeze patterns may be selected for one trigger for the occurrence of a freeze game. The game state in which a freeze game may occur is not particularly limited, and can be changed as appropriate to a normal game state, during a (predetermined) bonus, during a (predetermined) RT, during an AT, during an ART, during a chance zone, etc., depending on the trigger for a freeze game set for each model.

In addition, the number of games played from when it is decided to play a freeze game until it is actually played is not particularly limited, and it can be set as appropriate, such as a configuration in which it basically starts after a set number of games that is decided when it is decided to play a freeze game (this does not apply if a bonus or the like is won before the set number of games is played), a configuration in which a freeze game is played in the game in which it is decided to play a freeze game, a configuration in which a freeze game is played in a game if a specific small role is won (or won) after the decision to play a freeze game, a configuration in which a freeze game is played in a game if a specific small role is won (or won) a set number of times after the decision to play a freeze game and another specific small role is won (or won) in the subsequent game, etc.

Furthermore, for example, a freeze game is executed when special replay A (white 7s) has not been derived. This is not limited to a case where the player does not properly perform the operation to line up the white 7s (for example, the stop switch is not operated at all during the valid period of the guide game, or the corresponding stop switch is operated at a timing when the white 7s are shifted four or more frames forward from the specified valid line), resulting in a different mode from special replay A (white 7s). It is also possible for the slot machine 10 to derive a different mode from special replay A (white 7s) as a presentation. That is, for example, when special replay B, which is not simultaneously won with special replay A, is won, a guide game is derived to perform a presentation that encourages a stop display aimed at white 7s, and in the game in which the guide game is derived, since special replay A has not been won, naturally white 7s will not be lined up even if they are aimed (special replay B is lined up by reel control). In other words, even if the effect of the effect display device 15 corresponding to that game (the effect corresponding to the guide game) does not instruct the player to move to RT2, the freeze game will be executed at the beginning of the next game.

Note that examples of benefits that are not specific benefits (regular benefits) include winning a small win that awards medals, winning a replay small win that allows the next game to be played without betting additional medals, and winning a bonus that does not trigger a freeze game for each machine type, and the like. The (combination of) symbols associated with the conditions for awarding the regular benefit is the identification information for the regular benefit. Also, in the first embodiment, special replay A (7 whites) can only be displayed when transitioning to RT2, and cannot be derived if RT2 is not won.

(u; Correspondence of pseudo stop games) In the first embodiment, a pseudo stop game (reverse rotation + pseudo stop display) in which special replay A is pseudo-stopped and displayed once in freeze game corresponds to a teaching (addition to the player) that there are about 50 more games in RT2 that were not taught, but the correspondence between the pseudo stop game and the given benefit can be changed appropriately for each model, and for example, the number of games to be taught (number of added games) may be determined within the range of the number of games not taught by lottery. In addition, by making the number of added games indefinite, the number of pseudo stop displays performed in freeze game can also be made indefinite. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the configuration is such that all of the number of games in RT2 that are given are taught in freeze game without leaving anything, but the RT2 game may be configured to proceed with the number of games that are not taught.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the number of pseudo stop games is determined at the start of the freeze game, but for example, it may be configured so that a decision is made as to whether or not to execute the next pseudo stop game after each pseudo stop game is completed, or it may be configured so that a decision is made at the start of the freeze game whether to decide everything at the beginning (determine the scenario for the entire freeze game) or to decide each time (make a decision involving a lottery).

In addition, in the first embodiment, in the freeze game performed when RT2 of 150 games is started with special replay A stopped, pseudo stop game (reverse rotation and pseudo stop display) is performed twice, whereas in the freeze game performed when RT2 of 150 games is started with special replay B stopped, pseudo stop game is performed only once (at that time, the performance display device 15 is instructed to add 100 games). However, even when freeze game is performed with special replay B stopped, if the RT count is 150, pseudo stop game may be performed twice (the performance display device 15 is instructed to add 50 games twice).

In the first embodiment, if the white 7s are not aligned at the start of the 150-game RT2, one pseudo stop game is played, and 100 additional games, which is equivalent to two pseudo stop games, are taught at that time. However, it is also possible to teach 50 additional games and leave 50 games uninstructed (instructed in the middle or final game of the RT2 game). Also, for example, if the white 7s are not aligned at the start of the RT2, even if the number of games in the RT2 is 100 or 150, a pseudo stop game is not performed, and 50 or 100 games may remain uninstructed. Furthermore, for example, if the white 7s are not aligned at the start of the RT2, even if the number of games in the RT2 is 100 or 150, a pseudo stop game is not performed, and instead a reverse rotation occurs and RT2 games are taught until all uninstructed games are played.

(v; corresponding symbols in pseudo-stop game) In the first embodiment, the pseudo-stop game is configured to display special replay A (white 7s) as specific identification information or special replay B (white 7s missing, etc.) as auxiliary identification information in a pseudo-stop game, but the manner in which the identification information is pseudo-stopped and displayed on the reel unit 41 is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a "symbol corresponding to continuation" may be provided for the symbols on each reel, and the more continuation symbols are pseudo-stopped and displayed in succession in the pseudo-stop game, the more bonus game progress value (number of games) will be given (instructed) later (for example, white 7s are pseudo-stopped and displayed at the end of the freeze game, and "XX games added" is displayed on the performance display device 15).

In the second embodiment described above, in the pseudo stop game of the freeze game at the start of the AT state, there are cases where a pseudo stop of a line of white 7s is displayed and cases where a pseudo stop of a line of red 7s is displayed, and the number of added games is configured to differ depending on the difference in the form (pattern) of the pseudo stop display, but the form of the reels that can be derived when teaching a specific bonus is not particularly limited to such a configuration. Furthermore, the display form of the performance display device 15 that can be derived when teaching a specific bonus is not particularly limited and can be set as appropriate. For example, two "7" symbols as specific configuration identification information are arranged consecutively in the direction in which the symbols on each reel are arranged on the left reel 42L and the right reel 42R, and one "7" symbol is arranged on the center reel 42M. The number of AT games, the number of ART games, or the number of RT games may be different in the initial number of games or the number of added games, or the type of bonus (pseudo bonus) or the type of AT state may be different depending on whether one row of "7" symbols is arranged horizontally or diagonally (single alignment) or two rows of "7" symbols are arranged horizontally or diagonally (double alignment) (or when "7" symbols are arranged in a "V" shape overall in the upper and middle rows of the left display window 31L, the lower row of the center display window 31M, and the upper and middle rows of the right display window 31R).

In other words, for example, if a single 7 symbol is lined up in a guide game (either a real game or a pseudo game) that starts with the guide display of "Aim for 7", a pseudo stop game may not be performed in the subsequent freeze game, and if a double 7 symbol is lined up, a pseudo stop game may be performed at least once in the subsequent freeze game. Since the bonus granted can be recognized (to some extent) depending on the content of the freeze game, it is not necessary to derive a freeze game effect in the effect display device 15, or to derive a different freeze game effect for when a single 7 symbol is lined up and when a double 7 symbol is lined up. However, in order to provide more detailed information to the player and to improve the performance, it is desirable to derive a freeze game effect with different contents in the effect display device 15 for when a single 7 symbol is lined up and when a double 7 symbol is lined up.

In addition, for example, in a guide game (either a real game or a pseudo game) that starts with the guide display of "Aim for 7", the same freeze game mode may be derived (for example, simply rotating in the reverse direction) when the 7 symbols line up in a single line and when they line up in a double line. However, the freeze game performance on the performance display device 15 may be configured to display a different mode corresponding to a single line and a mode corresponding to a double line. Note that, in order to increase motivation to play by including the results of the player's operation (reel mode) in the performance, it is desirable to derive different freeze games on the reel unit 41 when the 7 symbols line up in a single line and when they line up in a double line.

It is preferable to use a backlight for the reels to make the line of "7"s brighter so that it stands out more than other areas. Also, instead of or in addition to the effect display device 15, a remaining number display device may be provided that displays the number of games remaining in the bonus state (RT state, AT state, etc.) (the number of games already instructed), and when the number of games that is the period of the bonus to be granted is instructed, the corresponding number of games may be displayed on the remaining number display device (the number is added and displayed each time it is instructed). Furthermore, for example, the effect display device 15 (effect display means) may be omitted, and the remaining number display device may wait for the added display (without performing the freeze game effect) during the freeze game (even if a pseudo stop is displayed), and at the end of the freeze game, the remaining number display device may display the number of games instructed until the end of the freeze game.

In the second embodiment described above, if neither the white 7s nor the red 7s are lined up at the start of the pseudo stop game of the AT start freeze game, the pseudo stop game is not performed, but it may be configured to be performed. In this case, it may be configured so that the number of pseudo stop games is set to be smaller than the number of white 7s and the number of red 7s. For example, it may be configured so that the pseudo stop game is performed at most once. In addition, when a symbol pattern other than the white 7s and red 7s is pseudo-stopped in a freeze game, the brightness of the reel unit 41 (symbol) becomes dark, or the visibility of the reel unit 41 decreases (for example, a movable device advances in front of the reel unit 41, or a transparent display device is provided in front of the reel unit 41, and the display by the transparent display device is derived so as to overlap at least a part of the front of the symbol of the reel unit 41, etc. In this case, the reel unit 41 in which a symbol pattern other than the white 7s and red 7s has been derived can be made less noticeable. Incidentally, when white 7s and red 7s are pseudo-stopped, even if a movable device is provided, it is desirable to configure it so that it does not cover the front of the symbol at the timing of the pseudo-stop display.

(w; Pseudo stop game bonus instruction) In the first embodiment, when the special replay A is stopped and displayed in the guide game, the player is instructed in the guide game display (guide game presentation) of the presentation display device 15 about the minimum number of games (50 games) to be awarded in the case of transitioning to RT2. However, the guide game display may be configured to only instruct the player to transition to RT2, and all game number instructions may be given during freeze play. In this case, a pseudo stop game (reverse rotation + pseudo stop display) is performed at least once in freeze play (+50 games). Note that the number of games in RT2 may be increased only after a specified number of pseudo stop games have been performed (for example, a specified bonus is awarded when three successes are made, and no bonus is awarded if the number of successes is between 0 and 2).

In addition, even if an additional number of games is won in the AT state of the second embodiment, it may be configured so that an additional instruction is not given in the winning game. Furthermore, in the specific AT state of the second embodiment, in the winning game of a role such as watermelon, only the minimum number of games that can be awarded may be instructed, or if a role such as watermelon is won but a prize cannot be won, even if an additional number of games is won, an additional instruction is not given.

(x; Start trigger of freeze game) In the above embodiment, the freeze game is started when the player operates the start lever 71, but the freeze game may be started when the player operates another operation (for example, when the first stop operation is performed, when the third stop operation is canceled (when the finger is removed from the stop switch), etc.), or after a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the start lever 71, etc. (the content and start timing of the freeze game are determined, and the freeze game and timer are set), or the freeze game may be started when the story performance that starts based on the operation of a predetermined start lever 71 progresses to a predetermined stage. Note that when the reels (identification information) start to change, not only the three reels may start at the same time, but they may also be started at different times. In a change display in which the freeze game can be executed after the first stop, the reels may start to change at the same time, and the positions of the white 7s on the two reels that are spinning may be aligned even after the first stop.

Furthermore, the reels (variable display means: instead of reels, this can be embodied as other display devices capable of variably displaying identification information, such as a liquid crystal display device) can be controlled by the sub-control device 111, and a freeze game can be generated based on a predetermined trigger when a specific operation input is performed by the player when a specific bonus has been won and the player has not been informed that he or she has won the specific bonus. For example, in a state where push order replay A is displayed as stopped and an addition of 100 AT games has been won, but the presentation display device 15 corresponding to the stopped display only teaches an addition of 50 games, a specific operation input is made with the operating means (cross button 102, presentation button 101) (for example, by operating up, right, down, and left on the cross button 102 in order), and then the lever is turned on to start the next game, a freeze game occurs at the start of the game and the reels spin in reverse, after which push order replay A is displayed as a pseudo-stop, and the presentation display device 15 teaches that an additional 50 games have been added (a total of 100 AT games have been added) (if there is no such operation input, the information remains uninstructed at the stage of the next game). It may be configured so that when a freeze game does not occur at a timing when a freeze game can occur otherwise (not only when a fake effect occurs as in the above embodiment, but also when the configuration is such that whether or not to execute a freeze game is decided by lottery), a freeze game may occur by performing a specific operation input (when a score is won but the lottery on whether or not to execute a freeze game does not result in the occurrence of a freeze game).

In addition, for example, the game may be configured so that the freeze game is cancelled by the player performing a specific operation input when a specific bonus has been won but the player has not been informed of the win of the specific bonus. In this case, the player can choose to play without knowing the number of added games, and it is possible to avoid a situation where the reel state where the player failed to press the button is displayed as a pseudo-stop.

(y; configuration when special replay A is not displayed as a specific mode) A backlight is provided on the inner circumference of each reel as brightness changing means capable of changing the brightness of the symbols on each reel, and when a mode corresponding to the granting of RT2 is derived in freeze play (special replay A (line-up of white 7s) is derived in freeze play in a pseudo manner), the brightness of the symbols may be configured to be brighter than when a mode corresponding to the granting of RT2 is not derived in freeze play (special replay B mode is derived in freeze play). In this case, it is possible to emphasize the mode corresponding to RT2 in freeze play, while making the modes that do not correspond to RT2 as inconspicuous as possible.

Also, for example, a transparent display device (transparent liquid crystal display device or EL display device) may be provided as a transparent sub-display means in front of the reel unit 41, and when a mode corresponding to the grant of RT2 is derived in a freeze game (special replay A is derived in a pseudo manner in a freeze game), the transparent display device may not display the pattern (only the pattern constituting special replay A may be displayed) in a range covering the front, or may only display with high transparency, and when special replay A corresponding to the grant of RT2 is not derived in a freeze game (special replay B is derived in a freeze game), the transparent display device may display the pattern (only the pattern constituting special replay A may be displayed) in a range covering the front (avoiding the pattern becoming invisible, displaying a low transparency but transparent display, or displaying a non-transparent but transparent portion scattered therein). In this case, it is possible to emphasize the mode corresponding to RT2 in a freeze game, while making the mode not corresponding to RT2 as inconspicuous as possible.

Furthermore, for example, when a mode corresponding to the granting of RT2 is derived in a freeze game (special replay A is pseudo-derived in a freeze game), the transparent display device does not display the pattern (or only the pattern constituting special replay A) in the range covering the front, or only displays with high transparency, and when RT2 is won and special replay A is not derived in a freeze game (special replay B is derived in a freeze game), the transparent display device may display a mode imitating special replay A of the reel unit 41 (a specific mode, a mode imitating specific identification information, for example, when white 7, white 7, and bell are stopped and displayed, white 7 is displayed in front of the bell (so as to overlap) on the transparent display device, or special replay A is displayed in front of special replay B (so as to overlap) on the transparent display device). In this case, when RT2 is won, instead of being properly taught by the pattern of the reel unit 41, it can be taught by the transparent display device.

(z; Timing of freeze game) In the above embodiment, the freeze game is configured to be executed as the number of RT games or the number of AT games increases (including the start of the RT2 state or the AT state), but it may also be configured to perform a freeze lottery to determine whether or not to execute a freeze game when the number of remaining games (the value of the uninstructed game number counter) is equal to or greater than a specified value. In addition, the premonition period from when the execution of the freeze game is (incidentally) decided to start the freeze game may be set randomly or at a fixed rate, or no premonition period may be set. Furthermore, when a predetermined role is won and the RT game number or AT game number is also won in the lottery for adding the number of games, the setting of immediately instructing the number of added games, only partially instructing, or not instructing at all can be appropriately changed for each model. In addition, a period in which the number of games to be added is immediately instructed, a period in which the number of games to be added is not instructed, a period in which whether or not to instruct the number of games to be added is decided by lottery, a period in which a premonition period is set between winning the freeze game and its execution, a period in which a premonition period is not set, a period in which whether or not to set a premonition period is decided by lottery, etc. may be set as appropriate, or the configuration may be such that these periods can be set by the player.

(aa; Freeze scenario) In the first embodiment, the number of times the pseudo stop display (reverse rotation) is to be performed is set at the start of the freeze game, and in the second embodiment, the number of times the pseudo stop display (reverse rotation) is to be performed is not decided at the start of the freeze game, and it is decided whether or not to perform reverse rotation and pseudo stop display again after reverse rotation and pseudo stop display. However, in the second embodiment, it may be configured to decide at the start of the freeze game how many times the pseudo stop display is to be performed in the freeze game (the scenario of how many times the white 7 and red 7 are to be displayed as pseudo stop displays, respectively), or in the first embodiment, it may be configured to decide whether to perform side reverse rotation and pseudo stop display after reverse rotation and pseudo stop display.

(bb; freeze game starting with a stop (pseudo stop) of a minor combination other than 7s) Also, in the above embodiment, the pseudo stop of white 7s and red 7s is used to teach the player to add to the number of games, but this is not limited to this configuration, and the player may be taught to add to the number of games by pseudo-stopping other combinations or imaginary combinations that may only be pseudo-stopped in freeze games that are different from actual combinations.

For example, in the AT state of the second embodiment, when the number of uninstructed games is 100 or more, a freeze lottery is held for each game (each time the start lever 71, which triggers the start of the game, is operated), and in the freeze play derived at the beginning of the target game after winning the freeze lottery, a teaching number lottery is held to determine the number of taught games, and when the teaching number is 10 games, a cherry is aimed for and a cherry is displayed as a pseudo-stop in response to the stop operation, when the teaching number is 30 games, a watermelon is aimed for and a watermelon is displayed as a pseudo-stop in response to the stop operation, and when the teaching number is 50 games, a white 7 is aimed for and a white 7 is displayed as a pseudo-stop in response to the stop operation, etc.

Furthermore, for example, the same symbol (symbols that look like the same symbol) may be arranged on one pay line of the reel unit 41 or on multiple pay lines (for example, two blue 7s may be arranged consecutively on the left and right reels as specific configuration identification information, or two blue 7s may be arranged with one symbol spaced apart and one blue 7 symbol may be arranged on the center reel, or two blue 7s may be arranged consecutively on each reel, so that blue 7s may be arranged on one line (first arrangement) or on two lines (second arrangement).Furthermore, for example, three blue 7s may be arranged consecutively on the left and right reels and one blue 7 may be arranged on the center reel, so that blue 7s may be arranged on one line, two lines, or three lines).The number of added games may vary depending on how many pay lines the same symbol is arranged on.

When these configurations are adopted, both the stop display corresponding to the instruction (addition) of a predetermined amount of the number of games and the stop display corresponding to the instruction (addition) of a greater number of games are performed by stopping and displaying the "Blue 7", and can be changed by simply shifting the specified reel slightly. Therefore, it is relatively easy to control the pseudo-stop display of a combination of symbols corresponding to a greater amount of additions from a state in which a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined amount of additions is stopped and displayed (and control the pseudo-stop display of a combination of symbols corresponding to a greater amount of additions from a state in which a combination of symbols corresponding to a greater amount of additions is stopped and displayed).

When this configuration is adopted, the guidance game presentation displays the number of active lines on which blue 7s are lined up in the guidance game (single line, double line, triple line, etc.) and displays the corresponding bonus content (+30 games, +50 games, +100 games, etc.), and further, in the freeze game presentation when a pseudo stop display is performed in a freeze game, the pseudo stop display displays the number of active lines on which blue 7s are lined up (single line, double line, triple line, etc.) and displays the corresponding bonus content (+30 games, +50 games, +100 games, etc.). Of course, after the freeze game, the main game is played according to the result of the win/lose lottery based on the operation of the start lever 71.

In addition, in the freeze game of the first embodiment and the AT start freeze game of the second embodiment, the pseudo stop game (reverse rotation) is started by operating the start lever 71, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the pseudo stop game may be started without the player's operation, or may be started by operating a specified stop switch. In addition, when a stop switch is used, the configuration may be such that a stop switch that generates reverse rotation and a stop switch that does not generate reverse rotation (ending the pseudo game as it is) are set.

(cc; Guidance game) In the first embodiment described above, the guidance game is executed in the (simultaneous) winning game of special replay A and special replay B, and the next game is configured to execute a freeze game that informs the content (number of games) of RT2, but the guidance game and the freeze game may be configured to be executed in the same game (the guidance game is executed as part of the freeze game).

The guidance games of the first and second embodiments described above (including guidance games that stop and display a special replay and transition to RT2 as a specific benefit, guidance games that stop and display a push order replay and instruct the addition of the number of AT games as a specific benefit (instructing the derivation of a freeze effect or freeze game effect), and guidance games that pseudo-stop and display a line of 7s during freeze play and instruct transition to an AT state as a specific benefit) suggest the winning of each benefit or the execution of an effect that instructs this (freeze effect, freeze game effect) (there are cases where the aspect indicated in the guidance game is not stopped and displayed (fake)), but it is also possible to provide a pattern that can definitely display the target aspect (the aspect indicated in the guidance game) as stopped or pseudo-stop when it is derived (when the indicated aspect is stopped and displayed, there are cases where the player cannot align it by operation). For example, when the target aspects can be aligned, the guidance game presentation of the presentation display device 15 may have a pattern with a background color of blue, green, red, or rainbow, and a pattern of character 1, character 2, and character 3, and when the target aspects cannot be aligned, the guidance game presentation may have a pattern with a background color of blue, green, and red, and a pattern of character 1 and character 2. Furthermore, when a pattern with a background color of rainbow and a pattern of character 3 are derived in the guidance game presentation, a configuration may be configured to be aligned that corresponds to a more advantageous benefit for the player (for example, a red 7 alignment). Note that the guidance game teaches or suggests that the target benefit will be won, and as a result, it also teaches or suggests that a freeze game and a freeze game presentation will be derived as a specific presentation display that teaches the granting of the target benefit (contents, etc.). This allows the player to first play with a sense of elation about whether or not they have won the target bonus in the guide game, and if they are able to cause the target mode to be displayed as a frozen or pseudo frozen display, they can proceed with the game in anticipation of what the subsequent freeze game and freeze game presentation will be like.

In the first embodiment, the guide play is derived in a game in which the special replay A can be stopped and displayed, but the guide play may not be derived. In other words, the player stops the reels without being aware of the special replay A, and if the special replay A is not stopped and displayed (the special replay B is stopped and displayed), a surprise effect occurs in which a freeze game suddenly occurs in the next game, similar to the case in the first embodiment where the special replay B is won alone (the special replay A is not won). Furthermore, if the special replay A is stopped and displayed unconsciously, the effect display device 15 or the like performs an effect indicating that the white 7s have been lined up and that the player is given an advantageous state based on the third stop of the reel unit 41 (the stop display of the variable display of the identification information), in the same manner as the revival effect (the freeze game is performed in the next game).

In the second embodiment, in the guide game during the freeze game, as in the normal game, if the stop timing of the target symbol that can be displayed as a pseudo stop (the position of the target symbol when the target reel is stopped) is within four symbols (frames) of deviation from the pay line (towards the earlier stop timing), the target symbol is displaced (pulled in) to the pay line, and if it is more than that, it is displayed as a stopped symbol. However, it may be configured to display the target symbol as a pseudo stop on the pay line from any position. However, with regard to the third stop, whether or not the target symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol on the pay line is determined based on the timing of the player's stop operation. Also, instead of making it possible to pseudo-stop the target symbol on the active line regardless of the position of the target symbol at the timing of the stop operation, for example, when a line of white 7s can be derived in a guide game during a freeze game, if an operation is performed that stops the white 7s at a timing that is shifted forward (past) by just one frame (a slight operational error), and the timing difference is small, the white 7s may be configured to pseudo-stop (for example, rotated and displaced in the opposite direction by one frame).

In addition, the expectation level may be different depending on the number of specific symbols (such as white 7) that are aimed for and stopped in the guide game. For example, in a guide game (of this game) in which white 7 symbols are stopped and displayed on the center line, even if three white 7 symbols cannot be lined up, if even one can be stopped and displayed, there is a possibility that the player will transition to an advantageous state such as RT2 (for example, if a role that causes one white 7 to be stopped and displayed is won, there is a 5% chance of transitioning to an advantageous state, and if a role that causes two white 7s to be stopped and displayed is won, there is a 20% chance of transitioning to an advantageous state), and in the game following the guide game, the performance display device 15 or the like may be informed of whether or not the player has transitioned to an advantageous state as a result of the guide game. The instruction performance when the player moves to an advantageous state as a result of the guidance play is different from the instruction performance when the player does not move, and the instruction performance may be different between the case where the player moves to an advantageous state by lining up three white 7 symbols and the case where the player moves to an advantageous state by stopping and displaying one or two white 7 symbols (the instruction performance may be different between one case and two cases. Also, the advantageous state to which the player moves by lining up three white 7 symbols is more advantageous (for example, a combination that can stop and display three white 7 symbols is associated with the award of a relatively large number of games, and a specialized zone for instructing the game to be awarded is awarded once). Also, a period during which the guidance play can be executed may be provided, and at the end of the period, an instruction may be given as to whether or not the player has moved to an advantageous state as a result of playing during the period during which the guidance play can be executed. In addition, in a configuration that allows one or two white 7s to be displayed as stopped or pseudo-stopped, it may be possible to determine which reel (left, center, or right) the white 7 symbol will be allowed to stop on, or it may be possible to determine which reel the white 7 symbol will be allowed to stop on, or it may be possible to have any reel display a white 7 until one or two white 7s are displayed as stopped.

It may also be configured so that a freeze state can occur during the game in which the guide play is being played (after a specified time from the operation of the start lever 71, after the first stop, after the second stop, etc.). For example, at the second stop when the white 7 symbol is ready, a freeze state may be entered in which the operation of the stop switch is invalid, and after a specified time, the game may be returned to and the reels may be stopped (third stop) based on the operation of the stop switch. In this case, by associating the occurrence of a freeze state with an instruction that it is possible to line up the white 7s, it is possible to improve the playability of the guide play.

(dd; Effects associated with pseudo play) When a specified pattern such as a line of white 7s is pseudo-stopped in a freeze play, that is, when a pseudo-stop play is started with a line of white 7s stopped or pseudo-stopped, the backlight is installed inside each reel and serves as a brightness changing means capable of changing the brightness of the patterns. The backlight may be configured to make the patterns (reel unit 41) brighter than when a line of white 7s is not pseudo-stopped in a freeze play (pseudo-stop play) (a pattern of a missing white 7 is maintained and stopped). In this case, patterns corresponding to RT2 or AT state (such as a line of white 7s) in a freeze play are emphasized, while patterns not corresponding to RT2 or AT state (patterns due to a player's mistake in pressing the button, etc.) are made as inconspicuous as possible.

A transparent display device serving as a sub-display means is provided in front of the reel unit 41 serving as the variable display means, and in a freeze game (pseudo stop display), when a line of white 7s corresponding to an addition or the like is derived, the transparent display device does not display in an area covering the front of the pattern (which may be just the target white 7 pattern, etc.) serving as identification information, or only displays with a high degree of transparency (for example, if the white 7 pattern is configured to line up on the middle effective line, it does not cover the middle effective line), and when a line of white 7s corresponding to an addition or the like is not derived in a freeze game (pseudo stop display) (a stop mode in which the white 7 is not aligned is displayed as a pseudo stop), the transparent display device may display in an area covering the front of the pattern (which may be just the line on which the white 7s can line up) (avoiding the pattern being completely invisible, and displaying with a low degree of transparency but with a transparent display, or a non-transparent display with transparent parts scattered therein). In this case, it is possible to emphasize aspects of freeze play that correspond to RT2 or AT states, while making aspects that do not correspond to RT2 or AT states as inconspicuous as possible.

Furthermore, when the RT2 or AT state is won and a pattern such as a white 7 arrangement corresponding to the grant of the RT2 or AT state is not derived in the freeze game (a pattern of a white 7 missing is derived due to a mistake in pressing the button, etc.), the transparent display device may derive a pattern (white 7 arrangement, or a display that is deformed) that imitates the pattern (white 7 arrangement) corresponding to the grant of the RT2 or AT state of the reel unit 41 (for example, a display of three white 7 symbols lined up in a position corresponding to the front of the middle pay line). In this case, when the RT2 or AT state is won, instead of being properly taught by the reel unit 41, it can be taught by the transparent display device. Note that the white 7 display on the transparent display device may be performed only for the reel that caused the white 7 arrangement to not be achieved, and the pattern of the white 7 arrangement may be visually recognized by the white 7 on the reel and the white 7 display on the transparent display device. Also, when the line on which the white 7s line up is determined, the transmission type display device may be configured to have a lower transmittance (making it difficult to see behind) in the area in front of the other lines than the area in front of the line in the guide play or freeze play. However, in guide play that requires eye-pressing, it is desirable to use the transmission type display device so that the visibility of the reels (upper, middle, and lower areas of display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R) before stopping (before pseudo-stopping) is not reduced.

(ee: Response in a situation where the accuracy of the stopped state of the stored patterns is unknown) In the first embodiment described above, if information is stored that the power was cut off or the front door 12 was open when a specific variable display (variable display in which a freeze game is performed) was started (non-derivation conditions are met), even if information is stored that special replay A (line of white 7s) is displayed in a stopped state, a freeze game corresponding to special replay B is performed rather than a freeze game corresponding to special replay A (line of white 7s); however, the freeze game may be configured to be executed based on the first freeze game flag or the second freeze game flag that is set to on. When this configuration is adopted, when power is restored after a power outage, the main control device 131 sends a command to the sub-control device 111 indicating that power has been restored, and the sub-control device 111 performs processing corresponding to the restoration of power and then returns to normal processing. When returning to normal processing, if the restoration is after the start of a guide game and before the start of a freeze game (freeze game presentation), it will remember that power was restored just before the freeze game presentation, and if it is remembered at the start of a freeze game presentation that power was restored just before the freeze game presentation, the letter "V" may be displayed in the freeze game presentation even if a command that indicates that white 7s or red 7s have been arranged has been received from the main control device 131 when the guide game is displayed as stopped.

Furthermore, assuming that the configuration is such that when the front door 12 returns from an open state to a closed state, the main control unit 131 sends a command to the sub-control unit 111 indicating that the door is closed, and the sub-control unit 111 performs processing corresponding to the door closing and then returns to normal processing, when returning to the normal processing, if it is after the start of the guidance game and before the start of a freeze game (freeze game performance), it will remember that the door was opened just before the freeze game performance, and if it is remembered at the start of the freeze game performance that the door was opened just before the freeze game performance, then even if a command that indicates a line of white 7s or red 7s has been received from the main control unit 131 when the guidance game is displayed as stopped, a "V" may be displayed in the freeze game performance. Even when the above configuration is adopted, if the state of the reel unit 41 deviates from the state before the power outage or before the door is opened during a power outage or while the front door 12 is open, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a display showing a line of white 7s or a line of red 7s is derived in the freeze game performance, creating a sense of incongruity, even though a line of white 7s or a line of red 7s is no longer derived in the freeze game. Furthermore, if any error state occurs, the front door 12 is opened to resolve the error state, so if an error state occurs at the start (immediately before) of a freeze game, a freeze game corresponding to the door opening is derived.

In addition, for example, if information that the power supply has been cut off or that the front door 12 has been opened is stored at the start of a specific variable display (variable display in which a freeze game is performed), the freeze game presentation may be configured to respond individually to the cases where the power supply has been cut off or the front door 12 has been opened, or to the case where the game has been interrupted. The information that the power supply has been cut off or that the front door 12 has been opened may be erased when the freeze game presentation is set. In this case, the settings related to the freeze game are basically performed at the start of the specific variable display, and the burden of performing processing that cannot be performed at the start of the specific variable display, such as identifying a power cut that occurred between the start of the specific variable display and the start of the pseudo game, can be reduced as much as possible.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the game in which the guide game is played is different from the game in which the freeze game is played, and the presence or absence of power outage information or door open information is checked at the start of the game in which the freeze game is played, and if such information is confirmed, the freeze game corresponding to special replay B is forcibly executed even if special replay A is displayed in a stopped state (since the behavior of the reels in reverse rotation is the same as that of the freeze game corresponding to special replay A, if a freeze game is played with special replay A displayed in a stopped state and a pseudo-stop is displayed after reverse rotation, special replay A is displayed in a pseudo-stop state. However, even if 150 games are selected, the reverse rotation (The number of rotations is reduced to a maximum of one, and a pseudo game presentation will display "V"), and in a configuration in which a guide game is performed during a freeze game, as at the start of the AT state in the second embodiment, it is possible to know whether there was a power outage or the opening of the front door 12 between the end of the guide game (pseudo stop display) and the operation of the start lever 71, which is considered to be the trigger for the reels to rotate in reverse, and it is determined whether there was a power outage or the opening of the front door 12 when the start lever 71 was operated, and if a positive determination is made, a freeze game is performed for a pattern in which the push order replay was not complete, and a freeze game presentation (display of "V") for a pattern in which the push order replay was not complete may be performed.

The "non-derivation condition" is not particularly limited, and for example, it is possible to exclude a power outage or the opening of the front door 12 from the non-derivation conditions. In addition, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the freeze game progresses based on the operation of a specified operation means (e.g., a start lever, an effect button, a bet button) in a freeze game, and the content of the freeze game or the freeze game effect is changed if the operation means is not operated within the operation period of the specified operation means, which is considered to be the establishment of a non-derivation condition.

(ff; corresponds to power outage, front door opening) In the first embodiment, when the power is turned off or the front door 12 is opened, the freeze game and freeze game performance are set regardless of whether the special replay A (white 7s) is stopped or not, but a different freeze game (a freeze game with a pattern prepared for when the power is turned off or the front door 12 is opened) and a different freeze game performance (for example, no "V" is displayed, and a transition to RT2 and the number of games are displayed) may be set. In the second embodiment, when the freeze game is started, after the guide game, it is determined whether the power is turned off or the front door 12 is opened at the start of the freeze game (pseudo stop game), and if the determination is affirmative, a pseudo stop game with a pattern in which the white 7 and the red 7 are not aligned may be executed. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, after the push order replay is stopped and displayed in a specific AT state, at the start of a freeze game (pseudo stop game), it may be determined whether or not information that the power is turned off or that the front door 12 is open is stored, and if a positive determination is made, a pseudo stop game in which the white 7 and the red 7 are not aligned may be executed. Note that, even if information that the power is turned off or that the front door 12 is open is stored, if the first freeze game flag is set to on, the corresponding freeze game and freeze game presentation may be executed.

(gg; bonus game progress value) In the above embodiment, the number of games is used as the bonus game progress value, but the bonus game progress value may also be the number of payouts, the difference in the number of coins (number of coins won) obtained by subtracting an additional number from the number of payouts, the number of games played, or the number of sets in which a set number of coins is paid out (or won).

In addition, when the points increased by a certain trigger reach a specified number or more, a lottery is held to determine how much bonus game progress value will be awarded (it is acceptable to lose), and the bonus game progress value that is awarded is added to the winning amount.

(hh: Method of instructing/suggesting addition of bonus game progress value, etc.) In the above embodiment, when an opportunity to instruct an addition of a freeze game, etc. is given, the number of games that was not instructed is definitively instructed (for example, when instructing an addition of 50 games, an addition of 50 is displayed), but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the method may be configured to instruct the uninstructed amount of addition roughly (with a certain degree of flexibility). For example, in the guide game, when the bonus state is changed, the initial number of games (the minimum number of guaranteed games that can be played in a specific state when the bonus state is changed) is instructed, and then, in the freeze game, for each pseudo stop display, the effect display device 15 performs an effect in which one of the following is acquired: white ball (corresponding to the award of any of 10 to 100 games, 95% is 10 games, 4% is 20 games), blue ball (corresponding to the award of any of 10 to 50 games), yellow ball (corresponding to the award of any of 10 to 100 games), green ball (corresponding to the award of any of 50 to 200 games), red ball (corresponding to the award of any of 100 to 300 games), and at a predetermined timing of the bonus state (for example, when the number of games already taught becomes 0), the number of games is awarded (instructed) instead of consuming the balls. In addition to such effects in the effect display device 15, the reel unit 41 may also perform suggestions and instructions based on the behavior of the reels.

(ii; Different presentations with the same instruction) Even if the presentation display device 15 is used to teach the same content, the content of the presentation may be appropriately set to be different depending on the symbols (combination of symbols, outcome) displayed in a stopped state on the reel unit 41 at the start of the presentation.

For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the player has an approximately 50% chance of winning a particular game state (such as an AT state), in which a freeze game is executed at the beginning of the game following a game in which a watermelon or cherry wins, and in which the reels rotate in reverse and a pseudo-stop display is displayed as if a cherry had won in an unusual arrangement, before transitioning to the main game.

Furthermore, for example, there are two big bonus combinations: a set of red sevens and a set of white sevens, which are different winning flags and prize-winning flags, but are won at the time and the actual content of the big bonus (number of wins) is set to be the same, but the presentation (presentation display on the presentation display device 15, background music from the speaker 14, etc.) may be configured to differ depending on which combination is matched. In this case, the player can select which combination to match, allowing for a change of mood, etc.

For example, the big bonus roles include a single line of blue 7s lined up on one active line, and a double line of blue 7s lined up on two active lines, which are separate winning flags and prize-winning flags and cannot be won at the same time, but the number of medals won in the big bonus is set to be the same, and the expected probability of winning in the RT (AT) transition lottery held during the big bonus may be different. The benefits of a double line are not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a high expectation of medal winning during the bonus (longer number of games, a high upper limit on winning, etc.).

(jj; fake end effect) When the number of remaining games in the AT state becomes 0 on the remaining game number display (instructed display means) of the effect display device 15 and an uninstructed amount of the AT state remains in the uninstructed amount memory counter, the effect display device 15 is configured to always instruct the uninstructed amount. However, for example, it may be configured to be possible to execute a fake end effect that transitions to a display corresponding to the normal state and then returns to a display corresponding to the AT state. In this case, it is possible to improve the performance of the effect. The period during which the fake end effect is being executed is a bonus state. Also, if behavior specific to the AT state is derived during the fake end effect (for example, push order navigation is derived), it may transition to a display corresponding to the AT state.

(kk; end of specialized state, transition to specialized state) In the second embodiment, the end conditions of the specific AT state (specialized state) are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the maximum number of games may be 10, and the state may end if all uninstructed games are displayed before that (or if the number of uninstructed games falls below a specified number). In addition, even if the specified number of games as the upper limit of the specialized state has not elapsed (even if there is an uninstructed number of games), the specific AT state (specialized state) may end upon winning a fall lottery (multiple tables with different winning rates may be provided), winning a specified role, or winning a prize (multiple tables with different winning rates may be provided). For example, the specific AT state may end upon winning a fall replay, a bonus role, or winning a prize in the specific AT state. Furthermore, for example, the specific AT state may end with the winning of a fake replay (in this case, it does not end if the push order replay could be stopped and displayed but could not be completed due to an operational error, etc.), or it may end when the guide play is performed a set number of times (which may be once, multiple times, or may be determined by lottery). In this case, the specific AT state may end suddenly, which can create a strong interest in playing in the specific AT state. Therefore, the playability in the specialized state is improved and the feeling of a rigged race is suppressed.

In addition, for example, in a specific AT state, if special replays A and B stop, the number of games in the specific AT state is reset, and if they do not stop, the specific AT state may end with the number of games originally scheduled.

Furthermore, when a transition to a specific AT state (specialized state) is determined, the number of times to instruct or suggest the uninstructed amount of the AT game number (bonus game progress value) by freeze play (pseudo game) may be determined all at once, or an instruction lottery may be held to determine whether or not to instruct or suggest the uninstructed amount each time a transition to a specialized state is determined and the uninstructed amount of the bonus game progress value is taught or suggested. The specialized state is a state in which pseudo games that teach or suggest the uninstructed amount of the bonus game progress value can be executed multiple times, and may be configured to execute multiple pseudo games in response to one variable display of the identification information (reel pattern) (one game), or may be configured to execute pseudo games in response to multiple variable displays of the identification information, or may be a combination of these. Furthermore, even if the state transitions to a specialized state, there may be a pattern in which a pseudo game is not executed (processing of whether or not to execute a pseudo game is performed) with the variable display of the identification information being intervened (pseudo game does not have to be executed every time a game is played), a pattern in which the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value is not taught or suggested at all (processing of whether or not to execute a pseudo game is performed), a pattern in which a pseudo game is played at least once as compensation (i.e., a pattern in which the state transitions to a specialized state on the premise that the untaught amount is taught or suggested once), or a pattern in which "0" is shown as a teaching or suggestion of the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value.

In the second embodiment described above, when the number of taught games is set to 0, if there is a number of untaught games, the number of untaught games is taught to become the number of taught games, but it is also possible to configure it so that when the number of taught games is set to a specified game other than 0, the number of untaught games is taught.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the push order replay is not complete and the number of uninstructed AT games is less than 50, no instruction is given in the freeze game, but it may be configured to do so (for example, when the number of uninstructed additional AT games in a specific AT state (or AT state) becomes 50 or more, a guide game in the freeze game occurs). Furthermore, when instructing a number of games that is not a multiple of the number of games associated with a white 7 or red 7, the reels may be displayed as pseudo-stops in a manner different from that of a white 7 or red 7, and the performance display device 15 may display "V" to instruct an additional number including a fraction (for example, an additional 60 games, 130 games, etc.) with a freeze game. Note that additional number instruction including a fraction may also be given for a white 7 or red 7. However, in that case, it is desirable to instruct a relatively large number of games (a number of games greater than the number of games associated with the white 7 or red 7). In addition, as an effect of incongruity, the effect display device 15 may display a number of games different from (or less than) the number of games associated with a line of white 7s or red 7s, in which case the freeze game may continue (the pseudo stop game may occur once more).

In the second embodiment, the specific AT state is configured to transition when the AT transition lottery is won in the AT state, even if the number of AT games is not added at the same time. However, it is also possible to provide a super specific AT state that transitions when the number of AT games is added, or, as an advanced version of the specific AT state, to transition when the number of AT games is added by a specified number or more. Furthermore, it is also possible to transition to the specific AT state by playing a specified number of games in the AT state.

(ll; Specialized state benefits) In the second embodiment described above, the specific AT state (specialized state) is configured to be easier to add to the number of AT games than the AT state, and the more games in the specific AT state, the more advantageous it is for the player; however, the specific AT state may be configured in such a way that the ease of addition is the same as the AT state, and the uninstructed portion of the number of games already granted is simply taught as an effect.

In addition, in the second embodiment, a specialized state that imitates the bonus state (pseudo bonus state; a specific AT state that is performed with a dedicated performance when a predetermined number of games is added and the predetermined number is the upper limit) is provided, and when the pseudo bonus state is won in the pseudo bonus state, the pseudo bonus state may be transitioned to after the pseudo bonus state ends. In addition, a lottery for adding the number of AT games is also held in the pseudo bonus state, and the number of AT games added by winning the lottery for adding may be instructed or suggested in a freeze game after the pseudo bonus state ends. In this case, the player can enjoy a situation in which advantageous states are piled up and become even more advantageous. In addition, if the specific AT state is forced to end by winning a pseudo bonus in the specific AT state, the specific AT state is resumed after the pseudo bonus state ends, and in this case, the resumed specific AT state may be configured to start from the point of forced termination, or to start from the beginning.

In addition, in the second embodiment and the like, if the AT state ends after a specified number of medals have been acquired or a specified number of games have been played, a special presentation may be generated.

(mm; omission of pseudo play, other pattern) In the above first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a freeze play does not occur when transitioning to RT2. However, in a game in which a guide play capable of stopping the display of special replay A is executed, the form of the performance display performed by the performance display device 15 in a game transitioning to RT2 is different between the case where special replay A is stopped and the case where special replay B is stopped (for example, if special replay A is stopped at the start of the RT2 start game, a display including white 7 is performed on the performance display device 15, and if special replay B is stopped, white 7 is not displayed at all on the performance display device 15, or a reversal achievement performance is not performed in the guide play, but is performed in the start game of RT2, etc.).

A freeze game does not necessarily have to be accompanied by a pseudo stop display. For example, the reels may rotate in reverse (the speed may slow down or speed up as if they are about to stop), and during that period, the effect display device 15 displays an effect of increasing the remaining period of RT2 (the faster the rotation, the greater the increase, etc.), and the reels may rotate forward, ending the effect display of increasing the remaining period of RT2 on the effect display device 15. Also, for example, a freeze game may be performed in which the reels appear to not move at all (slightly move), or to continue to move back and forth (during which time the effect display device 15 displays an effect). Furthermore, in a freeze game, all reels do not have to perform the same operation, and this can be changed as appropriate. For example, reels may be set to rotate in reverse in order, or reels that do not rotate in reverse. The timing of the start of the freeze game can also be set as appropriate, not just when the start lever 71 is operated (at the beginning of the game), but also until the end of the game. For example, the freeze game may start when the first stop operation of the stop switch is performed or when the second stop operation is released.

In addition, a liquid crystal display device may be provided instead of the reel unit 41 (which may be integrated with the performance display device 15), and the liquid crystal display device may perform a freeze game (freeze display) as in the above embodiment (the mode may be set as appropriate, but may be similar to the freeze game performance in the above embodiment, for example). Also, a configuration may be adopted in which freeze game (freeze display) is not performed (the content taught in the freeze game performance is performed in a performance display for the same period, etc.).

(nn; specific pattern) In the above embodiment, in addition to special replay A and special replay B, special replay C is provided, and if special replay C is won, a winning combination of red 7s is possible, and an RT2 period of 100 games or more is instructed to be granted, and the guide game display includes a display including a combination of red 7s, and in the freeze game at the beginning of the next game, if 200 games or more have been played, the red 7s may rotate in the opposite direction, and the freeze game presentation may include a display including a combination of red 7s.

(oo; Understanding of the stop display mode of the previous game in an RT2 start (transition) game) In the above first embodiment, in an RT2 start (transition; strictly speaking, the RT state is transitioned when the previous game is stopped, but since the game is executed in the transitioned RT state from the next game onwards, this game is also referred to as an RT2 start/transition game) game in which a freeze play is performed, the stopping mode of the patterns (identification information) of the reel unit 41 at the start of the game, that is, whether or not special replay A and special replay B have been won in the previous game in which a guide play may be performed, is grasped by determining whether or not special replay A and special replay B have been won in the previous game. If special replay A and special replay B win, the first freeze game flag and the second freeze game flag are set to ON and the ON/OFF of the flags is checked in the next game. However, for example, the stop position information of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R of the stopped display of the reel unit 41 (for example, which symbol is stopped in the middle row, etc.) may be stored at least until the start setting of the next game, and in the RT2 start game, the stop position information of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R of the previous game is checked to know whether special replay A and special replay B win. However, by adopting the first freeze game flag and the second freeze game flag, it is possible to reduce the control burden in the RT2 start game and the burden on the memory capacity that must store the stop position information of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R in each game until the next game.

(pp; RT2 period) In the first embodiment described above, the RT2 period is not extended (added on) after transition to the RT2 period, but for example, it may be configured so that special replay A, special replay B, and fake replay can be won with a lower probability during the RT2 period than during the RT1 period, and the RT2 period may be extended (added on) when special replay A and special replay B are won. Furthermore, it may be configured so that a lottery is held to determine the period (number of games) for which the RT2 period is extended (added on).

In addition, in the first embodiment, when transitioning to RT2, the entire granted RT2 period is instructed to the player, but it may be configured so that there is a remaining RT2 period that is not instructed. In this case, it is configured so that all of the RT2 period that has not been instructed is instructed by the time the RT2 period ends.

In addition, in the first embodiment, if BB and RB are won during the RT2 period, the number of games remaining in the RT2 period is reset after the bonus state ends, and the game transitions to RT1, and if special replay A and special replay B are not won during the RT1 period, the game transitions to RT0. However, if BB and RB are won during the RT2 period, the game transitions to RT2 after the bonus state ends (by transitioning to an unlimited RT1, and winning special replay A and special replay B during the RT1), and the remaining RT2 period can be completed. In addition, the RT2 period may be extended (added on) by winning a bonus.

(qq; setting suggestion) By unlocking the key cylinder 20 with a corresponding key to open the front door 12 and inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 124, a display suggesting or instructing the setting of a payout rate (such as the probability of winning a predetermined lottery) that can be changed in multiple stages may be derived. For example, in the performance display device 15, a display that suggests or instructs the setting may be derived on a display screen that is derived when a bonus ends, when the RT2 state or the AT state ends, etc. In addition, a display that suggests or instructs the setting may be derived in the performance display of the performance display device 15 corresponding to a case where white 7s or red 7s are lined up in a guide game, a freeze game that starts from a state where white 7s are lined up in the first embodiment, or a pseudo-stop game that starts from a state where white 7s or red 7s are lined up in the second embodiment. In this case, it is possible to derive a display that suggests a setting as another benefit that can stop and display specific identification information such as white 7s. Therefore, by having the specific identification information freeze-displayed, it is possible to generate strong interest. Furthermore, it is possible to have the player make an effort to press the button to freeze-display the specific identification information, and by being able to do so, the player can enjoy the game even more with the added fun of being able to press the button.

For example, when a reverse rotation occurs, the effect display device 15 produces a "cut-in effect" as a display that may suggest or instruct the setting. In the cut-in effect, any one of the following is selected: a normal mode (preferably multiple patterns, and more preferably, different patterns can be selected depending on the situation), a chance mode that increases the possibility of another reverse rotation, a confirmation mode that confirms that another reverse rotation will occur, an odd number suggestion mode (strong/weak) that is likely to be selected when an odd number is set in a six-stage setting, an even number suggestion mode (strong/weak) that is likely to be selected when an even number is set, a high setting suggestion mode that is likely to be selected when the setting is 4 or higher in a six-stage setting where higher numbers are more advantageous to the player, a setting 1 elimination mode that confirms a setting of 2 or higher, a high setting mode that confirms a setting of 4 or higher, a 5-6 confirmation mode that confirms a setting of 5 or 6, or a 6 confirmation mode that confirms a setting of 6.

(rr; End of pseudo-game) The conditions for ending the freeze game are not particularly limited and can be set as appropriate. At the very least, the freeze game ends when the number of uninstructed games runs out, but it is possible to freely set how many parts the number of uninstructed games will be divided into and taught. Also, a lottery for ending (falling out) may be held (multiple tables with different winning rates may be provided), in which case it is possible to diversify game patterns compared to when the freeze game always continues until the number of uninstructed games falls below a specified number (for example, runs out).

In the second embodiment, the setting of the freeze game (AT start freeze game, specific AT freeze game) is configured not to execute the freeze game (pseudo stop game) when a combination of symbols that does not correspond to the addition is displayed as a stop or pseudo stop, but for example, when the uninstructed amount of the number of AT games is equal to or greater than a specified number, the freeze game (pseudo stop game) may be executed even when a combination of symbols that does not correspond to the addition is displayed as a stop or pseudo stop. In other words, when a pseudo stop display is performed even though it is not possible to display a combination of symbols that corresponds to the addition, the appearance is not very good, so the opportunity is relatively reduced, and when it is derived, the uninstructed amount of the number of AT games is relatively large, so it is possible to give more pleasure than the bad appearance. Furthermore, when a freeze game (pseudo stop game) is executed from a state where a combination of symbols that does not correspond to the addition is displayed as stopped or pseudo-stopped, it is also possible to configure the content of the freeze game to be different from the freeze game when a combination of symbols that corresponds to the addition is displayed as stopped or pseudo-stopped.

(ss; other freeze games, reduced freeze scale) In the guide game display using the pseudo game of the second embodiment, the first stop and the second stop may be automatically displayed as pseudo stops, and only the third stop may require a targeted press (the reel may be displayed as stopped at a position corresponding to the operation of the stop switch).

The display device 15 may also be configured to be capable of deriving a lineup effect that teaches a combination of symbols that may be pseudo-stopped in a pseudo-stop game. In this case, it is possible to easily convey to the player what to expect, and the player can enjoy predicting what will be pseudo-stopped. The device may also be configured to suggest the expectation of a pseudo-stopped display of a set of red 7s (for example, a pattern with a high expectation and a pattern with a low expectation are prepared). In addition, the device may be configured to teach a combination of symbols that may be stopped or pseudo-stopped in a guide game. For example, in a guide game in a specific AT state, red 7 and white 7 may be taught as symbols that may be stopped, and if the winning combination matches the combination that the player is aiming to stop, the winning combination will win and an additional instruction will be given.

(tt; number of uninstructed games can be divided into multiple games and taught by freeze play, high probability of freeze state, look-ahead announcement) In the above embodiment, the freeze play is configured to be set for one game, but it may be configured to be set for multiple games (to set a high probability of freeze state). Furthermore, it may be configured to be able to set a period (look-ahead teaching period) during which it can be taught in advance that a predetermined number of games will be added if the player wins a predetermined combination (or does not win a combination other than the predetermined combination).

For example, in the AT state, at the same time as drawing the role, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to a specialized zone, which is a specialized state, a high probability of freezing state, or a pre-reading instruction period (a win occurs at a specified rate when a specified role is won).

As an example of the embodiment, the main control device 131 is provided with a setting uninstructed game number counter that temporarily stores the number of uninstructed games in the specialized zone, and stores the value of the uninstructed game number counter in the setting uninstructed game number counter when the specialized zone is selected or when transitioning. Furthermore, when the specialized zone is selected or when transitioning, a teaching scenario determination process is performed to determine the scenario of the specialized zone. That is, first, a teaching planned game number lottery is performed to determine the number of games to be taught in the first game of the specialized zone. For example, using a random number counter that takes values from 0 to 127 and a teaching schedule table that is referenced in the specialized zone, the number of games to be taught in the specialized zone is determined to be 10 games, 20 games, 30 games, 50 games, 100 games, or 0 games. The determined number of games to be taught is stored in an area corresponding to the first game in the teaching scenario storage area, as shown in FIG. 32 (a). Furthermore, the determined number of games is subtracted from the untaught game number counter for setting (it is not subtracted from the original untaught game number counter). This is repeated until the value of the untaught game number counter for setting becomes "0". Furthermore, each time the number of games to be taught is stored in the teaching scenario memory area, the scenario counter is incremented by 1. If the number of games to be taught is greater than the number of remaining untaught games stored in the untaught game number counter for setting, all of the remaining untaught games stored in the untaught game number counter for setting is set in the corresponding area of the teaching scenario memory area.

Incidentally, FIG. 32(a) shows a determined teaching scenario memory area set to teach an uninstructed number of games of 200 games in a specialized zone. In addition, multiple types of teaching schedule tables are provided, and depending on the value set in the setting uninstructed game number counter at the time of transition to the specialized zone (e.g., divided into less than 200 games and 200 games or more), if the remaining number of uninstructed games is large, a teaching schedule table that is likely to teach a large number of games is selected. Furthermore, the fact that a teaching schedule table that is likely to teach a large number of games has been selected may be displayed in a manner that makes it clear on the performance display device 15 (a display may be derived to indicate that it is a higher-level specialized zone).

The main control device 131 also derives the setting contents of the instruction scenario storage area to the sub-control device 111. As shown in FIG. 32(b), the sub-control device 111 derives, in the performance display device 15, an entry display 191 indicating the entry of the specialized zone, and a look-ahead display 192 as a suggestive display indicating the expected degree of added value for each game among the multiple games that are the subject of the specialized zone. The look-ahead display 192 displays, for example, five treasure chests lined up on the left and right, and the treasure chest corresponding to the game to be executed first is displayed in the square on the left side. Furthermore, if the number of games to be taught is 10 games, a white and blue treasure chest is displayed; if it is 20 games, a white, blue and yellow treasure chest is displayed; if it is 30 games, a white, blue, yellow and green treasure chest is displayed; if it is 50 games, a white, yellow, green and red treasure chest is displayed; if it is 100 games, a white, green and red treasure chest is displayed; and if it is 200 games or more, a white, green, red and rainbow colored treasure chest is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 32(c), in the specialized zone, when a replay is won, the number of games to be taught stored in the corresponding area of the teaching scenario memory area is not taught. As a corresponding process, the number of games to be taught stored in the corresponding area of the teaching scenario memory area is added to the setting unteached game number counter, and then the number of games to be taught stored in the corresponding area of the teaching scenario memory area is set to "0". Furthermore, a command is output to the sub-control device 111 indicating that a replay has been won.

When a role other than replay is won, the number of games to be taught is instructed by the performance display device 15. However, there are two patterns: one in which the number of games to be taught stored in the corresponding area of the teaching scenario memory area is taught as is, and another pattern. In other words, in the specialized zone, at the start of each game, it is determined whether the number of games has been added based on the winning role in that game. If the number of games has been added, the same value as the value added to the untaught game number counter for setting is added to the untaught game number counter for setting, and a freeze reservation flag indicating that a freeze game is scheduled to occur is set to ON. Also, if it is determined that there is no addition with the winning role, a teaching setting process is performed to determine whether the number of games to be taught is taught as is. In the teaching setting process, if the number of games to be taught stored in the corresponding area of the teaching scenario memory area is 10 games, "as is" is determined. If it is 20 games or more, a lottery is held, and if there is no winning, "as is" is determined. On the other hand, if the player wins, the freeze reservation flag is set to ON, the setting uninstructed game number counter is set to a value obtained by subtracting 10 games from the number of games to be taught stored in the corresponding area of the teaching scenario memory area, and 10 games are set in the corresponding area of the teaching scenario memory area.

Furthermore, when the freeze reservation flag is set, a pseudo stop count setting process is performed to determine the number of pseudo stop displays during freeze play, and a value corresponding to the determined number is set in the pseudo stop count counter that stores the number of pseudo stop displays. The higher the value of the setting uninstructed game count counter, the easier it is to select a higher number. In addition, a command is output to the sub-control device 111, including information such as the fact that the freeze reservation flag has been set, the value of the pseudo stop count counter, and the value of the setting uninstructed game count counter. The sub-control device 111 sets how many games to add in response to each pseudo stop display (10 games for the first pseudo stop display, 10 games for the second pseudo stop display, 50 games for the third pseudo stop display, etc.). In this embodiment, when a freeze play is performed, the configuration is such that all values of the setting uninstructed game count counter at that time are taught, but it may also be configured to leave a number of games that are not taught.

In a game that is started by operating the start lever 71 in a specialized zone with the freeze reservation flag not set to on, the number of games to be taught that is stored in the corresponding area of the teaching scenario memory area is taught. In other words, the main control device 131 moves the reel unit 41 normally, and the performance display device 15 also displays an additional bonus (teaching the number of games not yet taught), suggests a winning combination, and displays a winning combination, etc.

On the other hand, in a game that is started by operating the start lever 71 in a specialized zone with the freeze reservation flag set to ON, a freeze game is executed at the beginning of the game (before the main game). For example, as shown in FIG. 32(c), when a cherry wins in a specific game in the specialized zone, the performance display device 15 derives an additional display 193 of 10 games based on the cherry winning, and a freeze reservation flag is set internally, the reels are rotated in reverse based on the operation of the start lever 71 to start the next game, and then, as shown in FIG. 32(d), a freeze game is performed in which the reels are pseudo-stopped and displayed in the state of the cherry winning before the reverse rotation started, and the performance display device 15 derives an additional display 194 indicating that 10 games have been added in response to the pseudo-stop display (additional display of cherries), for a total of 20 games will be added. In the main control device 131, the pseudo-stop display is performed, and the value of the pseudo-stop counter is decremented by 1.

Following the additional top-up display 194, the performance display device 15 displays a top-up operation guide display 195, as shown in FIG. 32(e), encouraging the user to operate the start lever 71 to further display a pseudo-stopped cherry. During this time, the state of the pseudo-stopped display of the reels (slight shaking) is maintained. If the start lever 71 is operated at this point, the main control device 131 checks the value of the pseudo-stop count counter, and if it is "0", it causes the reels to operate normally and outputs a command to the sub-control device 111 to end the freeze game. On the other hand, if the value of the pseudo-stop count counter is "other than 0", it rotates the reels in reverse and then displays a pseudo-stopped cherry winning mode.

Of course, when the number of uninstructed games is taught in the specialized zone, the number of games taught is also subtracted from the value of the uninstructed game counter. For example, in addition to the display of the treasure chest alone, a display with a figure on the back of the treasure chest may also be derived, and the specialized zone may end midway if a replay is won in the corresponding game. Conversely, the specialized zone may continue when a replay is won, and the specialized zone may end when a role other than a replay is won. Also, a pattern may be set in which no additional bonus is added even if a treasure chest (white treasure chest) is opened (each area of the teaching scenario memory area may be set to "0"). In addition, in the specialized zone, a freeze game may always be derived in consecutive games (a configuration in which reverse rotation occurs every time except the first game, or a configuration in which a transition to reverse rotation or a return to normal rotation occurs via a state that is not reverse rotation, such as a swinging state, may be made).

As described above, in this embodiment, a specialized zone is provided to teach the number of uninstructed games in the AT state over multiple games, thereby dramatically improving presentation and playability. In particular, since freeze play can occur with a high probability, it is possible to reliably execute instructions regarding the addition of the number of AT games in freeze play, separate from the main game that follows the freeze play. Therefore, while the period during which presentations that are expected to increase interest are performed is increased, the state without any change can be relatively reduced, thereby amplifying the satisfaction obtained from playing the game.

Furthermore, although the number of AT games that can be taught is fixed, by deriving the look-ahead display 192, it suggests the expected degree of an increase in the number of AT games in the upcoming game (actually, the number of AT games that will be taught within the range of the number of AT games that have not been taught yet that you already have), and if you win a role other than a replay or miss in the game in question, you may be able to add the number of games according to the suggestion, creating a state that is distinct from other states. Therefore, by utilizing a configuration that divides the number of untaught games into multiple games and teaches them, it is possible to dramatically increase interest.

(uu; another specialized zone) In a freeze game of one game, as in the specific AT state of the second embodiment, the number of games may or may not be added (the number of uninstructed games may be taught) depending on the combination of symbols that are pseudo-stopped in response to a specified number of operations of the start lever 71. For example, if there are 200 uninstructed games (an addition of 200 games has occurred), a special zone of 5 games (freeze game from start to finish) may be played, and a pseudo stop game that teaches an addition of 50 games may be played on the first, second, fourth, and fifth operations of the start lever 71, and a pseudo stop game that fails to add games may be played on the third operation of the start lever 71.

As a specific AT state, as in the second embodiment, the configuration is such that the uninstructed amount of the AT game can be taught or suggested by freeze play in multiple consecutive games, but at the start of the AT state, the number of additional (instructed) games for each game in the specific AT state can be determined, and freeze play can be generated for each game in the specific AT state. It may also be configured so that it is not generated by lottery. Even when this configuration is adopted, it is possible to increase the game variation without ending the specific AT state with one game (play), and it is also possible to enjoy freeze play for a relatively long period of time. It is intended to include cases where the games in which the uninstructed amount of the AT game is taught or suggested by freeze play in the specific AT state are not necessarily consecutive.

(vv: fake presentation when the guidance play in the case of transition to the special state is performed within the pseudo play) In the above second embodiment, in a state other than the AT state (specific AT state), the guidance play is performed as part of the AT start freeze play, and the deriving of the guidance play in a state other than the AT state (specific AT state) is associated with the transition to the AT state, but a pattern may be provided in which the transition to the AT state does not occur even if the guidance play is derive in a state other than the AT state (specific AT state). Also, the guidance play in the case of no transition to the AT state may be performed as a freeze play (the stop mode of the guidance play is a pseudo stop display) or as the actual game (the stop mode of the guidance play is a stop display).

However, if the guide game when the AT state does not transition is the main game, the guide game when the AT state transitions is a freeze game, so if the wait time occurs at the start of the fluctuation (even if the start lever 71 is operated within a specified time from the start of the previous game, the main game based on the lever operation will only start after the specified time has elapsed, while the freeze game can start within the specified time from the start of the previous game), it will be understood that the AT state will not be transitioned to. For this reason, the guide game when the AT state does not transition can be treated as a freeze game, and can be aligned with the trigger for starting the guide game when the AT state transitions, or, as a start condition for the guide game when the AT state transitions, a freeze state in which the reels are (almost) not moved can be inserted before the wait time has elapsed (the guide game is started before the wait time has elapsed), or the guide game for the freeze game can be started immediately after the start of the main game.

(lol: an effect performed between a guide game performed in a pseudo game and the following pseudo stop game) In the AT start freeze game of the second embodiment, the freeze game continues even after the guide game. In the above second embodiment, after the guide game, the stop state (the state of sevens lined up) is maintained for a predetermined time, and the effect display device displays the lined up symbols and the number of added games. In contrast, as a modified example, the reels may behave differently from the state (behavior) of the pseudo stop display to give a predetermined instruction or suggestion regarding the AT state to be given (making it possible to derive a prior behavior based on the reels and symbols of the reel unit 41).

For example, during the period between the end of the guide play of the AT start freeze play and the start of the pseudo stop play (a state in which the operation of the start lever 71 is encouraged), a hidden operation input different from the operation of the start lever 71 by the player (for example, the performance button 101 is operated a predetermined number of times. The number of operations may be the same each time or may be random each time) may be performed, so that the pre-behavior (a predetermined instruction or suggestion regarding the AT state, etc.) can be derived before the pseudo stop play is started. As the pre-behavior, for example, one reel bouncing (the pattern moves upward and then returns downward) may suggest that there is about a 50% possibility that the pseudo stop display will be executed, two reels bouncing may instruct that the pseudo stop display will be executed (100%), and three reels bouncing may instruct that the pseudo stop display will be executed two or more times. Also, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation of the stop switch for the third stop of the guide play is maintained for a specified time or more to become a hidden operation input (the pre-behavior is the timing when the third stop operation is released).
Incidentally, even if a hidden operation input is performed, if the lottery based on the input is not won, the preliminary behavior may not be executed.

In other words, by requiring an operation input at the end of the guidance game and the start of the pseudo-stop game, it is possible to give the impression that the variable display is separated once at each timing, but the pseudo-game is also in progress during the period after the guidance game and before the pseudo-stop game, and it is also possible to make the identification information behave in a predetermined manner after the end of the guidance game and before the start of the pseudo-stop game, and to give a predetermined suggestion or instruction. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel presentation to the player who sees such behavior.

Furthermore, hidden operation input is required to derive the pre-behavior, and the player can decide whether or not to view the pre-behavior. Also, by recognizing the hidden elements, it is expected that the effect of increasing the attachment to the gaming machine can be expected.

(xx: Timing of freeze game start) The timing of freeze game start may be set in multiple patterns between the occurrence of a trigger to start the game (variable display of symbols) and the end of the game (stopped display of symbols). In this case, it is possible to increase the timing at which the player can expect a freeze game to occur in the game (variable display of symbols), improving playability and presentation. In addition, in freeze game, whether or not to generate a teaching or suggestion of the untaught amount of the number of games may be determined by a teaching lottery performed based on the operation of a specified operation means (for example, operation of the start lever 71, stop switch, or presentation button 101) by the player. In this case, it is possible to give the impression that the addition is determined by the player's operation, and since the timing of the teaching or suggestion of the untaught amount of the number of games is the timing of the player's operation, it is possible to make the player more interested in the freeze game.

(yy; reel rotation direction and added expectation) In the AT start freeze game of the second embodiment, for example, the expectation of the red 7s being pseudo-stopped may be different when the reels rotate in the reverse direction from the state where the white 7s are pseudo-stopped and when the reels rotate forward. Also, since the forward rotation of the reels may be perceived as the end of the freeze game, the action at the end of the freeze game may be different (such as inserting another action), or a reversal effect may be used (the expectation change effect may be, for example, a pattern in which the reels suddenly open in the reverse direction, a pattern in which the reels move in the reverse direction a certain angle and display a pseudo-stop once before rotating in the reverse direction, and a pattern in which the reels move in the reverse direction a certain angle and display a pseudo-stop once, then move in the reverse direction a certain angle and rotate in the reverse direction from the pseudo-stop once, and the expectation may be higher when the action of moving in the reverse direction a certain angle and stopping once is inserted.

(zz; sharing of control) In the second embodiment described above, when a push order role is won, the control for deriving a display instructing the push order on the performance display device 15 is configured to be executed by a command from the main control device 131, but the sub-control device 111 may be configured to determine the push order and instruct the push order. Also, the sub-control device 111 may be configured to be able to execute reel control in pseudo games (freeze games, pseudo stop games) that are not the actual game. In this case, it becomes easier to cooperate with operating means electrically connected to the sub-control device 111 (for example, the reels start to rotate in reverse when the performance button 101 is operated in a freeze game).

In addition, the presentation operation means (buttons, switches, or sensors) such as the presentation button 101 may be electrically connected to the main control device 131, and the operation detection of the presentation operation means may be output to the sub-control device 111 via the main control device 131 (or may be electrically connected to both the main control device 131 and the sub-control device 111, so that the detection state can be grasped by both). In this case, it is possible to proceed with the freeze game in response to the operation of the presentation operation means.

(aaa; Backlight Assist) In the above embodiment, for example, the backlight built into each reel may be configured to make the target symbol in the guide play brighter than the other symbols (partitioned and correspondingly provided with light-emitting means), and the target symbol may be configured to be brighter than the other symbols during the guide play. When it is determined that the target symbols do not line up in the guide play, the highlighting of the target symbol by the backlight is terminated (when it is determined that the target symbols do not line up, the backlight may be dimmed or turned off once and then returned to normal brightness). On the other hand, when the target symbols line up, the highlighting of the target symbol may be continued until the start of the next game, or the backlight may be configured to be in a relatively flashy mode that informs the player that a favorable state will occur.

In addition, for example, similar patterns (first similar pattern, second similar pattern) that are largely the same but differ in details may be provided as reel patterns, and specific combinations including each similar pattern may be provided in which only the similar patterns differ. For example, the right reel (of course, other reels are also possible) may have a first white 7 symbol (e.g., a dot placed at a position away from the 7 symbol to the lower left) and a second white 7 symbol (e.g., the line at the top right of the 7 is slightly thicker), and in the role drawing, apart from the case where "white 7, white 7, first white 7" is won, there is also the case where "white 7, white 7, second white 7" is won, and in the guide game, only the first white 7 symbol and the second white 7 symbol that can be stopped are illuminated with a backlight, and when "white 7, white 7, first white 7" is stopped (a prize), a state advantageous to the player who has played 50 games (e.g., the RT2 state of the first embodiment) is given, and when "white 7, white 7, second white 7" is stopped (a prize), a state advantageous to the player who has played 100 games is given.

(bbb; overlap between a predetermined lottery result and freeze game) If a bonus role is won in the role lottery based on the lever being pressed to start a game in which a freeze game is scheduled, the freeze game may be stopped and the game may be forced to switch to a variable display (presentation) to inform the player that a bonus role has been won, or the freeze game may be played as scheduled and then a variable display (presentation) to inform the player that a bonus role has been won may be performed, the content of the freeze game (freeze presentation) may be changed to one that also informs the player that a bonus role has been won, or the variable display (presentation) to inform the player that a bonus role has been won may be postponed until the next game or later. Also, in a slot machine equipped with a pseudo bonus (AT state or ART state), when a pseudo bonus is won in response to a role drawing based on the lever being turned on to start a game in which a freeze play is scheduled, the freeze play may be stopped and the system may be configured to forcibly transition to a variable display (presentation) to inform the player that the pseudo bonus has been won, or the freeze game may be performed as scheduled and then a variable display (presentation) to inform the player that the pseudo bonus has been won may be performed, the content of the freeze game (freeze presentation) may be changed to content that also informs the player that the pseudo bonus has been won, or the variable display (presentation) to inform the player that the pseudo bonus has been won may be postponed until the next game or later. In addition, a role corresponding to a unique freeze game (for example, a middle cherry with a rate of 1/32768) may be provided, and if the winning of the freeze role overlaps with a game in which a freeze is scheduled, the freeze game may be stopped and a forced transition to a variable display (effect) to inform the player that the freeze role has been won may be made, or the freeze game (freeze effect) may be changed to one that also informs the player that the freeze role has been won (since a rare freeze role cannot be displayed (awarded) in a game other than the one in question, it is preferable not to have the effect to inform the player that the freeze role has been won in the next game onwards).

(ccc;) In the second embodiment, at the start of the AT state, it is confirmed whether the number of AT games to be awarded is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of games, and if it is less than the predetermined number of games, the reel unit 41 can display a pseudo-stop of "white 7" in a freeze game, and the performance display device 15 can display "white 7" or "V", and if it is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games, the reel unit 41 can display a pseudo-stop of "red 7" in a freeze game, and the performance display device 15 can display "red 7" or "V". It is confirmed that the minimum guaranteed number of games for the AT state is awarded at the time the AT transition lottery is won, and by winning the AT game number addition before the AT state starts, the number of games at the start of the AT state (initial number of games) will be greater than the minimum guaranteed number of games. In this embodiment, the function of confirming whether the number of AT games to be awarded is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of games at the start of the AT state constitutes the confirmation means.

[Additional Notes]
The technical ideas that can be understood from the above-described embodiments will be described below.

A. One type of gaming machine is a reel-type gaming machine, such as a slot machine. A slot machine has multiple reels with multiple symbols on them, and when a player inserts a medal and operates a start lever, each reel starts to spin. After each reel starts to spin, the reels stop sequentially when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed. In addition, a slot machine holds a lottery on the condition that a specified number of medals are inserted and the start lever is operated. If a predetermined benefit (a predetermined number of medals is awarded or a special game state advantageous to the player) is won based on the lottery, the predetermined benefit is awarded on the condition that the symbol associated with the predetermined benefit stops on a preset pay line (see, for example, JP 2003-126337 A).

In addition, there is always a demand for innovative presentation of gaming machines.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the presentation.

A control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the establishment of a specific condition;
A variable display means for starting a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information when the winning/losing lottery is held, and for stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the winning/losing lottery;
and a performance display means capable of deriving a performance display that is performed in association with the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means and that shows or suggests the result of the winning/losing lottery;
A configuration in which a derivable aspect in the variable display of the identification information is determined based on the winning/losing lottery, and when at least a specific aspect is derivable in the variable display of the identification information, the specific benefit is won or can be won, and when the specific aspect is derivable and the specific benefit is won, the specific benefit is granted not only when the specific aspect is derived, but also when the specific aspect is not derived,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for changing the mode of the presentation display performed in response to the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means when the mode of the variable display means is the specific mode and when it is a mode different from the specific mode.

According to the means A-1-a, if a specific mode is derivable in the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means (in the variable display of the identification information that is capable of derivation of the specific mode), a specific benefit is won, but as long as the specific benefit is won, the specific benefit is awarded whether or not the specific mode is derived. However, it is considered that the impression of the player is different when a specific mode is derived and when a specific mode is not derived. In other words, it is considered that the state of mind of the player is greatly different, even just whether or not the player is excited with the certainty of the specific benefit being awarded, between a case where a specific mode is derived and it is easy to grasp (infer) at a glance that a specific benefit (for a player playing the gaming machine for the first time, this is some kind of benefit) is awarded, and a case where a mode that is not visually beautiful is derived and it is not possible to grasp that a specific benefit is awarded.

Furthermore, in the case where the presentation display of the presentation display means, which is performed in response to the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means, is the same whether the specific mode is derived when the identification information starts to vary or not, the presentation display will be the same as when the specific mode is derived, even though the specific mode is not derived, and this raises concerns that this will give the player a feeling of discomfort with the presentation display, and ultimately with the game.

In this regard, according to the present means A-1-a, the mode of the presentation of the presentation display means performed in response to the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means is made different between when the specific mode has been derived and when the specific mode has not been derived. Therefore, when a specific benefit is won and the specific benefit is awarded, if a specific mode has been derived in the variable display means, the winning and award of the specific benefit can be indicated in the presentation display of the variable display means performed in response to the variable display of the identification information, and the association between the specific mode and the specific benefit can be strengthened.

On the other hand, when a specific bonus is won and the specific bonus is awarded, if the specific mode has not been derived in the variable display means, the display of the variable display means performed in response to the variable display of the identification information can show that the specific bonus has been won and awarded in a different manner than when the specific mode has been derived. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the same display as when the specific mode has been derived is derived in the display of the performance even though the specific mode has not been derived, causing a sense of incongruity. As a result, it is possible to avoid weakening the association between the specific mode and the specific bonus. Furthermore, for example, in the display of the performance when the specific mode has not been derived, it is possible to show a different performance from when the specific mode has been derived, such as a performance in which the specific mode could not be derived but a specific bonus has been awarded in a reversal, and it is possible to perform a performance that is in line with the player's state of mind (easy to organize). As a result, it is possible to improve the performance and gameplay.

Means A-1-b. A control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the establishment of a specific condition;
A variable display means for starting a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information when the winning/losing lottery is held, and for stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the winning/losing lottery;
and a performance display means capable of deriving a performance display that is performed in association with the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means and that shows or suggests the result of the winning/losing lottery;
When a specific benefit is won based on the winning/losing lottery, a specific mode can be derived in the variable display of the identification information, and the specific benefit is granted not only when the specific mode is derived but also when the specific mode is not derived,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for changing the mode of the presentation display performed in response to the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means when the mode of the variable display means is the specific mode and when it is a mode different from the specific mode.

According to the means A-1-b, when a specific benefit is won, a specific mode of the variable display means corresponding to the specific benefit can be derived, and the specific benefit is awarded whether or not the specific mode is derived (in the variable display of the identification information from which the specific mode can be derived). However, it is considered that the impression of the player is different when the specific mode corresponding to the specific benefit is derived and when the specific mode is not derived. In other words, it is considered that the state of mind of the player is greatly different, even just whether or not the player is excited with confidence that the specific benefit will be awarded, between the case where a specific mode that is relatively beautiful in appearance is derived and it is easy to grasp (infer) at a glance that a specific benefit (for a player playing the gaming machine for the first time) will be awarded, and the case where a mode that is not beautiful in appearance is derived and it is not possible to grasp that a specific benefit will be awarded.

Furthermore, in the case where the presentation display of the presentation display means, which is performed in response to the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means when a specific benefit is awarded, is a common pattern whether the specific mode is derived when the identification information starts to vary or not, the same presentation display as when the specific mode is derived will be performed even though the specific mode is not derived, which may give the player a feeling of discomfort with the presentation display and ultimately with the game.

In this regard, according to the present means A-1-b, the manner of the presentation display when a specific benefit is awarded is different between when a specific benefit has been derived and when a specific benefit has not been derived. Therefore, if a specific benefit is won and awarded when a specific benefit is won and awarded, the presentation display of the variable display means performed in response to the variable display of the identification information can indicate that the specific benefit has been won and awarded, thereby strengthening the association between the specific benefit and the specific benefit.

On the other hand, when a specific bonus is won and the specific bonus is awarded, if the specific mode has not been derived in the variable display means, the display of the variable display means performed in response to the variable display of the identification information can show that the specific bonus has been won and awarded in a different manner than when the specific mode has been derived. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the same display as when the specific mode has been derived is derived in the display of the performance even though the specific mode has not been derived, causing a sense of incongruity. As a result, it is possible to avoid weakening the association between the specific mode and the specific bonus. Furthermore, for example, in the display of the performance when the specific mode has not been derived, it is possible to show a different performance from when the specific mode has been derived, such as a performance in which the specific mode could not be derived but a specific bonus has been awarded in a reversal, and it is possible to perform a performance that is in line with the player's state of mind (easy to organize). As a result, it is possible to improve the performance and gameplay.

The phrase "capable of deriving a specific mode" means that the identification information can be recognized by the player as being in a specific mode, and includes not only cases where the identification information is completely stationary, but also cases where the identification information appears to be stationary (for example, when it is moving slightly, etc.). The "result of the winning/losing lottery" in the phrase "a performance display that is performed in conjunction with the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means and that teaches or suggests the result of the winning/losing lottery" is not limited to the result of the winning/losing lottery corresponding to the corresponding variable display, but can also be the result of the winning/losing lottery corresponding to the variable display performed before the corresponding variable display (a stage in which the award given by winning the corresponding winning/losing lottery has not been fully consumed). The phrase "specific mode associated with the specific award" includes a stop mode of the identification information that cannot be displayed stationary unless the specific award is won, and does not include a mode that can be derived when the specific award is won, but can be derived even if the specific award is not won. It may also be that "a regular benefit is provided as the benefit, and when the regular benefit is won in the winning/losing lottery, the corresponding regular benefit identification information among the identification information can be displayed as a static display, and the regular benefit is awarded when the regular benefit identification information is displayed as a static display in the variable display of the identification information in which the regular benefit identification information can be displayed as a static display." In addition, "a specific benefit is awarded" is intended to include not only the case where the variable display of the identification information is executed for the first time after a transition to a state advantageous to the player, but also the case where the period of the state advantageous to the player is increased, or the period of the state advantageous to the player is reset, and the variable display of the identification information is executed for the first time.

Means A-1-c. A control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the establishment of a specific condition;
A variable display means for starting a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information when the winning/losing lottery is held, and for stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the winning/losing lottery;
and a performance display means capable of deriving a performance display that is performed in association with the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means and that shows or suggests the result of the winning/losing lottery;
A configuration in which a derivable aspect in the variable display of the identification information is determined based on the winning/losing lottery, and when at least a specific aspect is derivable in the variable display of the identification information, the specific benefit is won or can be won, and when the specific aspect is derivable and the specific benefit is won, the specific benefit is granted not only when the specific aspect is derived, but also when the specific aspect is not derived,
When the specific benefit is awarded, the performance display means is configured to be capable of deriving a performance display that instructs or suggests the award of the specific benefit,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for changing the state of the award performance display when the state of the variable display means at the time the award performance display is derived is the specific state and when it is a state different from the specific state.

Method A-1-c basically achieves the same effect as the above-mentioned method A-1-a. In addition, the fact that a specific benefit will be awarded by the awarding presentation means can be communicated to the player in a more understandable and exciting manner.

Means A-1-d. A control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the establishment of a specific condition;
A variable display means for starting a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information when the winning/losing lottery is held, and for stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the winning/losing lottery;
and a performance display means capable of deriving a performance display that is performed in association with the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means and that shows or suggests the result of the winning/losing lottery;
When a specific benefit is won based on the winning/losing lottery, a specific mode can be derived in the variable display of the identification information, and the specific benefit is granted not only when the specific mode is derived but also when the specific mode is not derived,
When the specific benefit is awarded, the performance display means is configured to be capable of deriving a performance display that instructs or suggests the award of the specific benefit,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for changing the state of the award performance display when the state of the variable display means at the time the award performance display is derived is the specific state and when it is a state different from the specific state.

Method A-1-d basically achieves the same effect as the above-mentioned method A-1-b. In addition, the fact that a specific benefit will be awarded by the awarding performance means can be communicated to the player in a more understandable and exciting manner.

Means A-2. The gaming machine described in means A-1, characterized in that a guide means is provided that can derive a guide game that informs the player that the specific identification information constituting the specific mode among the identification information may be displayed as a static display or a pseudo static display in the variable display of the identification information that can derive the specific mode.

Method A-2 makes it possible to make the player aware of the possibility of a specific pattern being derived, and effectively creates a point where the player can get excited.

Means A-3. In the performance display means, a guidance game performance is performed, which is a performance of the performance display corresponding to the guidance game,
The gaming machine described in means A-2 is characterized in that, even if the specific bonus is won in the win/lose lottery, if an identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed in the guidance game, the guidance game presentation is performed in a different manner than when the specific identification information is displayed in the guidance game.

Even if the specific benefit is won in the win/lose lottery, if the specific identification information (specific aspect) corresponding to the specific benefit is not derived, for example, if a presentation in which the mission is successful is derived in the guidance game presentation, there is a concern that a sense of incongruity will be generated (there will be concern that a bug has occurred). In this regard, according to means A-3, if the specific identification information is not frozen in the guidance game, a guidance game presentation of a different aspect from the guidance game presentation that is derived when the specific identification information is frozen in the guidance game can be performed. For example, a presentation in which the mission in the guidance game presentation is failed at least once can be derived. Therefore, the frozen aspect of the identification information of the variable display means can be appropriately associated with the presentation content of the presentation display means, eliminating the above concerns and improving presentation quality, etc.

Means A-4. The gaming machine described in means A-3, characterized in that, even if the specific bonus is won in the winning/losing lottery, if an identification information different from the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the guidance game, an indication of failure of the mission is derived in the guidance game indication, and at least at the start of the indication display that corresponds to the variable display of the identification information next to the variable display of the identification information from which the guidance game was derived (the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means that is performed when the specific bonus is awarded), an indication of success of the mission is derived in the indication display means.

Basically, it is common for the display of the presentation to end when the identification information is frozen, and if a revival presentation is to be derived in the guidance game presentation in which a mission is failed once and then succeeded in a reversal, the presentation must continue after the identification information is frozen. Also, in a configuration in which the presentation display can be ended by an operation that allows the player to progress in the game, the revival presentation will be canceled, and in that case, in the next change in the identification information display (next game), a specific bonus will suddenly be awarded, which is a concern as it may confuse the player.

In this regard, according to means A-4, the revival effect can be reliably seen, and the above concerns can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance. Note that "at the start of the effect display performed in response to the variable display of the identification information following the variable display of the identification information from which the guidance game was derived, an effect that succeeds the mission is derived in the effect display means" includes the meaning that, when a pseudo game is played at the beginning of the variable display of the identification information in which the identification information behaves differently from the variable display, an effect that succeeds the mission is derived in the effect in the effect display means corresponding to the pseudo game.

Means A-5. A gaming machine according to any one of means A-2 to A-4, characterized in that the guide game can be derived even if the specific benefit is not won.

By using the method A-5, it is possible to avoid simple gameplay such as always having a specific mode displayed in a stopped state or obtaining a specific benefit when a guide game is derived, and it is possible to improve the gameplay of the guide game, etc.

Means A-6. The gaming machine described in means A-5, characterized in that the guide game is derived even if a fake role is won in the winning/losing lottery.

By using the method A-6, even if a specific bonus is not won, it is possible to derive a state close to a specific state in the guide game. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player interested in the movement of the variable display means until the very end of the guide game.

Means A-7. A gaming machine according to any one of means A-2 to A-6, characterized in that the guide game may not be derived even if the specific benefit is won.

According to the means A-7, it is possible to add a pattern in which the player is suddenly informed of the grant of a specific benefit (a pseudo game, described later, is started) without going through a guide game, thereby improving the gameplay. It may also be configured that "if the specific benefit is won in the win/lose lottery and the specific feature is not derived in the variable display of the identification information from which the specific feature can be derived, an auxiliary specific feature is derived as a feature different from the case in which the specific feature is derived in the performance display means." In this case, even if the specific features are not all set, it is possible to make the player aware (in a relatively grand manner) that a specific benefit will be granted. Furthermore, it may also be configured that "if the specific benefit is won but the guide game is not derived, the auxiliary specific feature is not derived until the pseudo game is executed, until the specific feature is derived."

Means A-8. A stop operation means is provided so as to be operable by a player, and is capable of stopping the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means based on the operation of the player;
A gaming machine described in any of means A-2 to A-7, characterized in that even if the stop operation means is operated based on guidance by the guidance means in a state in which the specific identification information can be displayed in a stopped state or a pseudo-stopped state, the specific identification information may not be displayed in a stopped state or a pseudo-stopped state.

According to the means A-8, whether or not a specific mode is derived as the mode of the variable display means when a specific benefit is awarded (whether or not the specific identification information is displayed as a stopped display or a pseudo-stop display) is based on the player's operation of the stop operation means. Therefore, when a specific benefit is awarded, it is quite possible that identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed as a stopped display (or a pseudo-stop display), and there is generally not one pattern, but multiple patterns of identification information different from the specific identification information. Therefore, when a specific benefit is won and a specific benefit is awarded, the effect of being able to play without any sense of incongruity is more pronounced by making the performance display means a corresponding mode in the case where a specific mode is derived in the variable display means and the case where a specific mode is not derived in the variable display means. In addition, even if a guide game is derived and the stop operation means is operated, there are cases where the specific identification information is not displayed as a stopped display, and the original enjoyment of a gaming machine equipped with a stop operation means, such as a player aiming for the specific identification information and stopping it, can be maintained.

Means A-9. At least when the specific benefit is given, a pseudo game is executed in which the variable display means causes the identification information to behave differently from the variable display during the period from when a trigger occurs to start the variable display of the identification information to when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and the variable display of the identification information is started or resumed after the pseudo game.
A gaming machine described in any of means A-1 to A-8, characterized in that when the specific benefit is won in the win/lose lottery and the pseudo game is executed, the state of the variable display means when the pseudo game is executed is different between when it is the specific state and when it is a state different from the specific state, resulting in a pseudo game presentation, which is the presentation of the presentation display corresponding to the pseudo game.

According to means A-9, by performing a pseudo game on the variable display means, it is possible to create excitement about winning a specific bonus. In addition, since the pseudo game presentation is different when a specific mode is derived at the start of a pseudo game in the event that a specific bonus is won and when it is not derived, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort even if the mode (behavior) of the identification information in the pseudo game is different. Therefore, it is possible to simplify control, etc., compared to a configuration in which the appearance of the identification information in a pseudo game when a specific mode is not derived is forcibly made to completely match the appearance of the identification information in a pseudo game when a specific mode is derived halfway through.

In addition, when a specific bonus is awarded, a pseudo game, that is, an effect is performed in which the variable display of the identification information is suspended or put on hold for start, whether the state of the variable display means when the specific bonus is awarded is a state different from the specific state or the specific state. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the variable display of the identification information can be consumed more quickly when a state different from the specific state is displayed as a static display (pseudo static display) when a specific bonus is awarded than when the specific state is displayed as a static display (pseudo static display). In other words, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player who prioritizes time efficiency selects a static display of a state different from the specific state just for the sake of time efficiency, and the player can enjoy the series of effects leading to the specific state without any worries.

The "behavior of the identification information different from the variable display" in the "pseudo game" includes "displacement of the identification information in a direction different from the direction in which the identification information changes during the variable display," "stopping temporarily or vibrating slightly (for example, small back and forth movements)," etc. The "case where, when the specific bonus is won in the win/lose lottery and the pseudo game is executed, the state of the variable display means when the pseudo game is executed is a state different from the specific state" is not limited to, for example, a case where a state different from the specific state is derived because the player does not properly execute a predetermined operation, but may also be a case where a state different from the specific state is derived as an effect on the gaming machine side.

It may also be that "the effect of suspending the variable display of the identification information or waiting for its start is longer when the state of the variable display means when the specific benefit is awarded is a state different from the specific state than when the state of the variable display means when the specific benefit is awarded is the specific state." In this case, it is more desirable in terms of time efficiency to derive the specific state, and the player can be genuinely happy that the specific state has been derived.

Means A-10: When the specific benefit is won in the winning/losing lottery and the pseudo game is executed in a state in which the specific mode is derived, the specific mode (or a related mode associated with the specific mode) is derived in the pseudo game;
The gaming machine described in Means A-9 is characterized in that even when the specific bonus is won in the win/lose lottery and the pseudo game is executed in a state in which a predetermined mode different from the specific mode is derived, processing is executed similar to when the pseudo game is executed in a state in which the specific mode is derived, and the predetermined mode is derived in the pseudo game.

According to the means A-10, the control for the behavior of the identification information in the pseudo game can be the same regardless of (without checking) the state of the variable display means at the start of the pseudo game, and the control can be simplified. In particular, when the identification information of the variable display means is displayed variably mechanically, such an effect is more pronounced.

For example, if multiple types of patterns are applied to the outer peripheral surface of a circular reel and the reel is rotated once in a pseudo game to cause a pseudo stopped display (pseudo stopped display), then if a pattern constituting a specific mode is displayed as stopped during execution of the pseudo game, the pattern constituting the specific mode will be pseudo stopped, and on the other hand, if a pattern constituting a mode different from the specific mode is displayed as stopped during execution of the pseudo game, the pattern constituting the mode different from the specific mode will be pseudo stopped. Also, for example, a symbol counter is provided which is referred to when determining the symbol to be stopped and displayed. For example, if 21 symbols are attached to a reel and a number is associated with each symbol, and symbol number 1 is identification information constituting a specific mode and symbol number 6 is a symbol indicating the addition of a specified bonus, then the symbol with symbol number 1 is targeted for stopped display or pseudo stopped display in the varying display before the varying display of the identification information in which the pseudo game is performed or at the start of the pseudo game, and for example, the symbol number which is stopped and displayed at the start of the pseudo game is stored, and the symbol corresponding to the symbol number obtained by adding 5 to that symbol number is stopped and displayed (instead of calculating the pattern number, the reel may be moved so that the corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed). If symbol number 1 is displayed as a stopped or pseudo-stopped symbol at the start of the pseudo game, then symbol number 6 will be displayed as a pseudo-stopped symbol, but if a symbol other than number 1 is displayed as a stopped or pseudo-stopped symbol at the start of the pseudo game, then symbol number 6 will not be displayed as a pseudo-stopped symbol (if it is number 3, then number 8 will be displayed as a pseudo-stopped symbol, and if it is number 20, then number 4 will be displayed as a pseudo-stopped symbol).

It may also be configured to include "a brightness change means capable of changing the brightness of the identification information, and in a case where a mode corresponding to the grant of the specific benefit is derived in the pseudo game (a specific mode is derived in a pseudo game, and specific identification information corresponding to the specific mode among the identification information is displayed in a pseudo stop), the brightness of the identification information is brighter than in a case where a mode corresponding to the grant of the specific benefit is not derived in the pseudo game (a mode different from the specific mode is derived in the pseudo game, and identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed in a stop)." In this case, it is possible to highlight the mode corresponding to the specific benefit in the pseudo game, while making the mode that does not correspond to the specific benefit as inconspicuous as possible.

"A transparent sub-display means may be provided in front of the variable display means, and when a mode corresponding to the grant of the specific benefit is derived in the pseudo game (a specific mode is derived in the pseudo game, and specific identification information corresponding to the specific mode among the identification information is displayed in a pseudo-static manner), the sub-display means does not display the identification information (or only the specific identification information) in a range covering the front of the identification information, or displays only a highly transparent display, and when a mode corresponding to the grant of the specific benefit is not derived in the pseudo game (a mode different from the specific mode is derived in the pseudo game, and identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed in a static manner), the sub-display means displays the identification information (or only the area from which the specific identification information can be derived) in a range covering the front of the identification information (or displays the identification information in a low-transparency but transparent manner, or displays the identification information in a non-transparent but scattered transparent manner, while avoiding the identification information becoming invisible). In this case, it is possible to emphasize the mode corresponding to the specific benefit in the pseudo game, while making the mode not corresponding to the specific benefit as inconspicuous as possible.

"A transparent sub-display means is provided in front of the variable display means, and when a mode corresponding to the grant of the specific benefit is derived in the pseudo game (a specific mode is derived in a pseudo game, and specific identification information corresponding to the specific mode among the identification information is displayed in a pseudo static manner), the sub-display means does not display the identification information (or only the specific identification information) in a range that covers the front of the identification information, or displays only a highly transparent display. When the specific benefit is won and a mode corresponding to the grant of the specific benefit is not derived in the pseudo game (a mode different from the specific mode is derived in the pseudo game, and identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed statically), the sub-display means may display a mode that imitates the mode of the variable display means corresponding to the grant of the specific benefit (a specific mode, a mode that imitates the specific identification information). In this case, when a specific benefit is won, the sub-display means can provide an instruction instead of a good instruction using the identification information.

Means A-11. The gaming machine described in means A-10, characterized in that the variable display means includes a reel body to which the multiple types of identification information are attached, and a drive means for driving the reel body.

According to the means A-11, since the identification information of the variable display means is mechanically displayed in a variable manner, it becomes more difficult to control the variable display means, such as starting the variable display of the identification information from a plurality of patterns of stopped states of the identification information, and appropriately adjusting the amount of change and the speed of change of the identification information during the variable display to display the same identification information in a stopped state. Therefore, as in the above-mentioned means A-2, it is not necessary to perform control such as grasping and adjusting the phase of the identification information while the identification information is changing in a pseudo game that is started in a state in which the variable display means is in a state different from the specific state, so that the specific state is derived (and further, the timing is adjusted with the pseudo game presentation), and the effect of simplifying the control is further achieved. Furthermore, when a plurality of reels are provided and a specific state is formed by combining the identification information of the plurality of reels, the above-mentioned effect is more remarkable.

In addition, in correspondence with means A-10, "the reel body is configured to perform the same operation (the same amount of displacement) from the start of the pseudo game to the end of the pseudo game when the specific mode is derived and when a mode different from the specific mode is derived when the pseudo game is executed." In other words, whether or not a specific mode is derived at the start of the pseudo game, the amount of drive of the reel body in the pseudo game is the same. Therefore, when a mode different from the specific mode is derived, it is no longer necessary to drive the reel body differently to match the appearance of the identification information when the specific mode is derived, or to perform processing to adjust the amount of drive according to the amount of difference between the mode different from the specific mode and the specific mode, and the effect of simplifying the control is more pronounced.

Means A-12. A sub-control means for controlling the performance display means based on information from the control means,
The gaming machine described in means A-11, characterized in that the driving means is controlled by the control means.

According to the means A-12, the control of the performance display means is performed by the sub-control means, and as described in the above-mentioned means A-11, the burden on the control means can be reduced by suppressing the complication of the control during the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably cause the control means to execute important processes such as the winning/losing lottery by the control means when a simulated game is being played.

Means A-13. A gaming machine according to any one of means A-9 to A-12, characterized in that the pseudo game is a pseudo stop game that pseudo-stops the varying display of the identification information.

According to the method A-13, the pseudo game is made into a pseudo stop game, so that attention to the pseudo game is further increased. By eliminating the sense of incongruity between the state of the identification information when the pseudo stop game that is attracting attention is started and the correspondence with the pseudo game presentation, the effect of improving presentation and playability is more prominently achieved.

In particular, in a configuration in which the state of the identification information at the start of the pseudo-stop game is maintained for a predetermined period (not only when it is a specific state, but also when it is a state different from the specific state), or in which a behavior in which the identification information moves back and forth for a predetermined period is derived based on the state of the identification information at the start of the pseudo-stop game, such an effect becomes even more pronounced. Note that the configuration may be such that a pseudo-game can be derived even if a specific bonus has not been won, but it is preferable that a pseudo-stop game not be derived.

Means A-14. The gaming machine described in means A-13, characterized in that when the pseudo game is executed in a state in which the specific benefit is won in the winning/losing lottery and a mode different from the specific mode is derived, the pseudo stop game is not selected as the pseudo game.

According to the means A-14, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a mode different from the specific mode (a mode with no particular meaning) is pseudo-stopped again in the pseudo-stop game, thereby reducing the presentation and gameplay (for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a player feels bad when the mode due to the erroneous operation is repeatedly displayed when the specific mode cannot be achieved due to the player's own operation error). In addition, by simply preparing a pseudo-stop game pattern in which the variable display of the identification information is pseudo-stopped and a pattern in which the variable display of the identification information is not pseudo-stopped, it is possible to avoid a mode different from the specific mode being derived in the pseudo-game. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate concerns caused by a mode different from the specific mode being pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game while suppressing the complexity of the control.

Examples of pseudo-games other than pseudo-stop games include games in which the change speed of the identification display is slow, the change speed of the identification information changes (at least there is a change speed of fast → slow → fast → slow), multiple identification information columns are provided in which multiple identification displays are respectively displayed, and the change displays of the identification information of the multiple identification information columns each perform their own unique actions (the change direction of the identification information of a given identification information column is in the opposite direction, or the movement speed is different, etc.), or perform acrobatic combination actions (in a configuration in which the change speed is switched, the change speed of the adjacent identification information switches from "fast" to "slow", switching from "slow" to "fast", or the identification information of each identification information column moves back and forth and switches from "return" to "outward" when the identification information of the adjacent identification information column switches from "outward" to "return"). Furthermore, when the identification information is displayed in a mechanically variable manner, it is desirable to minimize sudden stops from a high-speed fluctuation state or sudden changes to displacement in the opposite direction in order to reduce the burden on the variable display means.

Means A-15. The specific benefit is provided in a plurality of types,
In the pseudo-game presentation, the (specific) content of the specific benefit is instructed or suggested,
In the pseudo stop game, the identification information may be pseudo-stopped and displayed multiple times.
In the pseudo game presentation, the content of the specific benefit is divided into a plurality of parts and can be instructed or suggested in accordance with a plurality of pseudo stop displays of the pseudo stop game,
The gaming machine described in means A-14 is characterized in that in the pseudo game presentation corresponding to the pseudo game different from the pseudo stop game, the content of the specific bonus is instructed or suggested all at once, or at least a part of the content of the specific bonus is not instructed or suggested, and the remaining content of the specific bonus that has not been instructed or suggested is instructed or suggested at a timing later than the variable display of the identification information at which the pseudo game is performed.

According to means A-15, by displaying the specific identification information in a pseudo-stop state multiple times, it is possible to derive an uplifting effect in which the content of the specific benefit is stepped up to become more advantageous for the player. Furthermore, when the specific identification information is not displayed in a stopped state (pseudo-stop state), the pseudo-stop game is not selected, and therefore the pseudo-game effect accordingly instructs or suggests the benefit content all at once, or postpones the instruction or suggestion of at least a part of the benefit content. This makes it possible to make the correspondence between the aspect of the variable display means for the pseudo game, etc., and the pseudo-game effect natural, and also makes it possible to improve the presentation and gameplay.

B. One type of gaming machine is a reel-type gaming machine, such as a slot machine. A slot machine has multiple reels with multiple symbols on them, and when a player inserts a medal and operates a start lever, each reel starts to spin. After each reel starts to spin, the reels stop sequentially when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed, and the game progresses. In addition, in a slot machine, a lottery is held on the condition that a specified number of medals are inserted and the start lever is operated, and if a predetermined benefit (a predetermined number of medals is awarded or a special game state advantageous to the player) is won based on the lottery, the predetermined benefit is awarded on the condition that the symbol associated with the predetermined benefit stops on a preset pay line (see, for example, JP 2003-126337 A).

In addition, there is always a demand for innovative presentation of gaming machines.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the presentation.

Means B-1-a. A control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the establishment of a specific condition;
A variable display means for starting a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information when the winning/losing lottery is held, and for stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the winning/losing lottery;
and a performance display means capable of deriving a performance display that is performed in association with the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means and that shows or suggests the result of the winning/losing lottery;
A configuration in which a derivable mode in the variable display of the identification information is determined based on the winning/losing lottery, and when at least a specific mode can be derived in the variable display of the identification information, the specific benefit is won or can be won;
When the specific benefit is awarded, the performance display means is configured to be capable of deriving a specific performance display that instructs or suggests the awarding of the specific benefit,
A gaming machine characterized in that the presentation display of the presentation display means is changed when a non-derivation condition for preventing the specific presentation display from being derived is established between the winning of the specific bonus and the derivation of the specific presentation display.

According to the means B-1-a, when a specific benefit is awarded, the performance display means is capable of deriving a specific performance display associated with a specific mode, but it is configured to check whether a non-derivation condition that does not derive the specific performance display is met between the time when the specific benefit is won and the time when the specific performance display is derived. Therefore, if an event that would make it inconvenient to derive the specific performance display occurs between the time when the specific benefit is won and the time when the specific performance display is derived, it is possible to stop the derivation of the specific performance display, and it is possible to derive a performance that is more in line with the game development. Therefore, it is possible to build excitement in accordance with the game development while preventing the occurrence of discomfort in the performance that accompanies the game progress, thereby improving the performance.

Means B-1-b. A control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the establishment of a specific condition;
A variable display means for starting a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information when the winning/losing lottery is held, and for stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the winning/losing lottery;
and a performance display means capable of deriving a performance display that is performed in association with the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means and that shows or suggests the result of the winning/losing lottery;
When a specific benefit is won based on the winning/losing lottery, a specific pattern can be derived in the variable display of the identification information,
When the specific benefit is awarded, the performance display means is configured to be capable of deriving a specific performance display that instructs or suggests the awarding of the specific benefit,
A gaming machine characterized in that the presentation display of the presentation display means is changed when a non-derivation condition for preventing the specific presentation display from being derived is established between the winning of the specific bonus and the derivation of the specific presentation display.

Measure B-1-b basically achieves the same effects as measure B-1-a above.

Means B-1-c. A control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the establishment of a specific condition;
A variable display means for starting a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information when the winning/losing lottery is held, and for stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the winning/losing lottery;
and a performance display means capable of deriving a performance display that is performed in association with the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means and that shows or suggests the result of the winning/losing lottery;
A configuration in which a derivable mode in the variable display of the identification information is determined based on the winning/losing lottery, and when at least a specific mode can be derived in the variable display of the identification information, the specific benefit is won or can be won;
When the specific benefit is awarded, the performance display means is configured to be capable of deriving a specific performance display that instructs or suggests the awarding of the specific benefit,
When a non-derivation condition for preventing the specific performance display from being derived is established during the period from the winning of the specific benefit to the derivation of the specific performance display, the performance display of the performance display means is changed;
A gaming machine comprising a means for instructing or suggesting the winning of the specific benefit or the derivation of the specific performance display.

Measure B-1-c basically achieves the same effect as measure B-1-a. In addition, by instructing or suggesting the winning of a specific bonus or the derivation of a specific performance display, attention to the derivation of the specific performance display is increased, and the specific performance display can be made even more exciting.

Means B-1-d. A control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the establishment of a specific condition;
A variable display means for starting a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information when the winning/losing lottery is held, and for stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the winning/losing lottery;
and a performance display means capable of deriving a performance display that is performed in association with the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means and that shows or suggests the result of the winning/losing lottery;
When a specific benefit is won based on the winning/losing lottery, a specific pattern can be derived in the variable display of the identification information,
When the specific benefit is awarded, the performance display means is configured to be capable of deriving a specific performance display that instructs or suggests the awarding of the specific benefit,
When a non-derivation condition for preventing the specific performance display from being derived is established during the period from the winning of the specific benefit to the derivation of the specific performance display, the performance display of the performance display means is changed;
A gaming machine comprising a means for instructing or suggesting the winning of the specific benefit or the derivation of the specific performance display.

Measure B-1-d basically achieves the same effect as measure B-1-b. In addition, by instructing or suggesting the winning of a specific bonus or the derivation of a specific performance display, attention to the derivation of the specific performance display is increased, and the specific performance display can be made even more exciting.

Means B-2. When the specific benefit is won, the specific benefit is awarded not only when the specific aspect is derived, but also when the specific aspect is not derived,
The gaming machine described in means B-1 is characterized in that an alternative performance display (which instructs or suggests the granting of the specific benefit) is provided in the performance display means in place of the specific performance display when it is confirmed that the non-derivation condition is met.

According to means B-2, when the non-derivation condition is met, the effect display when a specific benefit is awarded is not completely stopped, but an alternative effect display is displayed instead of the specific effect display. In other words, even if the specific mode is not derived (in the variable display of the identification information from which the specific mode can be derived), the specific benefit is awarded, so this fact can be clearly communicated and excitement can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the exciting part of the game cannot be generated because the specific mode is not derived, and the potential of the gaming machine cannot be fully utilized.

Means B-3. The specific performance display includes a display indicating that the specific mode has been derived and a display instructing or suggesting the granting of the specific benefit;
The gaming machine described in means B-2 is characterized in that the alternative performance display includes an alternative display showing a different appearance from the display indicating that the specific appearance has been derived, at the same position as the display indicating that the specific appearance has been derived, and a display instructing or suggesting the granting of the specific benefit.

According to Means B-3, even when an alternative display is derived, the player can still recognize that a specific benefit has been awarded, and the alternative display can be recognized as a display that has a beneficial meaning for the player, and an alternative display can be derived at a different time to instruct or suggest the occurrence of a beneficial state for the player.

Means B-4. When the specific performance display is derived, a pseudo game is performed in which the variable display means causes the identification information to behave differently from the variable display,
The specific performance display is configured to be derivable during the pseudo game,
A gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-3, characterized in that in the pseudo game, a state corresponding to the state in the variable display means at the time when the pseudo game is started is derived.

According to the means B-4, a pseudo game is played when a specific performance display is derived (a specific benefit is given), but in order to suppress the control load in the pseudo game, if it is avoided to make the pseudo game mode when a specific mode is not derived when the pseudo game starts indistinguishable from the pseudo game mode when a specific mode is derived, in the pseudo game, a mode corresponding to the mode of the variable display means at the start of the pseudo game is derived. In other words, for example, if a specific performance display is derived even though a specific mode is not derived, the specific performance display will not correspond to the pseudo game mode, and the sense of incongruity will be noticeable (if there is only a mismatch between the mode in the variable display of the identification information capable of deriving a specific mode and the specific performance display, it may be considered as a surprise performance, but this is not the case when it comes to the pseudo game). In this regard, by confirming the establishment of the non-derivation condition as in the above-mentioned means B-1, it is possible to avoid a contradiction between the pseudo game mode derived in the variable display means and the mode of the performance display of the performance display means. Therefore, the effect of the above-mentioned method B-1 is more pronounced.

It may also be stated that "in the pseudo game, the state of the variable display means is not determined when the pseudo game is started," or that "the state of the variable display means is confirmed when the pseudo game is started, but the pseudo game is configured such that "even if the specific state has not been derived when the pseudo game is started, the pseudo game does not execute drive control that makes the state of the pseudo game indistinguishable from the state when the specific state has been derived (corresponding to means B-4 described below, control is not executed to forcibly display the specific state in a pseudo stop state when the specific state has not been derived)."

Means B-5. In the pseudo game, a pseudo stop display (effect) that pseudo-stops the variable display of the identification information is configured to be derived,
The gaming machine described in means B-4 is characterized in that if the specific mode is derived in the variable display means when the pseudo game is started, the specific mode is displayed in a pseudo-stop state, and if a prescribed mode different from the specific mode is derived in the variable display means when the pseudo game is started, the prescribed mode is displayed in a pseudo-stop state.

According to means B-5, by pseudo-stopping a specific mode in a pseudo game, it is possible to make the situation more advantageous for the player easier to understand and more exciting. On the other hand, because the specific mode is pseudo-stopped, it is easier to distinguish and recognize it from a case where a specific mode different from the specific mode is pseudo-stopped. In this regard, as described above in means B-1 and B-2, by avoiding a mismatch between the mode in the pseudo game and the performance display of the performance display means, the occurrence of discomfort is avoided, and the effect of improving the performance is further achieved.

Means B-6. A gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-5, characterized in that it is checked whether information indicating that the power supply has been turned off is stored as the non-derivation condition.

According to the means B-6, if the power cutoff (power outage, etc.) information is stored when the specific benefit is given, the stop mode of the identification information of the variable display means may have changed while the power was cut off (which the gaming machine cannot grasp), and even if the stored information indicating the stop mode of the variable display is left when the specific benefit is given, it is not certain whether the stored information is correct. In this regard, when the specific benefit is given with the power outage information stored, the performance display means does not derive the specific performance display, but derives another mode (for example, the alternative performance display of the means B-2), thereby preventing a situation in which a specific performance display corresponding to a specific mode is derived even though the specific mode has not been derived. In addition, it is not necessary to set up a process to determine the stop mode of the identification information of the variable display means from scratch at the start of the specific performance display just for the case of a power outage, and this can prevent the process from becoming complicated.

Means B-7: Equipped with an opening and closing member that is unlocked by key operation,
A gaming machine described in any one of means B-1 to B-6, characterized in that it checks whether or not information that the opening and closing member is in an open state is stored as the non-derivation condition.

According to the means B-7, if the information that the opening and closing member was in the open state when the specific benefit was given is stored, the stop state of the identification information of the variable display means may have changed (which cannot be grasped by the gaming machine) while the opening and closing member was in the open state, and even if the stored information indicating the stop state of the variable display is left when the specific benefit was given, it is not certain whether the stored information is correct. In this regard, when the specific benefit is given with the opening information of the opening and closing member stored, the performance display means does not derive the specific performance display, but derives another state (for example, the alternative performance display of the means B-2), thereby preventing a situation in which a specific performance display corresponding to a specific mode is derived even though a specific mode has not been derived. In addition, it is not necessary to set up a process to determine the stop state of the identification information of the variable display means from scratch at the start of the specific performance display just for when the opening and closing member is in the open state, and this can prevent the process from becoming complicated.

Means B-8. A gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-7, characterized in that it is provided with a grasping means capable of grasping whether the specific mode is derived in the variable display means as the non-derivation condition.

According to means B-8, since it is possible to know whether a specific mode has been derived in the variable display means when a specific benefit is awarded, a suitable mode can be derived from the specific performance display or other performance displays depending on whether a specific mode has been derived. This makes it possible to derive consecutive performances that are related to each other with a timing in between when a specific mode can be derived in the variable display means, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which a performance display that makes it seem as if a specific mode has been derived is derived even though the specific mode has not been derived, giving the player a sense of incongruity. This makes it possible to improve the performance, etc.

Means B-9. A guidance means is provided that can derive a guidance game that informs the player that the specific identification information constituting the specific mode among the identification information may be displayed as a static display or a pseudo static display in the variable display of the identification information that can derive the specific mode,
A gaming machine described in any of means B-1 to B-8, characterized in that when the specific benefit is awarded, it is confirmed whether the non-derivation condition is met between the end of the guide game and the awarding of the specific benefit.

By means of means B-9, it becomes possible to reliably determine whether or not a specific aspect may not be derived when a specific benefit is granted.

Means B-10. The variable display means is
A reel body to which the plurality of types of identification information are attached;
A drive means for driving the revolving body is provided. The gripping means is
A determination means for determining whether or not the stopped display of the symbol is a specific symbol constituting the specific mode among the symbols when the stop display of the symbol is stopped in the guide game;
The gaming machine described in means B-9 is characterized in that it is equipped with a memory means capable of storing the determination result of the determination means as the next variable display of the identification information, up to the setting of a specific variable display which is the variable display of the identification information which is performed when the specific benefit is granted.

According to means B-10, in a configuration in which the result of the winning/losing lottery is instructed based on the stopping mode of the identification information, the stopping mode of the identification information is confirmed to confirm whether the variable display of the identification information has stopped normally. Here, by storing information on whether the identification information is a specific identification information confirmed by the stopping mode of the identification information in the storage means and retaining the memory until the next variable display is set, it is not necessary to newly check the phase of the reel body of the variable display means when setting the next variable display, and it is relatively easy to know (by simply checking the storage means) whether the variable display will start with the specific identification information stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when setting the variable display in which pseudo play is performed.

Means B-11. A start operation means operable by a player;
A start operation detection means for detecting an operation of the start operation means;
A stop operation means operable by a player;
a stop operation detection means for detecting an operation of the stop operation means,
Based on the detection of the start operation detection means as the specific condition, the winning/losing lottery is carried out and the variable display of the identification information is started.
The display of the variable display of the identification information is stopped based on the detection of the stop operation detection means,
In the guidance game, at least the specific identification information is configured to be displayed in a variable display of the identification information that can be displayed in a static manner, and the guidance is configured to aim at the specific identification information and display it in a static manner;
The gaming machine described in means B-10 is characterized in that, in the variable display of the identification information capable of stopping the display of the specific identification information, even if the stop operation means is operated based on guidance by the guidance means, the specific identification information may not be stopped and displayed depending on the identification information that was displayed when the stop operation means was operated.

Means B-11 allows the player to decide the timing for starting and stopping the variable display of the identification information. This allows the player to play the guide game at their own pace without rushing, and allows the player to start the specific variable display at their own pace (after calming down or preparing to take a photo with their mobile device).

In addition, whether or not the specific identification information is displayed in a stopped state when the specific variable display is started is based on the player's operation of the stop operation means. For this reason, cases where identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed in a stopped state when the specific variable display is started may well occur, and there are generally not just one pattern, but multiple patterns of identification information different from the specific identification information. Therefore, when the variable display of the identification information from which the guidance game is derived and the specific variable display derive mutually related effects, the effect of avoiding the same effect display as when the specific identification information is displayed in a stopped state in the specific variable display, even though the specific identification information is not displayed in the guidance game, is more prominent. In addition, even if the guidance game is derived and the stop operation means is operated, there are cases where the specific identification information is not displayed in a stopped state, and the original enjoyment of a gaming machine equipped with a stop operation means, such as the player aiming for the specific identification information and displaying it in a stopped state, can be maintained.

Means B-12. In the variable display capable of displaying the specific identification information in a static manner, the specific identification information and the auxiliary identification information can be displayed in a static manner, and when the specific identification information is not displayed in a static manner, the auxiliary identification information is displayed in a static manner;
The gaming machine described in means B-11 is characterized in that the specific benefit is awarded when the specific identification information and the auxiliary identification information are displayed in a stopped state.

According to the means B-12, it is possible to reliably differentiate the manner of the presentation display corresponding to both the specific variable displays in the case where the specific identification information is displayed in a stopped state (a prize is won) and the case where the auxiliary identification information is displayed in a stopped state (a prize is won), while granting a specific benefit in both cases. In other words, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a specific benefit is not granted when the specific identification information cannot be displayed in a stopped state due to a stop operation error in a variable display in which the specific identification information can be displayed in a stopped state, and to avoid a situation in which the balance of the arrangement of multiple identification information becomes poor when the arrangement of the specific identification information is increased so that the specific identification information is displayed in a stopped state regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop operation means, and to reliably distinguish and grasp whether the specific identification information is displayed in a stopped state. Note that the benefit granted based on the stopped display of the specific identification information and the auxiliary identification information may be the same (excluding the pseudo game presentation) in the case where the specific identification information is displayed in a stopped state and the case where the auxiliary identification information is displayed in a stopped state. In other words, in addition to the specific benefit, for example, the same number of game values may be granted based on the stopped display, or the variable display may be able to be executed again without betting additional game values.

Means B-13. The guide game is configured to be derived even if the specific benefit is not won,
When the specific benefit is won in the winning/losing lottery and the specific identification information is displayed as a static display in the guidance game, a performance is performed in the guidance game performance, which is a performance of the performance display corresponding to the guidance game, to inform the player that the specific identification information has been displayed as a static display;
The gaming machine described in means B-11 or B-12 is characterized in that if the specific bonus is won in the win/lose lottery and the identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed as a static display in the guidance game, and if the specific bonus is not won in the win/lose lottery and the identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed as a static display in the guidance game, no presentation is given in the guidance game presentation corresponding to the guidance game to inform the player that the specific identification information has been displayed as a static display.

By means of means B-13, a guide game may be derived even if a specific prize has not been won, which makes it possible to avoid a simple gameplay in which a specific prize has always been won when a guide game is derived, thereby improving the gameplay of the guide game, etc.

Furthermore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a sense of incongruity that would result from the introduction of a guide game presentation corresponding to the specific identification information being displayed in a frozen state even though the specific identification information is not displayed in a frozen state. Also, if a specific bonus has been won, even if the player is not informed of the fact that the specific bonus has been won during the guide game, the player can have the opportunity to be informed in the subsequent specific variable display, thereby avoiding a situation in which the opportunity to be informed of the fact that the specific bonus has been won is lost.

In addition, by configuring the stop mode (displayed identification information) of the guide game to be as similar as possible in the case where a specific bonus is won but an identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed in the guide game, and in the case where a specific bonus is not won in the win/lose lottery and an identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed in the guide game (so that players who do not care much about the stop mode can hardly tell the difference), even if the granting of a specific bonus cannot be confirmed in the variable display in which the guide game is performed, the player can maintain the expectation that the granting of a specific bonus will be shown in the next variable display, thereby improving gameplay, etc.

Means B-14: When the specific benefit is not won and the guide game is derived, in the variable display of the identification information, fake identification information among the identification information is displayed in a static manner;
The gaming machine described in means B-13 is characterized in that the bonus awarded when the fake identification information is displayed in a stopped state is the same as the bonus awarded when the specific identification information is displayed in a stopped state, other than the specific bonus.

According to means B-14, the appearance of the fake identification information and the specific identification information can be made as similar as possible, and the static display of the fake identification information can give the player the impression that he or she almost won. In addition, the operation for starting the variable display of the next identification information in the guide game can be synchronized, making the progress of the game relatively smooth. In addition, because the operation for starting the next game is synchronized between when a specific bonus is won but a specific pattern is not derived and when fake identification information is derived, it is difficult to distinguish whether the player has simply missed the button due to a mistake in pressing the button and has actually missed, and it is possible to more reliably create a situation in which the player places high hopes on the operation for starting the next game.

Means B-15: There are cases where the guide game is not derived even if the specific benefit is won,
A gaming machine described in any of means B-11 to B-14, characterized in that the appearance of the beginning part of the presentation display corresponding to the specific variable display after the guidance game is derived is configured to be different from the appearance of the beginning part of the presentation display corresponding to the specific variable display that is started without the guidance game being derived.

According to means B-15, if a guide game is played prior to the pseudo game, the guide game can inform the player whether or not a specific bonus has been won, whereas if the guide game is not played, the pseudo game starts suddenly and the player is not informed whether or not a specific bonus has been won. Thus, by setting the initial presentation of the pseudo game presentation depending on whether a guide game is being played and, in turn, whether or not there is a timing to inform the player that a specific bonus has been won, each can be derived appropriately and without any sense of incongruity. This can lead to improvements in presentation and gameplay.

Means B-16. The predetermined probability of winning in the winning/losing lottery can be set in multiple stages,
A gaming machine described in any of means B-11 to B-15, characterized in that the presentation display corresponding to the specific variable display started when the specific benefit is won in the win/lose lottery and the specific identification information is displayed in a frozen state is capable of deriving a display suggesting settings related to the win/lose lottery.

According to the method B-16, it is possible to derive a display that suggests a setting as another bonus when the specific identification information is displayed statically. Therefore, it is possible to arouse strong interest by displaying the specific identification information statically. Furthermore, it is possible to make the player make an effort to press the button to make the specific identification information statically displayed, and by being able to do so, the player can enjoy the game more interestingly.

Means B-17. A pseudo game is executed to make the identification information behave differently from the variable display during the period from when the trigger for starting the specific variable display occurs until the specific variable display is stopped and displayed, and the variable display of the identification information is started or resumed after the pseudo game.
A gaming machine described in any of means B-11 to B-16, characterized in that in the pseudo game, when the specific variable display is started, in either the case where the specific identification information is displayed as frozen and the case where the identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed as frozen and the like, after shifting the identification information, the identification information is displayed as frozen in the form of the identification information that was displayed as frozen before the shift.

By means of means B-17, the specific identification information can be used to attract attention through the simulated game, and the awarding of a specific benefit can be made more exciting. Furthermore, additional information regarding the specific benefit can be provided during the simulated game through special effects.

In addition, when the specific identification information is started, the control of the variable display means in the pseudo game can be the same regardless of whether the identification information different from the specific identification information or the specific identification information is displayed in a stopped state. For this reason, it is possible to simplify the control compared to a case where, for example, in a pseudo game corresponding to a specific variable display started from a state in which identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed in a stopped state, the pseudo game corresponding to a specific variable display started from a state in which the specific identification information is displayed in a stopped state is forcibly changed halfway through to the same mode as a pseudo game corresponding to a specific variable display started from a state in which the specific identification information is displayed in a stopped state.

Furthermore, when the specific identification information is started, the manner in the pseudo game will be different between when identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed frozen and when the specific identification information is displayed frozen (the manner will continue to be different because the start manner is different and the control of the variable display means thereafter is the same). In this regard, the presentation display corresponding to the specific variable display is different between when the specific identification information is displayed frozen and when identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed frozen. Therefore, even if the presentation display corresponding to the specific variable display and the pseudo game are executed in sync, the game can be progressed without any sense of incongruity. This can lead to improvements in presentation, etc.

The pseudo game may be "configured to be executable when at least the specific benefit is awarded and a trigger occurs to start the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means," or "when at least the specific benefit is awarded and a predetermined operation input is performed by the player after the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means has started." Furthermore, the "pseudo game" may be "a state in which the stop operation detection means does not stop the display of the identification information even if the stop operation detection means detects it during the period from when a trigger occurs to start the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means to when the variable display of the identification information is stopped." In addition, in order to hold a winning/losing lottery triggered by detection by the start operation detection means, it may be assumed that a state in which a specified number of game values have been bet, or a state equivalent to that state, is in place.

It may also be that "when the specific variable display is started, in both cases where the specific identification information is displayed as a stopped state and where an identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed as a stopped state, if the content of the specific benefit to be granted is the same, the control of the variable display means in the pseudo game is the same." In this case, whether the stopped state of the variable display means at the start of the specific variable display is the specific identification information or not, the control of the identification display means in the pseudo game is the same, and it is possible to simplify the control, etc.

Means B-18. The variable display means includes a plurality of reel bodies to which the plurality of types of identification information are attached, and a driving means for driving each of the reel bodies;
The gaming machine described in means B-17, characterized in that in the pseudo game, the operations of all of the reels are synchronized.

According to the method B-18, the operation of multiple reels in a simulated game is synchronized, simplifying the control. In particular, if a momentary power outage occurs in a simulated game, it is possible to almost completely eliminate the misalignment between the reels, and the reels can be restarted without taking the misalignment into account.

C. One type of gaming machine is a reel-type gaming machine, such as a slot machine. A slot machine has multiple reels with multiple symbols on them, and when a player inserts a medal and operates a start lever, each reel starts to spin. After each reel starts to spin, the reels stop sequentially when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed. In addition, a slot machine holds a lottery on the condition that a specified number of medals are inserted and the start lever is operated. If a predetermined benefit (a predetermined number of medals is awarded or a special game state advantageous to the player) is won based on the lottery, the predetermined benefit is awarded on the condition that the symbol associated with the predetermined benefit stops on a preset pay line (see, for example, JP 2003-126337 A).

In addition, there is always a demand for innovative presentation of gaming machines.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the presentation.

Means C-1-a. A control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the establishment of a specific condition;
A variable display means for starting a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information when the winning/losing lottery is held, and for stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the winning/losing lottery;
and a performance display means capable of deriving a performance display that is performed in association with the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means and that shows or suggests the result of the winning/losing lottery;
A configuration in which a derivable aspect in the variable display of the identification information is determined based on the winning/losing lottery, and when at least a specific aspect is derivable in the variable display of the identification information, the specific benefit is won or can be won, and when the specific aspect is derivable and the specific benefit is won, the specific benefit is granted not only when the specific aspect is derived, but also when the specific aspect is not derived,
A pseudo game is executed in which the indicator behaves differently from the variable display during the period from when a trigger occurs to start the variable display of the indicator performed by the variable display means until the variable display is stopped and displayed, and the variable display of the indicator is started or resumed after the pseudo game,
A gaming machine characterized in that the state of the variable display means when the pseudo game is started is configured to be able to differ in the state of the pseudo game between when it is the specific state and when it is a state different from the specific state.

According to means C-1-a, when a specific benefit is won, a specific mode of the variable display means corresponding to the specific benefit can be derived, and the specific benefit is awarded whether or not the specific mode is derived. However, it is considered that the impression of the player is different when the specific mode corresponding to the specific benefit is derived and when the specific mode is not derived. In other words, it is considered that the state of mind of the player is greatly different, even just in terms of whether or not the player is excited with confidence that the specific benefit will be awarded, between the case where a specific mode that is relatively beautiful in appearance is derived and it is easy to grasp (infer) at a glance that a specific benefit (for a player playing the gaming machine for the first time, this is some kind of benefit) will be awarded, and the case where a mode that is not beautiful in appearance is derived and it is not possible to grasp that a specific benefit will be awarded.

In this regard, according to the present means C-1, it is possible to make the pseudo game mode different when a specific mode has been derived from when a specific mode has not been derived. Therefore, when a specific benefit is won and the specific benefit is awarded, if a specific mode has been derived in the variable display means, a large-scale presentation of the pseudo game is performed, whereas if a specific mode has not been derived in the variable display means, the pseudo game is performed in a more subdued manner, or the pseudo game is performed as a reversal (revival) presentation, making it possible to derive a presentation that is in line with the player's state of mind, and to avoid weakening the association between the specific mode and the specific benefit. As a result, it is possible to improve the presentation and gameplay.

Means C-1-b. A control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the establishment of a specific condition;
A variable display means for starting a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information when the winning/losing lottery is held, and for stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the winning/losing lottery;
and a performance display means capable of deriving a performance display that is performed in association with the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means and that shows or suggests the result of the winning/losing lottery;
When a specific benefit is won based on the winning/losing lottery, a specific mode can be derived in the variable display of the identification information, and the specific benefit is granted not only when the specific mode is derived but also when the specific mode is not derived,
A pseudo game is executed in which the indicator behaves differently from the variable display during the period from when a trigger occurs to start the variable display of the indicator performed by the variable display means until the variable display is stopped and displayed, and the variable display of the indicator is started or resumed after the pseudo game,
A gaming machine characterized in that the state of the variable display means when the pseudo game is started is configured to be able to differ in the state of the pseudo game between when it is the specific state and when it is a state different from the specific state.

Measure C-1-b basically achieves the same effects as measure C-1-a above.

Means C-1-c. A control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the establishment of a specific condition;
A variable display means for starting a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information when the winning/losing lottery is held, and for stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the winning/losing lottery;
and a performance display means capable of deriving a performance display that is performed in association with the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means and that shows or suggests the result of the winning/losing lottery;
A configuration in which a derivable aspect in the variable display of the identification information is determined based on the winning/losing lottery, and when at least a specific aspect is derivable in the variable display of the identification information, the specific benefit is won or can be won, and when the specific aspect is derivable and the specific benefit is won, the specific benefit is granted not only when the specific aspect is derived, but also when the specific aspect is not derived,
A pseudo game is executed in which the indicator behaves differently from the variable display during the period from when a trigger occurs to start the variable display of the indicator performed by the variable display means until the variable display is stopped and displayed, and the variable display of the indicator is started or resumed after the pseudo game,
The state of the variable display means when the pseudo game is started is configured to be able to differ in state of the pseudo game between the specific state and a state different from the specific state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the effect display means is configured to be able to derive an effect display associated with the pseudo game.

Means C-1-c basically achieves the same effect as means C-1-a. In addition, by displaying effects on the effect display means in conjunction with the pseudo game, the effect period including the pseudo game can be made even more exciting, and it is also possible to provide game support by deriving displays, etc., on the effect display means that help the player understand the content of the pseudo game.

Means C-1-d. A control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the establishment of a specific condition;
A variable display means for starting a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information when the winning/losing lottery is held, and for stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the winning/losing lottery;
and a performance display means capable of deriving a performance display that is performed in association with the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means and that shows or suggests the result of the winning/losing lottery;
When a specific benefit is won based on the winning/losing lottery, a specific mode can be derived in the variable display of the identification information, and the specific benefit is granted not only when the specific mode is derived but also when the specific mode is not derived,
A pseudo game is executed in which the indicator behaves differently from the variable display during the period from when a trigger occurs to start the variable display of the indicator performed by the variable display means until the variable display is stopped and displayed, and the variable display of the indicator is started or resumed after the pseudo game,
The state of the variable display means when the pseudo game is started is configured to be able to differ in state of the pseudo game between the specific state and a state different from the specific state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the effect display means is configured to be able to derive an effect display associated with the pseudo game.

Measure C-1-d basically achieves the same effect as measure C-1-b. In addition, by displaying effects on the effect display means in conjunction with the pseudo game, the effect period including the pseudo game can be made even more exciting, and it is also possible to provide game support by deriving displays, etc., on the effect display means that help the player understand the content of the pseudo game.

Means C-2. In the pseudo game, the identification information is displayed in a pseudo-variable manner, and a pseudo stop game is executed in which the variable display of the identification information is displayed in a pseudo-stop manner;
When the specific bonus is won in the winning/losing lottery and the specific identification information constituting the specific mode among the identification information is displayed as a stopped display or a pseudo-stop display, the specific identification information is displayed as a pseudo-stop display in the pseudo-stop game.
The gaming machine described in means C-1 is characterized in that when the specific bonus is won in the win/lose lottery and a specified identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed as a stopped or pseudo-stopped display when the pseudo-stop game is executed, the specified identification information is displayed as a pseudo-stopped display in the pseudo-stop game.

According to Measure C-2, although it is possible to make the pseudo game mode different depending on whether the mode of the variable display means when a specific benefit is awarded is a specific mode or a mode different from the specific mode, it is premised on control such that the stop display or the identification information that is pseudo-stopped when the pseudo stop game is executed is pseudo-stopped (pseudo stop display) even in the pseudo stop mode. For this reason, it is possible to simplify the control of the variable display means in the pseudo game, compared to a case where, for example, control is performed such that the specific identification information is pseudo-stopped in a pseudo stop game that is started in a state in which identification information different from the specific identification information is stopped.

In addition, if the specific identification information associated with a specific benefit is displayed as a stopped or pseudo-stopped display when the pseudo-stop game is executed, the specific identification information is also displayed as a pseudo-stopped display during the pseudo-stop game, giving the impression that the specific identification information has been superimposed, i.e., that the specific benefit is transitioning (stepping up, one setup) to content that is more favorable to the player. This makes it possible to provide a performance that leaves a stronger impression on the player.

Furthermore, if identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed as a stopped or pseudo-stop display when the pseudo-stop game is executed, the content of the pseudo-game can be changed, for example, by simplifying the pseudo-stop game (reducing the number of times, etc.) or omitting it, thereby alleviating or avoiding the awkward situation.

Means C-3. The gaming machine described in means C-2, characterized in that the variable display means is configured to be capable of deriving related identification information that can be pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-stop game executed in a state in which the specific identification information is stopped or pseudo-stopped.

According to the means C-3, in the pseudo-stop game, not only the specific identification information is pseudo-stopped, but also the related identification information is pseudo-stopped, and two pieces of information with different contents can be taught by the pseudo-stop game. That is, for example, in the pseudo-stop game, when the specific identification information is pseudo-stopped, it can indicate that the content of the specific benefit has been improved, and when the related identification information is pseudo-stopped, it can indicate that the content of the specific benefit has been improved significantly. Therefore, it can be utilized for various presentations, such as a state in which a different aspect from the normal one may be derived in the pseudo-stop display, or a state that should be derived is not derived, and it can improve the entertainment value of the pseudo-stop game. It may also be stated that "the related identification information may be pseudo-stopped even in the pseudo-stop game executed in a state in which the related identification information is pseudo-stopped."

Means C-4. The gaming machine described in means C-2 or C-3 is configured such that when the pseudo stop game is executed, the aspect of the pseudo game presentation, which is the presentation of the presentation display corresponding to the pseudo stop game, is different between when the specific identification information is displayed as stopped or pseudo-displayed as stopped and when the identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed as stopped or pseudo-displayed as stopped.

If the form (content) of the pseudo game presentation when the specific identification information is never displayed as a stopped or pseudo-stopped display from the time a specific bonus is won until the end of the pseudo game is the same as the form (content) of the pseudo game presentation when the specific identification information is displayed as a stopped or pseudo-stopped display, the correspondence between the specific identification information and the specific bonus will be lost, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In this regard, according to means C-4, when the specific identification information is not displayed as a stopped or pseudo-stop when the pseudo-stop game is executed, the aspect of the pseudo-game presentation corresponding to the pseudo-stop game is made different from the aspect of the pseudo-game presentation when the specific identification information is displayed as a stopped or pseudo-stop when the pseudo-stop game is executed. This maintains the correspondence between the specific identification information and the specific benefit, and even if the specific identification information is not displayed as a stopped or pseudo-stop after the specific benefit is won, it is possible to instruct the player in the pseudo-game presentation that the specific benefit (the content of the specific benefit) will be granted (to make up for the parts that are difficult to convey in the pseudo game). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of discomfort in the pseudo-game presentation, and to carry out presentations in the pseudo-game presentation that will help the player understand, and to ensure a relatively smooth game progress.

Means C-5. The specific benefit is provided in a plurality of types,
In the pseudo-game presentation, the content of the specific benefit is instructed or suggested,
In the pseudo game, the pseudo stop game may be performed multiple times.
The gaming machine described in means C-4 is characterized in that in the pseudo game presentation, the content of the specific bonus can be divided into multiple parts and instructed or suggested in accordance with multiple pseudo stop displays of the pseudo stop game.

According to means C-5, by displaying specific identification information (related identification information) in a pseudo-stop state multiple times, it is possible to derive an uplifting effect in which the content of the specific benefit stepping up to become more advantageous for the player in multiple stages. Note that in the pseudo-stop game, a cumulative display means may be provided that accumulates and displays the content of the specific benefit that is accumulated by displaying specific identification information (related identification information) in a pseudo-stop state multiple times. In this case, it is possible to grasp the current state of the pseudo-stop game and to reliably grasp the content of the specific benefit within the instructed range.

Means C-6. The gaming machine described in means C-5, characterized in that if the specific identification information (and the related identification information) is not displayed as stopped or pseudo-stopped at the start of the pseudo game, the pseudo stop game in the pseudo game is set to occur at most once.

Measure C-6 can prevent a situation in which identification information (meaningless identification information) different from specific identification information (related identification information) is repeatedly displayed in a pseudo-stop state and highlighted in a pseudo-stop state during a pseudo-stop game. In particular, when identification information different from specific identification information (related identification information) is displayed in a stopped state or pseudo-stop state against the player's will (for example, due to an operational error by the player), it is possible to avoid a situation in which interest is reduced by the multiple pseudo-stop displays of such identification information during a pseudo-stop game.

When identification information different from the specific identification information (related identification information) is pseudo-stopped in a pseudo-stop game, the brightness of the variable display means (identification information) may be darkened, or a display that reduces the visibility of the identification information may be derived from a transparent sub-display means provided in front of the variable display means. In this case, it is possible to make the identification information of the variable display means from which identification information that does not correspond to a specific bonus has been derived less noticeable. Furthermore, when identification information different from the specific identification information (related identification information) is pseudo-stopped in a pseudo-stop game, a movable role installed in a position visible to the player may be displaced. In this case, it is possible to draw attention to the movable role and to take the player's gaze away from the variable display means. In addition, the sub-display means may be configured to derive a display that imitates the specific identification information.

Means C-7. The gaming machine described in means C-6, characterized in that, if the specific identification information (and the related identification information) is not displayed as stopped or pseudo-stopped at the start of the pseudo game, the content of the specific bonus is instructed or suggested all at once in the pseudo game presentation, or at least a part of the content of the specific bonus is not instructed or suggested, and the remaining content of the specific bonus that has not been instructed or suggested is instructed or suggested at a timing after the variable display of the identification information where the pseudo stop game is performed (and before the bonus state in which the specific bonus is granted ends).

According to means C-7, when the specific identification information (related identification information) is not displayed as a stopped or pseudo-stop, the pseudo-stop game will occur at most once, and therefore the pseudo-game presentation will correspond to this by instructing or suggesting the contents of the bonus all at once, or by postponing the instructing or suggesting at least a part of the contents of the bonus. This makes it possible to make the correspondence between the pseudo-game mode and the pseudo-game presentation natural, and also improves the presentation and playability.

Means C-8. A start operation means operable by a player;
A start operation detection means for detecting an operation of the start operation means;
A stop operation means operable by a player;
a stop operation detection means for detecting an operation of the stop operation means,
Based on the detection of the start operation detection means as the specific condition, the winning/losing lottery is carried out and the variable display of the identification information is started.
The display of the variable display of the identification information is stopped based on the detection of the stop operation detection means,
A guidance means is provided that can derive a guidance game that guides a player to aim at the specific identification information and display it in a static manner in the variable display of the identification information that can display at least the specific identification information in a static manner;
A gaming machine described in any of means C-2 to C-7, characterized in that even if the stop operation means is operated based on guidance by the guidance means when the specific identification information can be derived, the specific identification information may not be displayed in a stopped state depending on the identification information that was displayed when the stop operation means was operated.

According to the means C-8, whether or not the specific identification information is displayed as a stopped display when the pseudo stop display is started is based on the player's operation on the stop operation means. Therefore, when the pseudo game is started, there may well be a case where an identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed as a stopped display, and there is generally not one pattern but multiple patterns of identification information different from the specific identification information. Therefore, in this configuration, for example, it is not necessary to control the behavior of the identification information of the pseudo game that is started from a state in which an identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed as a stopped display after winning a specific bonus to completely match the behavior of the identification information of the pseudo game that is started from a state in which the specific identification information is displayed as a stopped display, and the effect of suppressing the complexity of the control is further achieved. In addition, even if a guide game is derived and the stop operation means is operated, there are cases where the specific identification information is not displayed as a stopped display, and the original enjoyment of a gaming machine equipped with a stop operation means, such as the player aiming for the specific identification information and displaying it as a stopped display, can be maintained.

Means C-9. The gaming machine described in means C-8, characterized in that the guidance game that is performed when the specific bonus is won (when the pseudo game is performed) is performed as part of the pseudo game before the pseudo stop game in a specific variable display that is a variable display of the identification information performed by the variable display means, and the stop mode of the identification information in the guidance game is a pseudo stop display of the identification information, similar to the pseudo stop game.

By means of means C-9, it is possible to complete the process from the guide game to the end of the pseudo game. For example, in a configuration in which a guide game is executed in the game and a pseudo stop game is executed in the next game following the guide game, it is possible to avoid a situation in which, in the lottery for the next game, a role (for example, a bonus role) that has priority over the pseudo stop game is won, and even though specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the guide game, the pseudo stop game is not executed, or the instruction of the state transition corresponding to the winning of the role that has priority over the pseudo stop game is delayed.

Means C-10. The gaming machine described in means C-9, characterized in that the guide game is played even if the specific bonus is not won (if the pseudo game is not played).

Means C-10 allows guided play to be carried out smoothly and with a wide range of variations.

Means C-11. The gaming machine described in means C-10, characterized in that the behavior of the start of the variable display of the identification information in which the guide play is performed when the specific benefit is won is the same or nearly the same as the behavior of the start of the variable display of the identification information in which the guide play is performed when the specific benefit is won.

In a configuration in which the start of the next identification information change is put on hold until a specified time has elapsed since the start of the previous identification information change, if a pseudo-stop game (a guide game, which is part of the pseudo-stop game) is played at the beginning of the next identification information change display, the display is different from the actual display of the identification information, so even if the specified time has not elapsed since the previous identification information change start, in a configuration in which a pseudo-stop game is started, whether or not the start of the change is put on hold determines whether or not a specific identification information is pseudo-stopped in the guide game. In this regard, according to means C-11, by aligning the behavior of the start of the display of the identification information change when a guide game is played, that is, for example, by interposing a pseudo game similar to the behavior of the start of the display of the identification information change when a guide game and a pseudo-stop game are played at the beginning of the display of the identification information change when a guide game is played and a pseudo-stop game is not played, it is possible to eliminate the difference in the behavior of the start of the display of the identification information change and to avoid a situation in which it is determined whether or not a specific identification information is pseudo-stopped immediately after the start of the display of the identification information change.

In addition, in a configuration in which the variable display of the identification information is not performed at intervals of at least a specified time, and the pseudo game is not included in the variable display of the identification information, the following configuration may be used. For example, when the guidance game is performed and the variable display of the identification information in which the pseudo stop game is not performed starts, the pseudo game in which the guidance game in which the specific identification information cannot be pseudo-stopped is performed is performed may be executed. Also, for example, when the variable display of the identification information in which the guidance game and the pseudo stop game are performed starts, the pseudo game may start after the variable display of the identification information starts.

Means C-12. A gaming machine according to any one of means C-8 to C-11, characterized in that the pseudo stop game performed following the guidance game in a specific variable display, which is a variable display of the identification information performed by the variable display means, is started by a pseudo start operation input by the player corresponding to the start of the pseudo stop game in a state in which the identification information is pseudo-displayed in a stopped state in the guidance game.

According to means C-12, when the guidance game is performed with the same variable display as the pseudo-stop game (when the stopping action of the identification information based on the operation of stopping the identification information in the guidance game is pseudo), it is possible to configure the game to proceed from the start of the guidance game to the end of the pseudo-stop game without any relation to the player's operation input, but by configuring it so that the player's participation in the operation input is required, the player can enjoy the series of performances more. Note that the pseudo-stop display of the identification information in the pseudo-stop game is displayed pseudo-stop for a predetermined specified time regardless of the player's operation.

Means C-13. The gaming machine described in means C-12, characterized in that it is configured to be able to derive a pre-behavior based on the identification information that provides a predetermined instruction or suggestion regarding the specific benefit during the period between the end of the guide game and the start of the pseudo-stop game.

According to the means C-13, by requiring an operation input at the end of the guide play and the start of the pseudo stop play, respectively, it is possible to give the impression that the variable display is separated once at that timing, but the period after the guide play and before the pseudo stop play is also during the pseudo play, and it is also possible to make the identification information behave in a predetermined manner after the end of the guide play and before the start of the pseudo stop play, and to give a predetermined suggestion or instruction. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel performance to a player who sees such behavior. In addition, for example, among the three reels arranged side by side on the left and right of the variable display means, the right reel may behave in a manner that differs from the other reels, and in that case, a certain pattern or more of a specific bonus may be determined. In addition, if a pseudo stop play is not performed, a configuration may be made in which no pre-behavior occurs, or a pre-behavior with a high possibility of a pseudo stop play being performed, or a pre-behavior with a low possibility of a pseudo stop play being performed, may be set.

Means C-14. The gaming machine described in means C-13 is configured to be able to derive the pre-behavior before the pseudo-stop game starts by inputting a hidden operation different from the pseudo-start operation input by the player during the period between the end of the guide game and the start of the pseudo-stop game.

According to means C-14, the player can decide whether or not to view the preliminary behavior at his/her own will. In addition, by recognizing the hidden element, it is possible to expect effects such as increasing the attachment to the gaming machine. For example, the hidden operation input may be obtained by stopping the stop operation means corresponding to the reel that is displayed last in the guide game among the three reels arranged side by side on the left and right of the variable display means, and maintaining the operated state for a specified time or more. Furthermore, for example, the operation of the performance operation means used in the performance may be the hidden operation input, or the operation of the performance operation means a specified number of times or more may be the hidden operation input.

Means C-15. The variable display means includes a reel body to which the plurality of types of identification information are attached, and a drive means for driving the reel body;
A gaming machine described in any of means C-1 to C-14, characterized in that when the pseudo-stop game is executed, the rotating body operates in the same manner (the same amount of displacement) from the start of the pseudo-stop game to the end of the pseudo-stop game when the specific identification information is displayed stopped or pseudo-displayed stopped and when the identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed stopped or pseudo-displayed stopped.

According to the means C-15, since the multiple types of identification information of the variable display means are mechanically displayed in a variable manner, when the pseudo-stop game is started in a state where identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed in a stopped state (pseudo-stop display), it becomes more difficult to control the pseudo-stop mode of the pseudo-stop game to be the specific identification information (or related identification information) (while coordinating with the pseudo-game presentation). Therefore, even if a specific bonus has been won, if the specific identification information is not displayed in a stopped state (pseudo-stop display) at the start of the pseudo-stop game, the specific identification information (or related identification information) will not be displayed in a pseudo-stop game. However, by making the behavior of the identification information in the pseudo-stop game uniform, the effect of simplifying the control of the variable display means is more pronounced. In particular, when multiple reels are provided and the specific identification information is formed by combining the identification information of the multiple reels, the above effect is more pronounced.

When a specific identification is pseudo-stopped in a pseudo-stop game that is started from a state in which a specific identification is stopped or pseudo-stopped, the reel body is rotated and then the pseudo-stopped display is made in the same phase as before the rotation (the stop display is made exactly n rotations). When a related identification is pseudo-stopped in a pseudo-stop game that is started from a state in which a specific identification is stopped or pseudo-stopped, the reel body is rotated and then the pseudo-stopped display is made in a phase that is displaced a specified amount corresponding to the phase difference between the specific identification and the related identification from before the rotation (for example, if the specific identification and the related identification are shifted by half a rotation, the stop display is made exactly n and a half rotations). Also, for example, the reel body may be configured so that the pseudo stop display of the pseudo stop game continues by shifting the reel body a specified number of frames, such that the first related identification information is obtained by shifting the reel body one frame in the first direction from the specific identification information, the second related identification information is obtained by shifting the reel body one frame in the first direction from the first related identification information, and the third related identification information is obtained by shifting the reel body one frame in the first direction from the second related identification information. (The more the reel body continues, the more the content of the specific bonus may step up to be more advantageous for the player.)

D. One type of gaming machine is a reel-type gaming machine, such as a slot machine. A slot machine has multiple reels with multiple symbols on them, and when a player inserts a medal and operates a start lever, each reel starts to spin. After each reel starts to spin, the reels stop sequentially when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed. In addition, a slot machine holds a lottery on the condition that a specified number of medals are inserted and the start lever is operated. If a predetermined benefit (a predetermined number of medals is awarded or a special game state advantageous to the player) is won based on the lottery, the predetermined benefit is awarded on the condition that the symbol associated with the predetermined benefit stops on a preset pay line (see, for example, JP 2003-126337 A).

In addition, there is always a demand for innovative presentation of gaming machines.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the presentation.

Means D-1-a. A control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the establishment of a specific condition;
A variable display means for starting a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information when the winning/losing lottery is held, and for stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the winning/losing lottery;
and a performance display means capable of deriving a performance display that is performed in association with the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means and that shows or suggests the result of the winning/losing lottery;
A configuration in which a derivable mode in the variable display of the identification information is determined based on the winning/losing lottery, and when at least a specific mode can be derived in the variable display of the identification information, the specific benefit is won or can be won;
In a privileged state in which the specific privilege is granted, a game accompanied by a variable display of the identification information can be advantageously progressed for the player,
In the bonus state, a bonus game progress value is set, the remaining amount of which changes as the game progresses,
When the bonus game progress value is awarded and when the bonus game progress value is held, at least one of the cases is configured to be able to execute a pseudo game in which the identification information behaves differently from the variable display,
The gaming machine is characterized in that an uninstructed amount of the bonus game progress value that has not been taught to be held is divided into a plurality of parts and can be taught or suggested by the pseudo game.

According to means D-1-a, by dividing the granted bonus game progress value into multiple parts and making it possible to instruct or suggest, it is possible to increase the variety of the instructions or suggestions, and to derive a relatively long and dramatic presentation that informs the player of already determined content. In particular, by providing a pseudo game, it is possible to reliably execute instructions or suggestions regarding specific bonuses in the pseudo game, separate from the variable display of the identification information that follows the pseudo game (main game). As a result, it is possible to improve the presentation, and ultimately to increase interest, etc.

The pseudo game is not limited to a configuration in which the untaught amount of the specific game progress value is definitively taught (for example, when the specific game progress value is the number of plays, a specific action of the identification information in the pseudo game is associated with an increase in the number of plays of 50), but may be configured to roughly teach (with a certain degree of range) the untaught amount of the specific game progress value (for example, when the specific game progress value is the number of plays, a first specific action of the identification information in the pseudo game is associated with an increase in the number of plays of any number between 50 and 100). Also, it may be configured to "include a taught amount display means for displaying the taught amount of the special game progress value that is taught or suggested to be held." In this case, the player does not need to memorize the taught amount of the special game progress value, which improves convenience, etc.

The meaning of "advantageous to the player" is not limited to the advantage or disadvantage of whether or not it is easy to win a specific combination, but also includes the advantage or disadvantage of whether or not the combination is navigated (navigating the formation of a combination that may not be able to win depending on the player's operation, or navigating the operation method). In addition, examples of "bonus game progress value" include the number of plays (games), the number of game values awarded, and the number of sets that make up a specific number of plays.

Means D-1-b. A control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the establishment of a specific condition;
A variable display means for starting a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information when the winning/losing lottery is held, and for stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the winning/losing lottery;
and a performance display means capable of deriving a performance display that is performed in association with the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means and that shows or suggests the result of the winning/losing lottery;
When a specific benefit is won based on the winning/losing lottery, a specific pattern can be derived in the variable display of the identification information,
In a privileged state in which the specific privilege is granted, a game accompanied by a variable display of the identification information can be advantageously progressed for the player,
In the bonus state, a bonus game progress value is set, the remaining amount of which changes as the game progresses,
When the bonus game progress value is awarded and when the bonus game progress value is held, at least one of the cases is configured to be able to execute a pseudo game in which the identification information behaves differently from the variable display,
The gaming machine is characterized in that an uninstructed amount of the bonus game progress value that has not been taught to be held is divided into a plurality of parts and can be taught or suggested by the pseudo game.

Measure D-1-b basically achieves the same effects as measure D-1-a above.

Means D-1-c. A control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the establishment of a specific condition;
A variable display means for starting a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information when the winning/losing lottery is held, and for stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the winning/losing lottery;
and a performance display means capable of deriving a performance display that is performed in association with the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means and that shows or suggests the result of the winning/losing lottery;
A configuration in which a derivable mode in the variable display of the identification information is determined based on the winning/losing lottery, and when at least a specific mode can be derived in the variable display of the identification information, the specific benefit is won or can be won;
In a privileged state in which the specific privilege is granted, a game accompanied by a variable display of the identification information can be advantageously progressed for the player,
In the bonus state, a bonus game progress value is set, the remaining amount of which changes as the game progresses,
When the bonus game progress value is awarded and when the bonus game progress value is held, at least one of the cases is configured to be able to execute a pseudo game in which the identification information behaves differently from the variable display,
The amount of the bonus game progress value that has not been taught to be held is divided into a plurality of parts, and the amount is taught or suggested by the pseudo game.
A gaming machine characterized in that the effect display means is configured to be able to derive an effect display associated with the pseudo game.

According to the means D-1-c, basically the same effect as the above-mentioned means D-1-a is achieved. In addition, by displaying effects by the effect display means in conjunction with the pseudo game, the effect period including the pseudo game can be further livened up, and it is also possible to provide game support by deriving displays, etc., in the effect display means that help understand the contents of the pseudo game.

Means D-1-d. A control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the establishment of a specific condition;
A variable display means for starting a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information when the winning/losing lottery is held, and for stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the winning/losing lottery;
and a performance display means capable of deriving a performance display that is performed in association with the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means and that shows or suggests the result of the winning/losing lottery;
When a specific benefit is won based on the winning/losing lottery, a specific pattern can be derived in the variable display of the identification information,
In a privileged state in which the specific privilege is granted, a game accompanied by a variable display of the identification information can be advantageously progressed for the player,
In the bonus state, a bonus game progress value is set, the remaining amount of which changes as the game progresses,
When the bonus game progress value is awarded and when the bonus game progress value is held, at least one of the cases is configured to be able to execute a pseudo game in which the identification information behaves differently from the variable display,
The amount of the bonus game progress value that has not been taught to be held is divided into a plurality of parts, and the amount is taught or suggested by the pseudo game.
A gaming machine characterized in that the effect display means is configured to be able to derive an effect display associated with the pseudo game.

According to the means D-1-d, the same effect as the above-mentioned means D-1-b is basically achieved. In addition, by displaying effects by the effect display means in conjunction with the pseudo game, the effect period including the pseudo game can be further livened up, and it is also possible to provide game support by deriving displays, etc., in the effect display means that help understand the contents of the pseudo game.

Means D-2. In the pseudo game, the identification information is displayed in a pseudo variable manner, and a pseudo stop game is performed in which the variable display of the identification information is displayed in a pseudo stop manner;
The effect display means derives a pseudo game effect, which is an effect of the effect display corresponding to the pseudo game;
The gaming machine described in means D-1 is characterized in that, in the pseudo-stop game, the manner of the pseudo-game presentation is configured to be different when a specific identification information constituting the specific aspect among the identification information is pseudo-stopped and when an identification information other than the specific identification information is pseudo-stopped.

Although it does not actually affect the increase or decrease of the bonus game progress value, the player will recognize that the bonus game progress value has been increased if the bonus game progress value that was not previously taught is newly taught. Furthermore, if the specific identification information is displayed as a pseudo stop, the player will recognize that something has been gained, and if the specific identification information is not displayed as a pseudo stop, the player will recognize that nothing has been gained. Here, for example, if a similar instruction or suggestion is given regardless of the content of a pseudo game just because a pseudo game has occurred, there is a concern that the player will feel uncomfortable and will not be able to concentrate on the game.

In this regard, according to means D-2, the manner of the pseudo game presentation is different when specific identification information is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game and when identification information other than the specific identification information is pseudo-stopped. For example, when specific identification information is pseudo-stopped, the player is instructed to add to the bonus game progress value, and when identification information other than the specific identification information is pseudo-stopped, the player is not instructed to add to the bonus game progress value, allowing the player to play smoothly.

In addition, it may be said that "the device is provided with a stop operation means that is operable by the player and that can stop the variable display of the identification information on the variable display means based on the player's operation, and in the pseudo stop game, the specific identification information can be pseudo-stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means."

Means D-3. In the pseudo stop game, the identification information that was displayed as a stop or pseudo-displayed as a stop when the pseudo stop game is started is displayed as a pseudo-stop after the pseudo-variable display of the identification information,
The gaming machine described in means D-2 is characterized in that the manner of the pseudo game presentation performed in response to the pseudo stop game differs depending on whether the form of the identification information at the time the pseudo game is started is the specific identification information or an identification information different from the specific identification information.

According to the means D-3, it is possible to simplify the control of the pseudo-stop game, compared to the case where the pseudo-stop game is controlled so that it is pseudo-stopped with the specific identification information during the variable display of the pseudo-stop game that was started in a state where identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed as stopped or pseudo-stopped. In addition, whether or not the specific identification information is displayed as stopped in the pseudo-stop game can be understood from the stop mode or pseudo-stop mode of the identification information at the start of the pseudo-stop game, and it is possible to suppress the complication of the control of the pseudo-game presentation.

Means D-4. (Remaining amount storage means for storing the remaining amount (including the taught amount and the untaught amount) of the bonus game progress value;)
The present invention provides a method for controlling a game progress value of a special game, comprising:
The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-3, characterized in that in the pseudo game, a part of the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value may not be taught.

Means D-4 allows for more leeway (improving the degree of freedom) in setting the pseudo game and the bonus game progress value, making it possible to provide more diverse gameplay and preventing the control from becoming complicated. In addition, the untaught amount storage means allows for relatively easy management of the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value, and also makes it relatively easy to set the effects that teach the untaught amount.

In response to the means D-3, it may be that "in the pseudo-stop game, the probability of not teaching a part of the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value is different between a case where the specific identification information constituting the specific aspect among the identification information is pseudo-stopped and a case where identification information other than the specific identification information is pseudo-stopped (for example, the untaught amount is more likely to remain untaught when identification information other than the specific identification information is pseudo-stopped)." In this case, it is possible to increase the opportunities to properly teach the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value in a state where the specific identification information is pseudo-stopped, and it is possible to make it easier for players who find that the pseudo game aspect and the addition are in sync to enjoy a pleasant presentation.

Means D-5. A gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-4, characterized in that the specific benefit is awarded not only when the specific feature is derived (in the variable display of the identification information from which the specific feature can be derived), but also when the specific feature is not derived.

By using the method D-5, it is possible to create a performance that aims to increase the player's interest by suddenly starting a pseudo game without the player realizing that the transition to the special state has occurred.

Means D-6. A gaming machine described in any one of means D-1 to D-5, characterized in that it is configured to be capable of executing a teaching amount lottery that determines how much of the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value will be taught in each of the pseudo games.

According to means D-6, the amount of the specific game progress value that is not yet taught in the pseudo game is not constant, and even after confirming the occurrence of the pseudo game, the player can be interested in the amount of the special game progress value that will be taught. This makes it possible to increase the variety of the pseudo game, and improve the presentation, etc.

In response to the measure D-3, "in the pseudo-stop game, the teaching amount determined by the teaching amount lottery may be different between the case where the specific identification information constituting the specific aspect among the identification information is pseudo-stopped and the case where identification information other than the specific identification information is pseudo-stopped (for example, the teaching amount is more likely to be smaller when identification information other than the specific identification information is pseudo-stopped)." In this case, it is possible to increase the opportunities to properly teach the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value in a state where the specific identification information is pseudo-stopped, and it is possible to make it easier for players who find that the pseudo game aspect and the addition are in sync to enjoy a pleasant presentation.

Means D-7. The gaming machine described in means D-6, characterized in that if the teaching amount of the bonus game progress value determined in the teaching amount lottery exceeds the unteached amount of the bonus game progress value held, the pseudo game corresponding to the teaching amount lottery is not executed.

According to means D-7, although the upper limit (within the number held) of the bonus game value that can be taught by the pseudo game is fixed (the teaching of the untaught amount of bonus game progress value by the pseudo game is performed within a range that does not exceed the untaught amount of bonus game progress value), the amount of pseudo game to be played and the amount of the untaught amount of bonus game progress value to be taught are added with a lottery (such as a lottery for the amount of teaching), which increases the variety of the pseudo game and reduces the feeling of a fixed race.

In response to the means D-3, "when the teaching amount of the bonus game progress value determined by the teaching amount lottery is a first teaching amount, the pseudo stop game in which the specific identification information is pseudo-stopped is performed, and the pseudo stop game in which the identification information different from the specific identification information is pseudo-stopped is not performed (the pseudo stop game in which the identification information different from the specific identification information is pseudo-stopped is performed when the teaching amount of the bonus game progress value determined by the teaching amount lottery is a second specified amount that is greater than the first teaching amount)." In other words, when a pseudo stop display is performed even though it is not possible to stop display the specific identification information, it does not look very good, so the chances are relatively reduced, and when it is derived, the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value is taught to be relatively large, so it can provide more pleasure than the bad look.

Means D-8. A gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-7, characterized in that it is provided with a specialized transition means for determining whether or not to transition to a specialized state in which the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value in the bonus state is divided into a plurality of parts and can be taught or suggested by the pseudo game.

According to method D-8, in the special state, the player can progress through the game while always hoping for a transition to the specialized state, thereby improving the gameplay after transition to the special state.

When a transition to the specialized state is determined, the number of times the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value is taught or suggested by the pseudo game may be determined all at once, or a teaching lottery may be held each time a transition to the specialized state is determined and the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value is taught or suggested, to determine whether or not to teach or suggest the untaught amount. The specialized state is a state in which a pseudo game that teaches or suggests the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value can be executed multiple times, and may be configured to execute multiple pseudo games in response to one display of the change in the identification information (one game), or may be configured to execute multiple pseudo games in response to the display of the change in the identification information, or may be a combination of these. Furthermore, even if the state transitions to a specialized state, there may be a pattern in which a pseudo game is not executed (processing of whether or not to execute a pseudo game is performed) with the variable display of the identification information being intervened (pseudo game does not have to be executed every time a game is played), a pattern in which the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value is not taught or suggested at all (processing of whether or not to execute a pseudo game is performed), a pattern in which a pseudo game is played at least once as compensation (i.e., a pattern in which the state transitions to a specialized state on the premise that the untaught amount is taught or suggested once), or a pattern in which "0" is shown as a teaching or suggestion of the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value.

Means D-9. The gaming machine described in means D-8, characterized in that the presentation display means is configured to be capable of deriving a suggestion display that suggests an uninstructed amount of the bonus game progress value that is to be taught or suggested in each of the pseudo games in the specialized state.

According to the means D-9, the amount of bonus game progress value that can be taught in the future pseudo game is suggested by the presentation display means, and a game that is different from others can be provided in that the game can be played while being aware of the amount that can be taught. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety of the game and improve the presentation, etc.

Means D-10. The gaming machine described in means D-8 or D-9, characterized in that the specialized transition means is configured to be capable of executing a lottery for transitioning to the specialized state at least when the amount of the held bonus game progress value increases.

According to the method D-10, whenever there is an opportunity to increase the amount of bonus game progress value, the player can play in the hope of a pseudo game occurring, thereby improving the presentation, etc.

Means D-11. The specialized state is a state in which there is an uninstructed amount of the bonus game progress value, and a process is performed to determine whether or not the uninstructed amount is to be taught or suggested by the pseudo game, and the variable display of the identification information can be continuously performed;
A gaming machine described in any of means D-8 to D-10, characterized in that in the specialized state, the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value is divided into multiple variable displays of the identification information so that it can be taught or suggested in conjunction with the pseudo game.

By means of means D-11, it is possible to increase the variety of games played without ending the specialized state with a single game (variable display of identification information), and it is also possible to enjoy pseudo-games for a relatively long period of time. Note that in the specialized state, the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value is taught or suggested by pseudo-games, and this is also intended to include cases where there are patterns in which the variable display of identification information is not necessarily continuous.

Means D-12. A gaming machine according to any one of means D-8 to D-11, characterized in that the pseudo game may not be performed even if the identification information is displayed variably in the specialized state.

Measure D-12 increases the opportunities to enjoy the specialized state for a longer period of time, and increases the variety of gameplay.

In response to means D-3, "the pseudo game may be made executable by making the specific identification information capable of being stopped in the specialized state, and if the specific identification information is not stopped in a state in which the specific identification information is capable of being stopped, the pseudo stop game may not be executed. In this case, it is possible to increase the opportunities to properly teach the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value in a state in which the specific identification information can be made to be stopped, and it is possible to make it easier for players who find that the aspect of the pseudo stop game and the addition are in sync to enjoy a pleasant presentation."

Means D-13. A gaming machine described in any one of means D-8 to D-12, characterized in that the specialized state may be terminated even if there is an untaught amount of the bonus game progress value in the specialized state.

By means of means D-13, the specialized state can be ended suddenly, which can create a stronger interest in playing in the specialized state.

The specialized state may end when the variable display (game) of the identification information is performed a first specified number of times, or when the guide game in which the specific identification information is displayed in a static manner is performed a second specified number of times (which may be once, multiple times, or may be determined by lottery). Also, a guide game may be derived when fake identification information different from the specific identification information is displayed in a static manner, and the specialized state may end when the guide game is derived (a specified number of times) (in this case, the state does not end if the specific identification information could be displayed in a static manner but could not be aligned due to an operating error or the like).

Means D-14. The gaming machine described in means D-13, characterized in that when the specialized state is ended based on the player winning a special game state advantageous to the player in the win/lose lottery while in the specialized state, the gaming machine transitions to the specialized state after the special game state ends.

Means D-14 can eliminate dissatisfaction with the forced termination of the specialized state. A lottery for adding bonus game progress value is also held in the special game state, and the bonus game progress value added by winning the lottery for adding bonus game progress value may be instructed or suggested in the pseudo game in the specialized state after the special game state ends. In this case, the player can enjoy a situation in which advantageous conditions are piled up to become even more advantageous.

Means D-15. A taught amount storage means for storing a taught amount of the remaining amount of the bonus game progress value;
A gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-14, characterized in that it is provided with a means for grasping that the value of the taught amount storage means has become equal to or less than a specified value.

According to the means D-15, when the value of the taught amount storage means is set to a specified value or less, if an untaught amount of the bonus game progress value remains, at least a part of it is taught, and thus it is possible to smartly teach that the bonus game progress value still remains, and thus the continuation of the bonus state. Furthermore, the taught amount storage means makes it relatively easy to manage the remaining amount of the bonus game progress value taught to the player, and it is relatively easy to set effects such as when the taught amount has run out or is about to run out. Note that, "in the case where the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value is not taught in the pseudo game but is merely suggested, the effect display means may derive an untaught amount suggestion mode corresponding to the suggestion of the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value, and when the value of the taught amount storage means is set to a specified value or less, the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value represented by the untaught amount suggestion mode is taught (at this time, all remaining untaught amounts may be taught)."

Means D-16. A gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-15, characterized in that when the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value is less than a specified amount, the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value is not taught or suggested by the pseudo game.

According to the means D-16, the value of the pseudo game can be maintained at a predetermined level or higher, which can contribute to improving the presentation. It is also possible to provide a means for "providing a taught amount display means for displaying the taught amount of the bonus game progress value that has been taught to be held, and when the taught amount displayed on the taught amount display means becomes 0, if there is no untaught amount of the bonus game progress value, the bonus state is terminated, if the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value is equal to or greater than the specified amount, the untaught amount is taught by the pseudo game, and if the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value is less than the specified amount, the untaught amount is taught by a method other than the pseudo game."

In addition, in correspondence with means D-15, when the value of the taught amount storage means is set to a specified value or less, the teaching of the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value may always be performed by a method other than pseudo play, or when the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value is less than the specified amount, the untaught amount may be taught by a method other than pseudo play, and when the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value is equal to or greater than the specified amount, the untaught amount may be taught by pseudo play. Furthermore, the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value may be configured not to be equal to or less than a specific value.

Means D-17. A gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-16, characterized in that the timing at which the pseudo game is started is set in a plurality of patterns between the occurrence of an opportunity to start the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means and the stop display of the variable display of the identification information.

By means of means D-17, it is possible to increase the timing at which a player can expect a pseudo-game to occur in the variable display of the identification information, thereby improving the gameplay and presentation.

Means D-18. Equipped with an operation means operable by a player,
A gaming machine described in any of means D-1 to D-17, characterized in that in the pseudo-game, the result of an instruction lottery to determine whether or not to instruct or suggest an untaught amount of the bonus game progress value is determined based on the operation of the operating means.

Means D-18 can give the player the impression that the amount of the bonus is determined by the player's operation, and since the timing of the instruction or suggestion of the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value is the timing of the player's operation, it is possible to make the player more interested in the pseudo game. Note that the operation means is not particularly limited, and for example, a start operation means operated when starting the variable display of the identification information, a stop operation means operated when stopping the variable display of the identification information, a presentation operation means operated when progressing a specified presentation, etc. can be used.

E. One type of gaming machine is a reel-type gaming machine, such as a slot machine. A slot machine has multiple reels with multiple symbols on them, and when a player inserts a medal and operates a start lever, each reel starts to spin. After each reel starts to spin, the reels stop sequentially when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed. In addition, a slot machine holds a lottery on the condition that a specified number of medals are inserted and the start lever is operated. If a predetermined benefit (a predetermined number of medals is awarded or a special game state advantageous to the player) is won based on the lottery, the predetermined benefit is awarded on the condition that the symbol associated with the predetermined benefit stops on a preset pay line (see, for example, JP 2003-126337 A).

In addition, there is always a demand for innovative presentation of gaming machines.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the presentation.

Means E-1-a. A control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the establishment of a specific condition;
A variable display means for starting a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information when the winning/losing lottery is held, and for stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the winning/losing lottery;
and a performance display means capable of deriving a performance display that is performed in association with the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means and that shows or suggests the result of the winning/losing lottery;
A configuration in which a derivable mode in the variable display of the identification information is determined based on the winning/losing lottery, and when at least a specific mode can be derived in the variable display of the identification information, the specific benefit is won or can be won;
In a privileged state in which the specific privilege is granted, a game accompanied by a variable display of the identification information can be advantageously progressed for the player,
In the bonus state, a bonus game progress value is set, the remaining amount of which changes as the game progresses,
When the bonus game progress value is awarded and when the bonus game progress value is held, at least one of the cases is configured to be able to execute a pseudo game in which the identification information behaves differently from the variable display,
A gaming machine characterized in that the settings of the pseudo game can be changed according to an uninstructed amount of the bonus game progress value that has not been taught as being held.

According to the means E-1-a, while diversifying the pseudo game, information regarding the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value is also provided in the pseudo game, making the pseudo game more interesting. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation, etc.

The meaning of "advantageous to the player" is not limited to the advantage or disadvantage of whether or not it is easy to win a specific combination, but also includes the advantage or disadvantage of whether or not the combination is navigated (navigating the formation of a combination that may not be able to win depending on the player's operation, or navigating the operation method). In addition, examples of "bonus game progress value" include the number of plays (games), the number of game values awarded, and the number of sets that make up a specific number of plays.

Means E-1-b. A control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the establishment of a specific condition;
A variable display means for starting a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information when the winning/losing lottery is held, and for stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the winning/losing lottery;
and a performance display means capable of deriving a performance display that is performed in association with the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means and that shows or suggests the result of the winning/losing lottery;
When a specific benefit is won based on the winning/losing lottery, a specific pattern can be derived in the variable display of the identification information,
In a privileged state in which the specific privilege is granted, a game accompanied by a variable display of the identification information can be advantageously progressed for the player,
In the bonus state, a bonus game progress value is set, the remaining amount of which changes as the game progresses,
When the bonus game progress value is awarded and when the bonus game progress value is held, at least one of the cases is configured to be able to execute a pseudo game in which the identification information behaves differently from the variable display,
A gaming machine characterized in that the settings of the pseudo game can be changed according to an uninstructed amount of the bonus game progress value that has not been taught as being held.

Measure E-1-b basically achieves the same effects as measure E-1-a above.

Means E-2. In the pseudo game, the identification information is displayed in a pseudo-variable manner, and the pseudo stop game in which the variable display of the identification information is displayed in a pseudo-stop manner is executable;
In the pseudo stop game, the pseudo stop display of specific identification information constituting the specific mode among the identification information is associated with the teaching of an untaught amount of the bonus game progress value, and the teaching amount of the bonus game progress value is increased according to the number of times the pseudo stop game in which the specific identification information is pseudo-stop displayed is executed in the pseudo game,
The gaming machine described in means E-1 is characterized in that, in the pseudo-stop game, when identification information different from the specific identification information is pseudo-displayed in a stopped state, the number of pseudo-stop games executed in the pseudo game is likely to be set to be smaller than when the specific identification information is pseudo-displayed in a stopped state.

According to the means E-2, for example, in the case where control is assumed to cause the identification information that is displayed as stopped or pseudo-displayed as stopped when the pseudo-stop game is executed to be displayed as stopped pseudo-displayed (pseudo-stop display) even in the pseudo-stop mode, and if the specific identification information associated with the specific benefit is displayed as stopped when the pseudo-stop game is executed, the specific identification information is displayed as pseudo-stop even in the pseudo-stop game, and the impression that the specific identification information is superimposed, that is, the specific benefit is transitioning (stepping up) to a content that is more favorable to the player, can be given. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance that gives a stronger impression to the player. Furthermore, it is possible to perform a surprise performance in which the specific identification information that should be pseudo-displayed when the pseudo-stop game is started is not pseudo-displayed as stopped, and a different identification information is pseudo-displayed, thereby improving the performance of the pseudo game, etc.

Means E-3. The gaming machine described in means E-2, characterized in that in the pseudo-stop game, a different type of specific identification information that is associated with a greater teaching of the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value than when the specific identification information is pseudo-stopped is sometimes displayed as identification information different from the specific identification information.

According to means E-3, the identification information pseudo-stopped in a pseudo-stop game from a state in which the specific identification information is stopped or pseudo-stopped is not only the specific identification information, but also different specific identification information, which may be pseudo-stopped, and the different specific identification information is associated with more bonus game progress values than the specific identification information. Therefore, it is possible to enrich the presentation when moving to a situation long awaited by the player in which a specific benefit is awarded. As a result, it is possible to improve the presentation and, ultimately, to increase interest. Furthermore, since the amount of teaching of the untaught amount of the bonus game progress value when the different specific identification information is pseudo-stopped is relatively large, the number of pseudo stop games executed in the pseudo game is likely to be set to a small number.

It may also be that "in the pseudo-stop game, the pseudo-stop display of the specific identification information corresponds to a first specified amount of the bonus game progress value, and the pseudo-stop display of the different specific identification information corresponds to a second specified amount that is greater than the first specified amount." In this case, the player can perceive that the bonus game progress value held by the player increases by a first specified amount when the specific identification information is pseudo-stopped once, and that the bonus game progress value held by the player increases by a second specified amount when the different specific identification information is pseudo-stopped once. This makes it possible to make the pseudo-stop game relatively easy to understand, and to avoid situations where the player is unable to concentrate on the presentation due to difficulty in understanding the game.

Means E-4. The variable display means includes a plurality of reel bodies to which the plurality of types of identification information are attached, and a driving means for driving each of the reel bodies;
Each of the plurality of reels is provided with a first identification information constituting the specific identification information and a second identification information constituting the different specific identification information,
The first identification information of the plurality of reels is displayed in a predetermined sequence as a stop display or a pseudo stop display, so that the specific identification information is displayed in a stop display or a pseudo stop display,
The second identification information of the plurality of reels is pseudo-stopped and displayed in a predetermined sequence, so that the different specific identification information is pseudo-stopped and displayed.
The gaming machine described in means E-3, characterized in that the distance between the first identification information and the second identification information is the same for the multiple reels.

According to the means E-4, it is possible to display different specific identification information in a pseudo-stop state by displacing each of the multiple reels by the same amount from a state in which the specific identification information is displayed as a stopped or pseudo-stop state in the variable display means. Therefore, it is relatively easy to control the display of different specific identification information in a pseudo-stop state from a state in which the specific identification information is displayed as a stopped or pseudo-stop state (and to control the display of specific identification information in a pseudo-stop state from a state in which the different specific identification information is displayed as a pseudo-stop state).

In addition, "in the pseudo-stop game, from a state in which the first identification information is displayed as stopped or pseudo-displayed in a predetermined sequence, the reel body may rotate in a direction opposite to the forward direction, which is the rotation direction of the variable display of the identification information, to display the first identification information or the second identification information as stopped or pseudo-displayed in a predetermined sequence, or the reel body may rotate in the forward direction to display the first identification information or the second identification information as stopped or pseudo-displayed in a predetermined sequence." In this case, it is possible to improve the presentation, etc.

Means E-5. The gaming machine described in means E-3 or E-4, characterized in that the effect display means displays a pattern imitating the specific identification information and the different specific identification information that are pseudo-stopped during the pseudo-stop game, and also displays a display that teaches the meaning of the pseudo-stopped display.

By means of means E-5, the meaning of the pseudo-stop display of specific identification information and different specific identification information can be more easily conveyed to the player. In addition, even if a pseudo-stop display appears but does not appear (for example, the speed at which the identification information changes slows down and the pseudo-stop display continues or the speed increases again), it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that a pseudo-stop display has appeared.

Means E-6. The gaming machine described in any one of means E-3 to E-5, characterized in that the pseudo game has not only a pattern in which the pseudo stop game in which the specific identification information is pseudo-displayed and stopped is executed multiple times, but also a pattern in which the pseudo stop game in which the different specific identification information is pseudo-displayed and stopped is executed multiple times, and a pattern in which the pseudo stop game in which the specific identification information is pseudo-displayed and the pseudo stop game in which the different specific identification information is pseudo-displayed and stopped are executed in combination.

By means of means E-6, it is possible to keep the player interested in what will be displayed as a pseudo-stop even after the pseudo-stop game has started, thereby improving the playability of the pseudo-game.

Means E-7. In the variable display of the identification information in which the specific identification information constituting the specific mode can be displayed as a static display or a pseudo-static display, the specific benefit is provided not only when the specific identification information is displayed as a static display or a pseudo-static display, but also when the specific identification information is not derived,
A gaming machine as described in any one of means E-2 to E-6, characterized in that when the specific identification information is not displayed as a stopped symbol or pseudo-displayed as a stopped symbol in the variable display of the identification information that can be displayed as a stopped symbol or pseudo-displayed as a stopped symbol, an auxiliary identification information that is displayed as a stopped symbol or pseudo-displayed as a stopped symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol or pseudo-displayed as a stopped symbol, and when the pseudo-stop game is performed, the auxiliary identification information is displayed as a pseudo-stop symbol as an identification information different from the specific identification information.

According to the means E-7, when the specific identification information is not displayed as a stopped state in the variable display of the identification information that can be displayed as a stopped state, a pseudo game (pseudo stop game) occurs, and a surprise performance is performed in which the player is disappointed that he or she did not win the specific bonus, and is informed of the transition of the bonus state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance. In addition, the pseudo stop game of the specific identification information is associated with the provision of the bonus game progress value, and as a result, the occurrence of the pseudo stop game is also associated with the provision of the bonus game progress value. However, if the auxiliary identification information is displayed as a stopped state or a pseudo stop state at the start of the pseudo stop game, the auxiliary identification information is also displayed as a pseudo stop state in the pseudo stop game. Here, first, it is possible to simplify the control, etc., compared to the case where a configuration is adopted in which control is performed so that the specific identification information is displayed as a pseudo stop state during the variation of the identification information of the pseudo stop game. Furthermore, as described in the above means E-2, when identification information (here, auxiliary identification information) different from the specific identification information is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-stop game, the number of pseudo-stop games executed in the pseudo-stop game is likely to be set to be smaller than when the specific identification information is pseudo-stopped. Therefore, it is possible to reliably teach the granting of the bonus game progress value while producing the pseudo-stopped display of identification information (here, auxiliary identification information) different from the specific identification information in the pseudo-stop game as modestly as possible. In particular, when the specific identification information is stopped or the auxiliary identification information is stopped or pseudo-stopped in the variable display of the identification information that can be pseudo-stopped, if the auxiliary identification information is pseudo-stopped many times in the pseudo-stop game, there is a concern that the player will feel embarrassed. However, by setting the number of pseudo-stop displays in the pseudo-stop game to be small, such a concern can be suppressed.

Means E-8. In the effect display means, a pseudo game effect is derived, which is an effect of the effect display corresponding to the pseudo game;
A gaming machine described in any of means E-2 to E-7, characterized in that in the pseudo-stop game, the manner of the pseudo-game presentation is configured to be different when a specific identification information that constitutes the specific aspect among the identification information is displayed in a pseudo-stop manner and when identification information other than the specific identification information is displayed in a pseudo-stop manner.

According to the means E-8, the manner of the pseudo stop display and the pseudo game presentation can be matched, and the presentation can be improved. In particular, with regard to the means E-7, although the pseudo stop game (the instruction of the awarding of the bonus game progress value) is executed, the auxiliary identification information is displayed as a pseudo stop, not the specific identification information. Therefore, in the pseudo game presentation, instead of instructing that the specific identification information has been pseudo-stopped, the instruction of the awarding of the bonus game progress value is reliably given, thereby avoiding the occurrence of discomfort and improving the presentation.

Means E-9. A gaming machine according to any one of means E-2 to E-8, characterized in that a guidance means is provided that can derive a guidance game that informs the player that the specific identification information among the identification information may be displayed statically or pseudo-statically in the variable display of the identification information that can display at least the specific identification information statically or pseudo-statically.

Measure E-9 makes it possible to make the player aware of the possibility that a specific pattern will be derived (specific identification information will be displayed as a stopped or pseudo-stop display), and effectively creates a point where the player can get excited.

Means E-10: A stop operation means is provided so as to be operable by a player, and is capable of stopping the variable display of the identification information of the variable display means based on the operation of the player;
The gaming machine described in means E-9 is characterized in that, even if the stop operation means is operated based on guidance by the guidance means in a state in which the specific identification information can be displayed in a stopped state or in a pseudo-stop state, the specific identification information may not be displayed in a stopped state or in a pseudo-stop state.

According to the means E-10, in a situation where it is possible to display specific identification information as a static display or a pseudo-static display, a situation may occur in which it is not possible to display specific identification information as a static display or a pseudo-static display due to an operational error, and therefore it is possible to diversify the presentation patterns and, ultimately, to improve the gameplay. In addition, it is possible to maintain the original enjoyment of a gaming machine equipped with a stop operation means, in which the player aims to display specific identification information as a static display.

Means E-11. The stop operation means is provided in plurality,
The specific bonus is configured to be capable of stopping the specific identification information (winning) corresponding to the specific identification information by stopping the stop operation means in a predetermined order, and a push order bonus is provided in which, when a winning is won in a specific game state, the order in which the stop operation means should be stopped is instructed and a first specified number or more of the bonus game progress value is awarded;
In the configuration in which the pseudo game that teaches that the bonus game progress value will be awarded a second specified number or more when the specific identification information corresponding to the bonus with push order is stopped and displayed in the specific game state,
The gaming machine described in means E-10 is characterized in that the first specified number is smaller than the second specified number, and when the specific identification information corresponding to the bonus with push order is displayed in a stopped state, if the uninstructed amount of the bonus game progress value is less than the second specified number, the push order for the specific identification information is not instructed.

According to the means E-11, while observing the rule that when the specific identification information corresponding to the push sequence bonus is stopped and displayed, the bonus game progress value is awarded in a second specified number or more, the winning rate of the push sequence bonus is set high in the specific game state, and thus it is possible to easily generate a pseudo game from the state where the specific identification information corresponding to the push sequence bonus is stopped and displayed. In other words, when the specific game state is finite (for example, 10 games), there is a concern that if the winning rate of the push sequence bonus is lowered, the probability of the pseudo game occurring will be significantly lower. On the other hand, there is a concern that if the winning rate of the push sequence bonus is increased, the probability of transitioning to a specific game state will decrease. Furthermore, there is a concern that if the amount of bonus game progress value awarded when the specific identification information corresponding to the push sequence bonus is stopped and displayed is reduced, the content of the bonus awarded will not match the content of the bonus, which will lead to a decrease in the interest of the player, even though the specific identification information is stopped and displayed with a relatively flashy presentation. In this regard, by making the first specified number less than the second specified number as in means E-11, the opportunities for making it possible to statically display the specific identification information corresponding to the bonus with a pressing sequence are increased, but if the amount of bonus game progress value that can be taught is insufficient to the second specified number, the specific identification information corresponding to the bonus with a pressing sequence is not statically displayed, thereby eliminating the above concerns.

Means E-12. A gaming machine described in any one of means E-2 to E-11, characterized in that the effect display means is configured to be capable of deriving a lineup effect that teaches the identification information that may be pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-stop game.

Means E-12 can easily convey to the player what to expect, and the player can enjoy predicting what will be displayed as a pseudo-stop. The lineup presentation may be configured to suggest the likelihood of the different specific identification information (Means E-3) being displayed as a pseudo-stop (for example, a pattern with a high expectation and a pattern with a low expectation are provided).

Means E-13. A gaming machine described in any one of means E-1 to E-12, characterized in that in the pseudo game, a part of the uninstructed amount of the bonus game progress value that is not taught as being held may not be taught.

Measure E-13 allows for more flexibility in setting pseudo games and bonus game progress values (improving the degree of freedom), making it possible to provide more diverse gameplay and preventing the control from becoming too complicated.

Means E-14. A remaining amount storage means for storing the remaining amount of the bonus game progress value,
A change in the display of the identification information may occur between the time when the specific benefit is won and the time when the player transitions to the benefit state.
In the variable display of the identification information during the period from when the specific benefit is won to when the player is shifted to the benefit state, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not the remaining amount of the benefit game progress value is to be increased.
When a player wins the additional lottery, the stored information of the remaining amount storage means is updated in response to the winning.
A configuration in which, when the identification information is changed during the period from when the specific benefit is won to when the benefit identification information is changed, no instruction is given as to whether or not the additional lottery has been won,
A gaming machine described in any one of means E-1 to E-13, characterized in that the pseudo stop game is set based on the stored information of the remaining amount storage means.

According to means E-14, it is possible to provide variation in the remaining bonus game progress value that is instructed in the pseudo-stop game. In other words, it is possible to create unexpected patterns in the pseudo-stop game, such as an instruction of a larger amount of bonus game progress value than expected, thereby heightening the player's sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to break away from the stereotypical and unchanging presentation of the pseudo-stop game, and further increase interest in the pseudo-stop game.

Means E-15. The variable display means includes a plurality of reel bodies to which the plurality of types of identification information are attached, and a drive means for driving each of the reel bodies;
Each of the plurality of reels is provided with specific configuration identification information that constitutes the specific identification information,
The specific configuration identification information of the plurality of reels is displayed in a static manner in a predetermined first sequence, whereby the specific identification information is displayed in a static manner;
A gaming machine described in any of means E-1 to E-14, characterized in that the specific configuration identification information of the multiple reels is displayed in a stopped state in a predetermined second sequence, thereby indicating that the different specific identification information is displayed in a stopped state.

According to means E-15, both the static display of specific identification information and the static display of different specific identification information are performed by statically displaying specific configuration identification information, and can be changed by simply slightly shifting a specific reel body. Therefore, it is relatively easy to control the display of a pseudo-static display of different specific identification information from a state in which specific identification information is statically displayed (and control the display of a pseudo-static display of specific identification information from a state in which different specific identification information is statically displayed).

It is also possible to combine the technical matters described in the above means A, B, C, D, and E as appropriate (it is also possible to combine parts of each means). In addition, in each of the above embodiments, it is also possible to add or omit the technical matters described in the above means A, B, C, D, and E as appropriate.

The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

a. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine. A more detailed example of the form is "a pinball gaming machine equipped with an operating means (game ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (launching motor, etc.) that bounces and launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a game area to which the launched game balls are guided, and each ball entry means (general entry device, variable entry device, operating port, etc.) arranged within the game area."

b. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine with a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. A more detailed example of the embodiment is "a pinball gaming machine that includes an operating means (a gaming ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (a launching motor, etc.) that bounces and launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a predetermined gaming area (for example, the gaming area is composed of a gaming board surface, etc.) that extends in a substantially vertical direction and to which the launched gaming balls are guided, and each ball entry means (a general winning device, a variable winning device, an operating port, etc.) that is arranged within the gaming area, and that is configured so that the behavior of the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area can be visually observed."

c. The gaming machine in each of the above means or each of the pinball gaming machines is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

d. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a reel type gaming machine such as a slot machine. A more detailed example of the embodiment is "a reel type gaming machine that is equipped with a variable display means (specifically, a rotating body unit such as a reel unit) that displays a variable display (specifically, the rotation of a reel, etc.) of an identification information string (a pattern string; specifically, a rotating body such as a reel or belt with patterns) consisting of a plurality of identification information (patterns) and then stops and displays the identification information string, and that is configured so that the variation of the identification information (pattern) is started due to the operation of a start operation means (specifically, a start lever), the variation of the identification information (pattern) is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (specifically, a stop button), and a gaming value is awarded on the condition that the identification information aligned on the pay line at the time of the stop is a specific identification information."

e. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine (particularly a reel-type gaming machine that uses balls as the gaming medium and is similar to a slot machine). A more detailed example of the embodiment is a gaming machine that includes "a variable display means (specifically, a rotating unit such as a reel unit) that displays a variable display (specifically, the rotation of a reel, etc.) of an identification information string (a pattern string; specifically, a rotating body such as a reel or belt with patterns) consisting of a plurality of identification information (patterns) and then stops the identification information string, the variation of the identification information (pattern) is started by operating a start operation means (specifically, a start lever), the variation of the identification information (pattern) is stopped by operating a stop operation means (specifically, a stop button), and a gaming value is awarded on the condition that the identification information aligned on the pay line at the time of the stop is a specific identification information, and further includes a ball receiving tray (upper tray, etc.) and a take-in means that takes in gaming balls from the ball receiving tray and a pay-out means that pays out gaming balls to the ball receiving tray, and the start condition of the game is established when the game balls are taken in by the take-in means."

10... slot machine, 15... performance display device, 31... display window, 41... reel unit, 42... reel, 61... stepping motor, 71... start lever, 72-74... stop switches, 101... performance button, 111... sub-control device, 112... display control device, 131... main control device.

Claims (1)

A variable display means including a plurality of reel bodies to which a plurality of types of identification information are attached and a drive means for driving the reel bodies;
A start operation means operable by a player;
A start operation detection means for detecting an operation of the start operation means;
A plurality of stop operation means are provided corresponding to the plurality of reels, each of which is operable by a player;
A stop operation detection means for detecting an operation of the stop operation means;
A control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit to a player based on the establishment of a start condition accompanied by detection by the start operation detection means;
A drive control means for starting the drive of the reel body based on the establishment of the start condition, and for stopping the drive of the corresponding reel body based on the establishment of a stop condition accompanied by detection by the stop operation detection means,
In a gaming machine configured to be able to stop the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery at a specific position visible to a player based on the establishment of the stop condition,
A specific performance means capable of executing a specific performance including a specific operation of the reel body;
A presentation display means capable of executing a presentation display that indicates or suggests the result of the lottery;
a special effect display means for displaying a special effect when the specific effect is executed ;
The gaming machine includes an opening and closing member,
The opening and closing member is configured to be able to know that it has been opened,
The state of the reel body that is pseudo-stopped and displayed in a specific operation of the reel body is different depending on the value to be given,
When the first value is assigned,
When the specific performance is performed without knowing that the opening and closing member has been opened after it is determined that the specific performance is to be performed, the specific performance is performed in a first mode,
When the specific performance is performed in a state where it is determined that the opening and closing member is opened after the determination to perform the specific performance, the specific performance is performed in a second mode different from the first mode,
In the case where a second value different from the first value is assigned,
When the specific performance is performed without knowing that the opening and closing member has been opened after it is determined that the specific performance is to be performed, the specific performance is performed in a third mode,
When the specific performance is performed while it is understood that the opening and closing member is opened after it is determined that the specific performance is to be performed, the specific performance is performed in a fourth mode different from the third mode,
In the second aspect, a display is executed using characters that are not displayed in the first aspect but are displayed in the second aspect .

Images